JmMmfmZi Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2007 with funding from IVIicrosoft Corporation http://www.archive.org/details/firsttwelvepsalmOObailrich SCHOOL AND COLLEGE BOOKS, PUBLISHED AND SOLD BY S. J. MACHEN, 8, D'OLIER-S TRE E T, DUBLIN SOLD IN LONDON BY LONGMAN; WHITTAKER ; WASHBOURNE ; HOULSTON AND stoneman; r. tyas, etc. EDINBURGH: J. MENZIES ; AND ALL BOOKSELLERS. HEBREW. PSALMS OF DAVID (first twelve) in Hebrew, to which is ap- pended a Hebrew Grammar, by the Rev. W. Baillie, LL. D., 8vo. cloth. BAILLIE'S (Rev. WM.) LL.D. SCHOOL HEBREW GRAMMAR, compiled from the best Authorities, and designed as an Introduction to that Sacred Tongue. 8vo. pp. 112, cloth, lettered, 6s. 6d. GREEK. DARLEY'S (Rev. J. R.) GRECIAN DRAMA; being a Treatise on the Dramatic Literature of the Greeks, pp. 570, 8vo. cloth, 12*. DARLEY'S (Rev. J. R.) TREATISE on HOMER, with Miscel- laneous Questions, &c. pp. 166, 12mo. cloth, 5s. KING'S (Rev. L. W.) ELEMENTS of the GREEK LANGUAGE, comprehending also the Principles and Definitions of Universal Grammar, with a Copious Syntax, &c. pp. 108, 12mo. bound, 2s. 6d. I.ATZN. SCHOOL AND COLLEGE VIRGIL, by R. Galbraith, H. Ow- GAN, &c. &c. Containing the Bucolics, Georgics, and JEneids, complete, with COPIOUS English Notes, one thick volume, 12mo. A new and enlarged Edition, revised by H. Edwardes, A. M., T. C. D. The Notes are extremely copious, and have been selected with the utmost care. The Geography, History, Chronology, Mythology, and Anti- quities, are so fully explained, as to supersede, to a great extent, the neces- sity of reference to other books. Translations (not too literal), or ordines verborum, of the more difficult sentences are given, and no pains have been spared to render this work adapted to the present advanced state of educa- tion. New Edition, nearly ready. " This is an excellent edition of Virgil. The Prolegomena ably written, and the English notes collected from the most learned Continental commentators and critics, supplying all the information the student can stand in want of. We have not seen a more careful or instructive publication of this class, and we heartily recommend iV— Literary Gazette. ETON LATIN GRAMMAR, revised and corrected by R. Gal- braith, T. CD., Editor of the School Virgil, &c., a new edition, pp. 120, 12mo. bound. Is. 6d. In this edition some of the definitions are amended ; and carefully selected notes have been added to the declensions, &c. For the Latin rules of the Eton, the excellent syntax of Ruddi- man, with additions, has been substituted,— the conciseness and judicious arrangement of which have justly procured for it a preference in most classical schools. AL VARY'S PROSODIAL RULES, with an Analysis in English, appropriate Examples, and much illustrative matter ; to which is appended an Exposition of the Horatian Metres, by the Rev. Wm. Baillie, LL. D., &c., new edition, 18mo. bound. Is. FRENCH. Just Published t neatly Coloured, Price 2«. 6d., COMPLETE TABLES OF THE FRENCH VERBS, regular and irregular, by which the formation of any tense or person required, may be im- mediately found. By Desire Pontet, ex-Professor of Modern Languages at the Ecole Royale des Mines de Paris, and author of several works on Education. By the same Author, FRENCH TEACHER, first series. Being an easy Word and Phrase Book, with literal translation opposite the French. Second part, con- taining a selection of interesting and amusing Stories, and giving directions where the consonant is to be carried on to the next vowel — where e is silent, and the vowels long or short — diflBculties insurmountable to beginners. In 18mo. pp. 104, price Is. FRENCH TEACHER, second series : or, L'ECHO DES SA- LONS, being familiar phrases used daily in polite conversation, with a Dic- tionary at the end (giving the pronimciation based on English sounds) of all the words and idioms in the work, &c. ENGUSH. GREGORY'S ENGINEERING, &c. Being an extensive Treatise on Surveying (including Trigonometrical) and Levelling; with their appli- cation to the construction of Common Roads, Rail-Roads, Canals, Harbours, Docks, Tunnels, Viaducts, Aqueducts ; improvement of Lakes, Rivers, Bays, &c. by drainage, embankment, and cultivation ; to which is prefixed a Treatise on Trigonometry, applicable to the various branches of Engineering, &c. By John Gregory, Esq. Vol. L 8vo. cloth, pp. 314, Wood Cuts, &c., 10«. 6d. Vol. II. completing the work, nearly ready. YOUNG'S PRONOUNCING and ETYMOLOGICAL SPELL- ING-BOOK, adapted for Junior and Senior Classes, to the purposes of Li- beral Education. In which the Principles of Pronunciation and Etymology are gradually developed; and the Greek, Latin, and French Roots of several thousand words added ; together with Etymological Exercises, Critical Ob- servations, &c. By TowNSEND Young, LL.D., 12mo. The First Part* containing the pronouncing spelling, pp. 120, price \s. bound, or the two parts bound together, 12mo. pp. 168, \s. 6d. THE HAND BOOK OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR, comprising in a concise and simple form, the substance of all the most approved English Grammars extant. Also, AN EXTENSIVE GLOSSARY of the principal words made use of in this Treatise, pointing out the roots and meanings of those derived from the Hebrew, Greek, Latin, and French Languages, with a re- ference to the pages where the words first occur in the Treatise, so as to show their application more clearly, and to supply the student with a selection of Greek and Latin terms, with their meanings in English, that will contribute to render his future introduction to the study of these languages comparatively easy. l8mo. bound, pp. 160, price 1*. COMPENDIUM OF MODERN GEOGRAPHY, peculiarly adapted to the capacities of Children. By the Rev. Edward Groves. Fourth Edi- tion, considerably enlarged and improved by the introduction of the latest geographical discoveries. In 1 Smo. price 6d. ON THE USE AND STUDY OF HISTORY. By W. Torrens M*CuLi.Acii, Esq., Barrister at Law. In 8vo. cloth, pp. 336, price 7*. 6d. " Thin ia no Uinvly-pcnncd treatise— no cold or c«utiou»ly written essay, but the brilliant convernation of a man of thought and feeling, ami tlie fricruUy outpouring of a philosophic and cultivati-d miidl. Tin iiurit <>r the iHx.k iv, that if >/.< ,ikt. It \b not dirtt!te' and I 'ir, which tellN us that the mnn who spoakw is in «n ntt7W I. n • T -I. vjv: ^' T : V--: I- - t > • ^T •• : - - V T •• : T T : t : It t it v : v ^ t i : -^b 1 12-by 5 : n^in ^3D'^n~iTO r*^3-D« •'S D'^ycJ-in ]3"b^b 4 I <•• - - I ^v : • V-: - • i' A- T : It v i nin"' nv-^3 6 ♦D^p'^'^!^ ni2?2 D^^wran"! taerrJias c^mJ'n Jizsp'' T :*. -J- 1' I- • - ^--:i- • T - : -st : • r • t :v j '-.t I •• J* t : '.v/ : A* •- VJV fc PSAL. II. Hpb?D I :in-!2^n> 2 : p>T5)sn^ D^!2«b?i Q>i:i -ic^di nab ii. n ^^H* : - A* J : It t TV T ; -1:1. I • : - : t : - -(^t : i »''. i: v v T -: at ; • -j-T - i" I" -: jv • t *.* : -: a- : i *'Dsi 6 : iabnn> iDinnn^ iswn i^a^bs nsT tn 5 : inb-:i2;b*' ._.|_^ ,.._.|-; J _. ,_ ^_. J.... J"-: bN Av t -:i- • «. jT : V : • V • <- : i- : • : J - * -: ta- j* .- «.-•• : a2Q3n -i^^i^ ^bDS bns tDntr?s D37*-in 9 : v"ih->dd« Tjn.Tn«i ,..._. J.. ^. . . ^v :- vj- ; •• .1. viT •• : - :iT-..-:l- nin^-nw ^inr 11 : rns ^tDDtc? ^no^n ^ib^strn DobD nn3?i 10 JT : V J : • VIT •• : J :IT' a- : - j- t : t - :«. ,. '.,.... . . '.„.,...'... - ' :- iTT :• •: at ;• : \ "J t .. : - a - j- : • J-: • A PSALMI. PSAL. III. -n» n^n> 2 : iaa Di^tt?n« 1 >2Qtt imna 1Mb -itoto III. :» T T :v I : T : - <••: • :t : a* t: j : • ttI:j"^':-: v:i •- itt y r --att j- : ^wAn Dn)D-i nins >-t3?2i p)a nin*' nrisi 4 : nbo D^nb«n !• ^' •• • : A--:i- j-T T :v jt - : tIv • i" •»nn5i2? •'SM 6 : nbo wip nn'D >^iv^^ Knp« nin'^-bs >b"ip 5 • :- T J--: Tiv J :i v.- -:i — y«T : v jt : v • v AT ^ ; !••• T •*. I •!••::• jt ; i.* • a • v: t^t mt tj* • !• - v: •<•• • I T : n^*«-b3-nM At :- ^t I- T :i- • j* t : \." • 'av j-:l t : nbD ^n^-Q ^)3r-b:? T IV jv T : • J : - PSAL. IV. >nb« I >333? >N-)p2i 2 : mb ni^T^ nii'^asa ns^axib IV. i <•• v: •<••-: • :t; Ct: j:' •:• -^••-:i- • •• : !• T • : J- : ••• t"> a* t : j- : • t -^ * : • nbsn-'^s ^vi^ 4 : nbo nTD ^itrJpnn p^^-i ^^rinwn rn^bdh •'-rin^ jt : • !• : T IV jTT V ; - : a* j tv:iv t • : •*. j* : •iNi2nn-b«i Sim 5 : vb« •'«nps vdw^ n'^n> ib Ton nin** ^Tv;iv -I: : • It •• ^' : T : - : • ^t : a j« t t is. JintonJ) p"T!i-''nnT -innt 6 : nbo ^ish^ nb^'nwh^-bv Dsnnb:^ ^-i^m : • vAv •• : • J : ' tIv j; v : - : • - v : - : \ j: • JVT ^ •• T Ti: J V" :- I* J* : I J'- It : niba72i 9 : -is-i Dtt^i-rri") Dan":? ni^ >2ibn nnJiab nnna 8 : nin'^ J T : It JT !• : *. tt : •• •• a- • : jt : • t j-t it : : •»3n''tt?in niDnS nnb nin'* nns-^s ^o^'^wi nnsirw ii'^rn"' *'" * • - V T ATT : JT : jt - I' JT ' : vT : : V T ; - PSAL. V. I n^'^i^n nia« 2 : mb -liDt)^ nib^nan-bw n-i^aab v. n Tj'-:i- «.-T-: I't: ^r* • :- v -;•— :i- -^3 "Tlbwi ^sba "yid bipb 1 nn^tt?pn 3 : ^a^an na'^s nin> •• ^-r '••<'•.• - • : - : t <• : - i- • -: t j- at : : nD!iHi T|^-iriyN -ipia ''bip rac?n -ipa nin^ 4 : bbenw TT>bN iv.--:i- : Tv:i-/ v ^ a- ' j- , • 'vv t : It - : v ' v •• jQS'^n^-rib 6 ; vn ^-la^ t^b nnw 1 ran v^n-bw t^b 1 ss 3 J !-•• • • IT J :\: I TA- - JV -T t •• < <. ^I? ''^.^'^ ^^^ ^ • ^"^^ >b37b-b3 nwib ^>D^r laab o^bbin '^» " • ' •• - •• viT '--:, T t -t av •• vjv: • .. v nrvs Hin« n^on n'-ia ^Sni 8 : nin> 1 nvn> nhmy\ d^d^-k^^n I PSALMI. vt: • : • •• : "»tt^Ni VT : • T : • : <•• <• iv : - j-t : «.- :- tt7«n ii nJip^bn*^ niw'^ cd'-is n^ns-nnp nisin • v: •• • -:i- I • -:i- t : at ; - ; t viv j~ ^mb^'i 12 : Tyn •in»-'^3 ittn^'^^n Dn^3?tt7Q n'-is dn^ni!irbtt 'nbs'' : : •: it ^t i* a- • - v •• : -v. j : .;•.••• v -: i * : • : ^)Dtt? >nn« Vjn ^!^b3?'»*) i'a'^b!? Tioni .')33-i'> tabi^^b "qn •'Din-ba IV : ^"-: I ; J i Z-: a"t j"t : ••-:k jt : t •• v t IV : : - y T T • - At : >• - v* t : r - i* PSAL. VI. nin'^ 2 : -rnb ni^Ttt n'^i^Dt^n-b^ ni2>:i3s n^^dh vi. i t : I't: j : ' . . ; _ - .; v. -j..- ; |_ -b^a« "^s nin> >33n 3 : ^^n^^n Trn^ns-bsi >3n^:Din ^B«si-bN .;.,<• T ; '^"t m-:-: j : it-:i- -i: 'a- • i ^ :-.- Jr-: a: jt -; : • • :-:«. It t -: J-::* v.* at : •^••t : 'Jt IV : - -J- : • •• • A* : - jt : - t :v jt It t - t : •'riTOWs I ^r\v^^ 7 : tyb-mi^ >?3 bistt?2 ^n^t niJsa ]>s ^3 6 • T : - 1: • :<-T it v i j* : • av :• vjt - j- <• Dv^T^ nt27TO 8 : nC)T2ii^ >bnv ^nvi^iii "^ntsD nb-^b-b^:! nnb^ -j- • JT : It ;, IV : - .;• :- • t : • : a» t • r :-v t: jv : - T : T A- i\wy^ 11 : np"^ Tiben nin^ •»n3nn nin'^ y^atr? lo : ^^22 bip <•• Jt* ^' t • : T : A • T • : t :«. j- t l* ; • j -It J" s T AT : I T :<> j -riT*: PSAL. VII. : '^3*'):2^-12i ti??ii5-nnTb3? nin-^b nt»-ntr7« -riib )V^w Vll. t I* • : V •• : • - AT I- ^T IV-: ^'t: t* ^htD^-IQ 3 : >3b>.!^ni '^bi^-bsD *'Dr>tt?in ^rvon ^21 >nb« nin^ 2 j: • V •!•• • - : - : t • -j" • i • a* t a : - v.\ jt ; nrft Ti^ra-DM >nbs nin*» 4 : b^-2» 7"»«i pns >tt7D3 nnss A -J-T • - v:*. JT : !•- j": •• a- :- j-:-; : Dpn ^-ni!^ n^bnw'i 37"i •^^sbtc? •'/nbiarnM 5 : ^bd^i bir-a7^-n« It •• J' : I t: --:It at • ; j • : -t*. • it-: •:)-r J** : - VTTiv • : At- vjtt j :": " - : ' :- •* <-i* •^b^ n-i-i^i nni2 ni-inrs wban TfQss 1 nin> nxs-ip 7 : nbo T y : at : I J : - : •• t*<. v - : t : ?s«b mi?i 8 : n*^-*)!^ DDtt?» T I 7T - T V T : TAv : I I *•••:<. j — :i- t •• ^t; ♦ a2 PSALMl. T T : • iTT J' \: V : • : at : -^ •• : t j' - v-t t : : p''*^2 cribs ni-'ba-i niab )nb.^ p^'^!^ piDn-i cz!^3?tt?n i rn b«i p^^'2 i^sitt; D'^ribs 12 inb-ntr?'' v^w^i D'^ribs-br •'S^a 11 : n^Di^**"! Tj-ii inttJp C7itDb> ia-in :i^w^ t^b-DS 13 : Di'^-boa d^'t Tiv: I :- - T i : - a : • j : - t^. j • i t : j- pN-ban'' nnn 15 : brs'* D^-^b'rb vkh m^-^bs r^n ibi 14 VAT V - : J-" It : • ^* : i : t • vat •• : i* " :v. : byQ> nntt72i bhA AiinBn^') ma nia 16 : npw nb'^i bjsi n-^m It:* - j- : •- A" : : -- tt«. vit -jt: tt ^t t : nin> miN 18 im^ ionn lipip bj?"} itrt^-Q ibx23? 1 n-im'^ 17 JT : jv !•••• J T-: : :t j- : a .- j t-; j t I : V ^T : I •• t : — :- a : • : PSAL. VIII. -n^ jji'^a'TW nin^ 2 : mb -liatD n^nsn-bs? n-!^3»b viii. n T •• -: s)D 3 : D*'Dt^n-br '^I'^n nan ntt?« V'"^«n-b:)2 Tj^a? -t^-^tn <•• -iTT - - : JT : JV-: vat t t : : •*. j* - : DpariDS) n>i« n^sc^nb ^n-iis ^y^b Vr nir^'' n^pb'^') 1 D-^^biy I— : • •• J' : - : av : - ;- : «. t :v- • • : i : • : i t:it JV-: • T : - J"r av : : v j"-:i- vtv jv :v !• layiD ^n-)Dnni 6 : ^g-rpsn -^s nis-p-i ."la-istn-^s tt?i3«-n» 5 - :«. J" : - : - iv : : • j- tt v av : : • i • j v; t b^ Tf>i> "^braa ^nb^iron 7 : Jinirarn nim liaai D^nb«D AVT J"-: I- : •••:-*, !••:-: jt t : v t : a- v:i" nis!r 9 : ^ib nians nai obs Q'^cbwi n32 8 : vba-i-nnn nna? *• It T ^-:i- -: at s j*t-:I- jv 't ; - - i- t j- n>^w-nD ^a'^a^TW nin> 10 :n>i3'^ nims -lir D'-n >a-T5i n'^iatr f- T A •• -: ^t : !•- J :r •• ^r- y : • - tv : V7«n-b:D2i r^i^w PSAL. IX. 7-nn> niiw 2 : -nib liaTn pb nj)tt-b3? n-!?3nb ix. r:j mBTw "nn n!ibr«i nniabw 3 : TJ^n*1Nbo3■b^ nSsDN '^ab-bsa ^T :--: AT JT : viv; jt : ; v iv : :• j ^r --: a- • t .. n^wv'^'2 5 : Tj>3BD ^ist^^-i ^bw3> ninw '^n^iw-n'itra 4 : 7i>br tok? T • TV !• iVT • : : J : IT- a t >- : i i : i : v j : • yoh msH D>i2 mya 6 : piir tacitz? mddS nna?'' •'^''"n >^Bdn AT t T :j-* it :j-T viv j- •• • ; T : >-T A' •; J" T : ' D'ny'i nsaS niinn ^n 1 n^^wn 7 : 137*) cbiyb n^ritt Diatr? PSALMI. tDQtrJjsb pis ntt?*- nh'^vb nin>i 8 : msin ca-ist inK ,,ntr?ni jt: •- y." A"" jT ; T ->. T I- jt:- v-.t t :a-t "'n'n 10 :Dnt»>)22i d^jss^ r'^'' P'^^si bnn ^bw> «!im 9 nsoa J" : I :». J : ; •: Itt - J ' : t : • at- jt : • jt •• ^-T2n ^is'is ntt?> nin>b ^in^aT 12 :n^n> r]>w'r^ n:iii-^h >^ Tj^att? J- - A • J" T -V. :- IT : jv : I T : -T i <• av : npv^ n6w fc^b niDt Dni« d>?2'^ tt?nh->3 13 : vnib"^b!? n^ivn J — .)- ^ y J att jt • T*. J" I* It I* -: • - t = viT •— : r- • • : : at : i * -it*, j •• : t : •••:t<. I't-: IVT I • T -T A* - J"-:-: j'.'r ' : t t:--: -^- : 17 :Db2-i msb: ^i^Tbti ^irntrnsi Jito nntt?2i D>i:i -ivntD 16 It : - ^t: : • t t .» v iv: at -j- : • *■ j :i t 18 : nbo )^>^ii vwn tr^pia vss biss nbv tiiQaJa mn> i riia T IV ^ T • AT T J" T-y. - J : VT T VT : * T : - < n!^2b k^b *>3 19 :D^nb« -"nDtr? n^^'irbs nVistr^'b d>27C7-i ^n^tt?** -vt\. j <• !• v; .»•••• : • T T A : • J' T : j t Ts?^-b« nin*" n^^p 20 : -ivb m^n d'^to mpn p'^-nw n::t:^> > e**^y jt - t :(. JT i-t ^- ••-: J- : • a; v j- t • ^^"T"^ nn^ nniD 1 nin^ nn^S 21 : ?T^33-b27 Q^ii ^tost^^ c?i2W J :!•• JV T T T : ''^r pb^^ vwn n*i«:ia T TV. J •• • !• It T J *. • : • : It- A'T J- :• t tv j --:!-: iow nnhs rtz^n 4 : nin-^ 1 v«3 'rini r^^b-i itt7S2 ni«n-b3? -V. -j: T T IT : J * -J" A :- j— :l- ni7-b::2i 1 iD-n .nb>n~ 5 : vnizar^-bs n DnnD^s ani^n nn«»s 1 ntt?^ 8 : ]i«i b^s^? iiiti?^ nnn j-:i- • t : • -V. •••-; --:i- : <•••• vitt *>tt : - i- n'-)N^ nsDn n>-i«3 1 -ino^asi nn«^ 9 : ^Db!^> n^bnb vii-'i "^p3 v:v^. •.. : •• :- : t : • - v:iv i : • jt : •• i: t •• a't •'-T : -At ;v : • i : • : ^ : t ; • t .» : - a- t j : - -bs viQ n^non bw nrjtr? iabs n)2« 11 :cw3^n vzi^^ri >d»n3Si TT J*: • A" -JT • :\. j-T i*t:j"* t -:i- in>°2v n3tt?n-b« tjt «tt73 bw nin*» nr:s)p 12 tn^^sb nw")>D*"ijy I'T-: ;- : • - avt jt: ••*. t : 16 ts^^n --:i- I :-i" • ^ : It avt jt vv<. jt : It : • iT-ri nih'' tDbaJb 18 : tjdts n^'ttJpn uiA ]'>3n nin"> nr 5:227 n^i25^ jt-r t < : • iv:t -»• : - t • J' t at : t : j- t j-t-.- viT t • v: j-:i- A, J- - PSAL. XI. A • : - : J : i ••<. • • t t i- v t : -••-:!- nn>-br Dsrn naais nnJp vidit D'^^chn nan ^i 2 : liB!^ DDin vAv - JT • j: I V V : :• • t :»t v* <• i • jv :- :bys-nK5 p>'!\^ ^!iDnn> nint^n >3 3 : nb-nirJ^b bss-i^a ni-T'b iTT - •- A "IT" T -V J" I" " : • : V ; j ' VD37D27 !iTn> va'^r i«D3 D^):)t^a nin> iitJip b^^ns 1 nin> 4 ^T - : - Av;lv iT " ; : • 'v- t - t : : t <- " i: "^!^ nin** 5 : gin >dsi ^iny^ JT nr ATT J" : T t:». jt : • v*- t : itt j": -: : • : iD^2D •iTH'' ntb'> nns nip-T!i nin*' p^-^^^-^s 7 : oDis i"T J-.iiv t T A" T jt: t :v j-- !• It PSAL. XII. nin^ n37^2?in 2 : inb itoD n>a>ttt2?n-b27 ns^ai^b xii. n> T :v T J' I'T : J : ' • • : - - -j"- : i- V : -1: : nb") nba nipbn nstt? .inyn-nw J-;. f t :v J":- I"-: j"t »." : at-: j- : J"" •T»2i23 ^aicrbb I riDN -itrw 5 : rrh^ii nnaia ]itt7^ nipbn • :-\ J" : • :iT » 5)2nN 5^3"^n5b 'T- J- :v v-:vi" ••-: j • it -> t v at- J..t : ninttw nin** nintoM 7 : ib n'^D'- :;tt7*»i n^'irw nin** nofc^'' D^pw VT-: T : i : I- i - j-t -": j* t at : j- t^ nin^-nnw 8 : D'>nv:iw ppii^ ynvh b^bva ^-inij j^ds ninniD *r i It - 'Itt : • t\ : vatt j*-:i- tv vjv j : ]^3bnn^ D^ytth s^io 9 : cbiyb jit ni^n-i^ 1 ^^n>^r\ DiDirn at-:' r r : • t it : i v - • v : • a- : : • : ciw ^3nb n^bV D")3 PSALML PSAL. I. 0-BEATiTU DINES illius-viri (vel beatus est ille vir) qui non ambulavit in-consilio impiorum, et-in-via peccatorum non stetit, et-in-sede derisorum non sedit. 2. Quin-immo in-lege Yehovse oblectatio-ejus, et-in-lege-ejus meditabitur die ac- nocte. 3. Et-erit sicut-lignum plantatum super rivos aquarum quod fructum-suum dabit in-tempore-suo, et-folium-ejus non marcescet : et-omne quod faciet, prospere-faciet. 4. Non sic isti-impii; quin-immo sicut-gluma quam dispellet-eam ventus. 5. Ideo non stabunt impii in-judicio, et-peccatores in-coetu justorum. 6. Quoniam seiens (est) Yehovah viam justorum : et-via impiorum peribit.* PSAL. 11. Propter-quid tumultuata3-sunt gentes, et-populi medita- bantur inane? 2. Statuent-se reges terrse, et-principes con- ^ Pronunciation of Psalm I. 1 . Ashre haish asher lo halakh bahatzath reshahira, u-bhedherekh chat- talm 16 gnamadh, u-bhemoshabh letzim lo yashabh. 2. Ki-im bethorath Yehovah chephtso u-bhethoratho yehge yomam valailah. 3. Vehayah kehets shathool gnal palghe maim, asher piryo yitten behitto, vehalehoo lo yibbol vecol asher yahaseh yatsliach. 4. Lo-ken hareshahim, ki-im cammots asher tiddephennoo rooach. 5. Gnal-kcn lo-yakiimoo reshahim bammishpat, vechattaim bahadhath tsaddikim. 6. Ki-yodheang Yehovah derek tsaddikim, vedherek reshaim tobhedh. 8 PSALMI. sultant pariter, adversus Yehovam, et-adversus Unctuin-(vel Messiam) ejus? 3. {Dicentes,) Dirumpamus vincula-eorum ; et-projiciamus a-nobis funes-eorum. 4. Ele habitans in-coelis ridebit, Dominus subsannabit eos. 5. Tunc loquetur ad-eos in-ira-sua, et-in-furore-suo terrebit-eos; 6. (Dicens,) Et-ego unctione-inauguravi regem-meumj super Sion, montem sancti- tatis-meaj. 7. Enarrabo ipsum statutum, Yehovah dixit ad- me, Filius-meus C5 tu, Ego hodie genui-te. 8. Postula a-me, et-dabo gentes hsereditatem-tuam ; et-possessionem-tuam fines terrse : 9. Conteres-eos in-virga ferrea : sicut-vas (fingentis, i. e.) figull penitus-disperges-eos. 10. Et-nunc, reges, in- telligite, erudimini-vos, judiees terrae. 11. Servite Yehovse in-timore, et-exultate in-tremore. 12. Osculamini filium ne- forte irascatur, et-pereatis e via, cum exarserit vel-paululum ira-ejus. Bead (sunt) omnes confidentes in-eo !* PSAL. III. Canticum Davidis in-fugiendo (in fuga)-ejus a-faciebus ■ Pronunciation ofiPsalm II. ^ 1. Lammah rageshoo goiin ooleummim yehgoo rlk. 2. Yithyatseboo malke erets verozenim nosedoo yachad gnal (or hhal) Yehovah, ve-gnal Meshicho. 3. (Omerim) nenatteka eth-moserothemo, ve-niishlicah mim- ra§nnoo gnabhothemo. 4. Yosheb bashshamaim yischak, Adonai yilhag- lam6. 5. Az yedhabber elemo bheappo, oobhacharono yebhahalemo. 6. V&ani nasachti malki gnal Tsion har-kodshi. 7. Asapperah el-chdk Yehovah amar elai, beni attah, ani hayyom yelidhtlka. 8. Sheal mim- menni ve-ettSna goim nachalatheka va-achuzzatheka aphse arets. 9. TerShem beshebhet barzel. kiclee yotsCr tenappetstMn. 10. Ve-hattah melaklm haakiloo, hivvaseroo shophote arets. 1 1. Gnibdoo eth- Yehovah beyirah, ve-giloo birhfidah. 12. Naahshekoo bhar, pen-yednSph ve tho- bhedoo dl.erek kee yibhar kiinhat appo, ashre cdl-khdsc bho. PSALMI. Abshalom filii-sui. 2. Yehovah quam multiplicati-sunt an- gustiatores-mei : multi insurgentes adversum-me. 3. Multi dicentes animse-meae, non (est) salus ei in-Deo, Selah. 4. Et-tu, Yehovah, clypeus pro-me : gloria-mea, et-exaltans caput-meum. 5. Voce-mea ad Yehovam clamabam : et-ex- audivit-me de-monte sanctitatis-suse, Selah. 6. Ego accubui, et-dormivi, evigilavi : quia Yehovah sustentabit-me. 7. Non timebo a-decem-millibus populi : qui cireumquaque posuerunt (se) eontra-me. 8. Surge Yehovah, serva-me Deus-mi, quia percussisti omnes inimicos-meos maxilla : dentes impiorum coiifregisti. 9. Ad- Yehovam {pertinet) illa-salus : super po- pulum-tuum (est) benedictio-tua. Selah.* PSAL. IV. Prsecentori in-instrumentis-pulsatilibus canticum Davidi. 2. In-invocando-me (invocation e-mea) exaudi-me, Deusjusti- tise-mese, in-angustia dilatationem-fecisti mihi : miserere-mei, et-audi orationem-meam. 3. Filii viri usque quo gloriam-meam {vertetis) in-ignominiam ? diligetis inane, studiose-quseretis mendacium? Selah. 4. Quin-scitote quod segregavit Yehovah pium sibi: Yehovah exaudiet, in-clamando-me ad-eum. 5. a Pronunciation of Psalm III. 1. Mizmor le Dhavidh bebhorcho mippene Abhshalom beno. 2. Yeho- vah mah-rabboo tsarai, rabbim kamim gnalai. 3. Rabbim omerim le- naphshi en (ainj yeshoohatha lo bhelohim. 4. Ve-atta Yehovah magheen bahadi, kebodi oomerim roshi. 5. Koli el- Yehovah ekra, vayjahaneni mehar kodsho, selah. 6. Ani shacabhti va-ishana, hekitsothi ki Yehovah yismecheni. 7. Lo eera meribhbhoth gnam (or ham) asher sabib shathoo gnalai. 8. Koomah Yehovah, hoshiheni, Elohai, ki-hikkeetha eth-eol- oyebai lechi, shinne reshahim shibbarta. 9. Laihovah hayeshoohah gnal- gnammeka, birkatheka, selah. 10 PSALMI. Contremiscite, et-ne peccetis : cogitate in-corde-vestro, supei cubili-vestro et-tacete, Selah. 6. Sacrificate sacrificia justitise ; et-confidite in Yehovah. 7. Multi dicentes; Quis videre- faciet-nos bonum ? Eleva super-nos lucem facierum-tuarum, Yehovah. 8. Dedisti Isetitiam in-corde-meo ; a-tempore {quo) frumentum-eorum et-mustum-eorum multiplicata-sunt. 9. In-pace pariter accubabo, et-dormiam, quia tu Yehovah solus, in-fidueia facies-habitare-me. PSAL. V. Praecentori super Hannechiloth* canticum Davidi. 2. Verba-mea percipe-auribus Yehovah : intellige meditationem- meam. 3. Attende voci clamoris-mei rex-mi, et-Deus-mi quoniam ad-te orabo. 4. Yehovah mane audies vocem-meam, mane disponam (preces) tibi, et-speculabor. 5. Quia non ea Deus volens impietatem tu: non cohabitabit-tibi malus. (v, malum.) 6. Non consistent vesani coram oeulis-tuis: odistiom- nes operantes iniquitatem. 7. Perdes loquentes mendacium, virum sanguinum et-doli abominabitur Yehovah. 8. Et-ego in-multitudine misericordiae-tuae introibo domum-tuam, incur- vabo-me in templo sanctitatis-tuse in-timore-tuo. 9. Yehovah duc-me in-justitia-tua, propter inimicos-meos ; dirige coram- facies-meas viam-tuam. 10. Quoniam non in-ore-ejus rectum, intimum-eorum pravitates, sepulchrum patens guttur-eorum, lingusUsuil blandiuntur. 1 1 . Desola-eos, Deus, decidant a- consiliis-suis : in-multitudine prevaricationum-eorum expelle- • Forsan, super 'watcyxoienih pneumaticis, qmaperforari solent. Hebr. ^. Bythner. PSALMI. 1 1 eos, quoniam rebellaverunt contra-te. 12. Et-lsetabuntur omnes confidentes in-te, in-seculum prseconia-canent, et-ope- rire-facies super-eos : et-exultabunt in-te amantes nomen- tuum. 13. Quia tu benedices justo Yehovah : sicut-scuto bene- volentia coronabis-eum. PSAL. VI. Prsecentori in-instrumentis-pulsatilibus super octavam can- ticum Davidi. 2. Yehovah ne in-ira-tua arguas-me : neque in- ardore-tuo corripias-me. 3. Miserere-mei Yehovah, quoniam debilis ego sum: sana-me, Yehovah, quoniam conturbata-sunt ossa-mea. 4. Et-anima-mea territa-est valde ; et-tu Yehovah, usque quo ? 5. Revertere Yehovah, eripe animam-meam, serva- me propter misericordiam-tuam. 6. Quoniam non est in-morte memoria-tui : in-sepulchro quis confitebitur tibi ? 7. Laboravi in-gemitu-meo, natare-faciam in-omni noctelectum-meum: in- lachryma-mea stratum-meum liquefaciam. 8 . Corrosus-est prse- indignatione oculus-meus : inveteravit propter-omnes angus- tiatores-meos. 9. Recedite a-me omnes operantes iniquitatem, quoniam audivit Yehovah vocem fletus-mei. 10. Audivit Yehovah supplicationem-meam : Yehovah orationem-meam accipiet. 11. Pudore-afficientur, et-terrebuntur valde omnes inimici-mei : Revertentur, pudore-afficientur subito. PSAL. VII. Cantio-erratica^ Davidi quam ceeinit Yehovse super verba Cush Benjamitae. 2. Yehovah Deus-mi, in-te speravi : sal- » 7. e. varia, quae omnibus rationibus musicee simul decantabatur. Bux- torf. 12 PSALMI. vura-me-fac ab-omnibus persequentibus-me, et-eripe-me. 3. Ne-forte rapiat ut-leo animam-meam ; lacerans, et-non libe- rans. 4. Yehovah Deus-mi, si feci istud, si est iniquitas in- volis-meis. 5. Si retribui pacifico-meo malum, etiam-erui angustiatorem-meum gratis. 6. Persequatur inimicus animam- meam, et-eomprehendat, et-conculeet in-terram vitam-meam, et-gloriam-meam in-pulvere faciat-habitare. Selah. 7. Surge Yehovah in-furore-tuo, eleva-te propter-indignationes hostium- meorum: et-suscita ad-me judicium (^'wooT) praecepisti. 8. Et- congregatiopopulorum circumdabit-te : et-propter-eamin-altum revertere. 9. Yehovah judicabit populos: judica-me, Yehovah, secundum-j ustitiam-meam, et-secundum-perfectionem-meam super-me. 10. Consumatur nunc malum impiorum, et-stabilies justum, et-(^Mt)-probans corda, et-renes (est) Deus Justus. 11. Clypeus-meus super Deum, servantem rectos corde. 12. Deus judex Justus, et-Deus indignans in-omni die. 13. Si non con- versus-fuerit, gladium-suum acuet : arcum-suum tetendit, et- paravit-illum. 14. Et-ei parare-fecit vasa mortis : sagittas-suas in-ardentes efficiet. 15. Ecce parturiet iniquitatem, et-concepit perversitatem, et-peperit mendacium. 16. Cisternam excidit, et- effodit-eam: et-cadet in-foveam {quam) faciet. 17. Convertetur perversitas-ejus in-caput-ejus : et-super verticem-ejus violen- tia-ejus descendet. 18. Laudabo Yehovam secundum-justitiam- ejus : et-psallam nomini Yehovse altissimi. PSAL. VIII. Priftcciitori pro torcularibus canticum Uavidi. 2. Yehoval Domine-noster, quam illustre nomcn-tuum in-univcrsiVtcrra ;j PSALMI. 13 qui posuisti laudem-tuam super coelos. 3. Ex-ore parvulorum, et-sugentium fundasti fortitudinem propter angustiatores-tuos ; ad-cessare-faciendum inimicum, et-ulciscentem-se. 4. Quum videbo coelos-tuos, opus digitorum-tuorum : lunam, et-stellas quas prseparasti. 5. Quid (est) homo, quod recorderis-ejus : et- filius hominis, quod visites-eum? 6. Et-deficere-facies-eum paululum a-Deo : et-gloria, et-decore coronabis-eum. 7. Do- i minari-facies-eum in-operibus manuum-tuarum : omnia posuisti sub pedibus-ejus. 8. Pecus, et-armenta, universa-ipsa : et- etiam bestias campi. 9. Volatile coelorum, et-pisces maris : (omne) transiens semitas marium. 10. Yehovah Domine-nos- ter, quam illustre {est) nomen-tuum in-universa terra ! PSAL. IX.» Prsecentori super mortem Labben canticum Davidi. 2. Ce- i lebrabo Yehovam in toto corde meo : narrabo omnia mirabilia- ' tua. 3. Lsetabor, et exultabo in te : canam nomen tuum, Altissime. 4. In revertendo inimicos meos retrorsum : im- pingent et peribunt a faciebus tuis. 5. Quoniam fecisti judi- cium meum, et causam meam ; sedisti in solio judieans justi- tiam. 6. Increpasti gentes; perdidisti impium : nomen eorum V delestiin seculum, et sempiternum. 7. Oinimice, consummatse sunt vastitates in seternum et urbes destruxisti : periit memoria earum ipsis. 8. Et Yehovah in seculum sedebit : paravit ad judicium solium suum. 9. Et ipse judicabit orbem in justitia : I jus dicet populis in rectitudinibus. 10. Et erit Yehovah [ exaltatio pauperi: exaltatio ad tempora in angustia. 11. Et- a In hoc et sequentibus Psalmis vincula consulto omittuntur. 14 PSALMI. sperabunt in te scientes nomen tuum : quia non dereliquisti quserentes te, Yehovah. 12. Cantate Yehovse habitanti ii Sione: annunciate in populis opera ejus. 13. Quoniam quserenj sanguines eorum recordatus est : non oblitus est clamorii afflictorum. 14. Miserere mei, Yehovah, vide afflietionem meam ab odientibus me, exaltans me de portis mortis. 15. U narrem omnes laudes tuas (vel, omnem laudem tuam) in porti filise Sion: exultabo in salute tua. 16. Demersse sunt gente in foveam (quam) fecerunt : in reti quod absconderunt, captu est pes eorum. 17. Notus est Yehovah, judicium fecit, in oper volarum suarum illaqueatus est impius : res m'editanda ! Selah 18. Revertentur impii ad sepulchrum ; omnes gentes oblita Dei. 19. Quoniam non in seternum oblivioni tradetur egenus expectatio pauperum (non) peribit in perpetuum. 20. Surg Yehovah ne roboretur homo : judicentur gentes coram faciebi tuis. 21. Pone Yehovah timorem super eis ; ut sciant gent( quod ipsi sint tantum homines. Selah. PSAL. X. Quare, Yehovah stabis in longinquo : abscondes te in tern poribus in angustia? 2. In superbia impius insequeturafflictum capiantur in cogitationibus quas excogitaverunt. 3. Quoniai gloriatur improbus super desideriis animse suae : et avar benedixit, exacerbavit Yehovam. 4. Impius secundum fastuu nasi sui nequaquam inquiret ; Deum non esse, sunt omne cogitationes ejus. 6. Dolore afficientur viae ejus in omni tern pore, in altitudine sunt judicia tua ex adversoejus: secundun omnes hostes suos, sufflabit in illos. 6. Dixit in corde suo, noi PSALMI. 15 movebor in generationem et generationem, quod non ero in malo. 7. Execratione os ejus plenum est, et dolis, et fraude ; sub lingua ejus perversitas, et iniquitas. 8. Sedebit in insidiis villarum, in latibulis occidet innocentem : oculi ejus contra pauperem delitescent. 9. Insidiabitur in latibulo, sicut leo in tugurio suo insidiabitur ad rapiendum afflictum : rapiet afflic- tum in trahendo eum in rete suum. 10. Conteret se, humili- abitur, et cadet in robustis ejus congregatio pauperum. 11. Dixit in corde suo : oblitus est Deus : occultavit vultus ejus, non vidit in aeternum. 12. Surge Yehovah, Deus, eleva manum tuam, ne obliviscaris afflictorum. 13. Propter quid irasci fecit impius Deum? dixit in corde suo, non requires. 14. Vidisti quippe tu perversitatem et iram respicies ; ad rependendum est in manu tua, super te relinquet se pauper . pupillo tu fuisti adjutor. 15. Contere brachium impii, et mali, quaeres impietatem ejus usquedum non invenies. 16. Yehovah rex in seculum et seternum : perierunt gentes de ;erra ejus. 17. Desiderium mansuetorum audies Yehovah : Jtabilies cor eorum, attendere-facies aurem tuam. 18. Ad udicandum pupillum, et tenuem, ne addat {per gat) ultra ad jonterendum homo de terra (terrenus,) PSAL. XI. 1. Prsecentori, Davidi. In Yehovah speravi, quomodo dicetis mimse meae, fuge ad montem, O avicula. 2. Quoniam, ecce, mpii intendent arcum, paraverunt sagittam suam super ner- '■um, ad jaculandum in caligine in rectos corde. 3. Quum undamenta destruentur, Justus quid faciet? 4. Yehovah est ta- 16 PSALMI. in templo sanctitatis suae ; Yehovah, in cselis est solium ejus : oculi ejus intuentur, palpebrse ejus probabunt filios hominis. 5. Yehovah justum probabit ; impium ac diligentem iniquita- tern odit anima ejus. 6. Pluet super impios laqueos, ignem et sulphur: et ventus procellarum erit portio calicis eoru 7. Quoniam Justus Yehovah justitias diligit : rectum intuetur vultus ejus. PSAL. XII. 1. Prsecentori super octavam canticum Davidi. 2. Serva me, Yehovah, quoniam defecit misericors ; quoniam desierunt fideles a filiis hominis. 3. Mendaeium locuti sunt, quisque cum proximo suo ; labio blanditiarum in corde et corde, (i, e* duplici corde) loquuntur. 4. Exscindit Yehovah omnia labia blanditiarum, linguam loquentem magna. 5. Qui dicunt, lingua nostra prsevalebimus ; labia nostra nobiscum ; quis est dominus nobis ? 6. Propter vastitatem pauperum, propter gemitum egenorum, nunc surgam, dixit Yehovah; ponam in salute alaqueis quos injecerat illi. 7. Verba Yehovse sunt verba pura, sicut argentum excoctum in catino super terrain (vel, terreno), defaecatum septies. 8. Tu, Yehovah, custodies 608, servabis eum a generatione hac in seculum. 9. Circum- quaque impii obambulant, quum exaltatur vilitas filiorum hominis. PRAXIS, PSALMUS I. «. The first Pscdm^ with interlineary Pronunciation^ Latin and Englis Version^ and grammatical Praxis. - T halak ambulavit t5b lo hath- walked not lo chattaim noil pjeccatorum not of sinners Itt yashabh sedit asher qui who • t haish illius viri ille vir of that man ntCM Ver. 1. j-i: - ashree O beatitudines (est) beatus vel oh the blessedness vjv : 00-bhe-dherek )' T : reshahiin v--:r bahatsath hath- sat not et in via improborum in-consilio and in the way of the ungodly in the counsel J • •• >- I ATT letsim oo-bhe-moshabh gnamad derisorum et-in-sede stetit of-scorners and in the seat hath-stood lo [No. 1.] ntr'W (ash-re) beatitudines, or adjectivelyim^i^s; rendered J" I: - by the LXXII. interpreters ^ccKcc^iogy and by the Jewish Turgum rT"^n!)la, the blessedness of him. A noun pi. mas. without a singular and also in Eegimen. It is read twenty- six times in the Psalms, and of these only once with an affix, Ps. cxxviii. 2, Tj^ntCM, beati- tudines tzcce, i. e. beatus tu (eris). It may also be explained adver- bially, bene, beate, feliciter, "oh, how happily shall he live!" It is 18 PRAXIS. [I. — 1. elegantly used with an ellipsis of the following noun in Ps. Ixv. 5. in^n •»*1tt7N, beatus ille quern elegeris. Its root is "HtTM, heate in- ....... - T cessit, recto pede ambulavit, and is therefore synonymous with 1W\ rectus fuiU he was upright, the letters W and "^ being interchanged. The accent to the left hand is Munach, a conjunctive, preceded by an ancient accent which the Jewish grammarians did not term Metheg but VC^ISX mugitus, or elevation of voice, as it occurs (else) only at the beginning of a word, from n2?2, mugio. Vid. Job, vi. 5. [2.] t&^'Wn (lia-ish) iUius viri. tt?"*N, vir, an honourable man, or man in general, as in 1 Chr. xvi. 2\,nonpermisit, ^>vhy viro, to hurt them ; whereas in the parallel passage, Ps. cv. 14, tKe word D*7M, Adam, is used. It likewise signifies everyone, quilibet, as inPs. xii. 3, loquuntur vanitatem, ttJ'^M, vir, that is, quilibet. In Ps. xlix. 3, it signifies an tUmtrious person, tt7>S"'»321 D2 DlS"'22l DS as well the sons of Adarriy as the sons of hk, i. e. low and high. In Gen. iii. 6, rTtt?''Sb, marito suo, with b the dative prefix. Its plural D'^IT'^S T • : • • occurs three times only, but its general plural D^t272N supposes a • T-: sing. 12?3N (analogous to ^TI from pn, 0*^3 from D33, &c.,) hence its fern, with dagesh ntt?S of which the pi. (niE'M occurs only Ez. T • xxiii. 44,) D"'tt?3. The accent is Rebhia, a disjunctive. • T [3.] ntrs (asher) qui. A pronoun relative, indeclinable, qui, qucBy quod: and sometimes a conjunction, quoniam, qudd, ut. Bux- torf assigns it to the root ")tt7N, incessit. Its synonymous particles - T are n and td. The relative n is always used in the nominative case ; not so nO^M and tt7. Some considering V$ as an abbreviation of "ItTN, reject the genitive case of pronouns, which they regard as compounds of tt? and their datives ; as, ^hw, i. e. IZ7 for ItC'S and "*b, qtiod (est) mihi, Sfc, Vid. Heb. Gr. p. 18. "itt?« is found in the Psalms with two prefixes, ntt?M1, et quod or et qui,, and ")tt^M3, secundum quod. Accent, Mapahh, a conjunctive, followed by Pesick. I — L] PRAXIS. 19 [4.] ^b (lo) non. An adverb of negation or forbidding when joined to verbs. b^bl2, with not (compare the English without), acts as a preposition before substantives ; sine, absque, as in Ps. xvii. I, TlTyi'Q TlStt? t^bsi, in non labiis, i. e. absque labiis doli. It occurs ^. only thirty-five times in Scripture with 1 intermediate, thus Wib, and is found in the Psalms with four prefixes, as b5 bti?, quod non ; with n interrogative, as fc^bn, an non 9 b^b*1, et non, and b^bs in non. The similarity of sound in b^b, non, and ib, illi, has probably led to the discrepancy of MSS. in Is. ix. 3, one person, perhaps, reading aloud as another wrote down. The accent is Merca, a con- junctive. [5.] Tfbn (ha-lakh) ambulavit, ivit, incessit. It is used metaphori- - T cally of life, morals, and actions. The following persons of the Praeter of Kal are found in the Psalms. ?fbn, ambulavit, •'n^bn, - T • : - T t ambulavi, Khr\, exiverunt: and in a pause (:) is changed into (t) as i ^Dbn, ambuldrunt, Ps. cxix. 3. The accent of 'Tjbn is Sarka, dis- IT T -T junctive, (vid. Accents, Nos. 13 and 31) not conjunctive, as it is postpositive. [6.] n!$3?S (ba-hatsath), in consilio. From ys?'', consuluit, comes the noun fem. n^3?, consilium, which implies as well the counsel T •• adopted as the measure when executed. The termination n is T changed into n in regimen, (••) into (:) and under the guttural into (-:) by which the word becomes n22?, consilium. In the Pss. it is found with two prsefixes, 1, et, and 3, in, which have (-) under them on account of the following (-:). Its plural is !T\'2V and n*1!^57b, consilia ; the former occurs only three times in Scripture. The ac- cent is Yerach, a conjunctive, preceded by Metheg, which enables the short vowel to form a simple syllable. [7.] D"^2?tS?") {reshahlm) improborum. From "^W'^ condemnare, in- ll 20 PRAXIS. [I. — 1 . justum comprobare. A forensic term, the opposite of which is pTlJ, justificare. The original meaning is inquietum esse, to be restless, as in Is. Ivil 20: "The wicked are like the troubled sea," &c., because an accusing conscience alloweth no rest to mind or body. The noun ^tth is rendered by the LXXII., a«/3i?, imp'obus, in- T T quietus, turbidus. With praefixes it is thus read, 3?CnX3, ab imp'obo, ^Wnn, iUe imm-obus, 272711, et improbus, VVrh, isti improbo, (H T T T T T: T TT emphatic being implied), 27ttnbl, et isti improbo. In the plural (f) being changed into (0 i* becomes D'^^tt?"), impii, and takes the same praefixes. In Regimen, the termination D*» becomes •♦ , (t) is changed into ( :) and the prior (:) into (•) which gives '»37tt7") impii, Ps. Ixxv. 9- The accent to the left being Merca, and the other Mahpahh, the compound accent is termed Merca-Mahpahh. Vid. Accents, No. 3. [8.] "TJ^n^^ (oo-bhe-dherek) et in vid. From tJT^, calcavit, comes '?T'T7 via, com. gen. also, mos, consuetudo, studium, which are metaphorically the ways of men. In a pause, the former (•••) being changed into (▼) it is Tp"7. With prefixes, If'T^D, a vid, or propter viam; "TpTS in vid, but TyT^T^ inhacvid, H emphatic being omitted. In the form Tpl^^, et in vid, ^ is changed into -I because of the fol- lowing lahial D. Accent, Munach, a conjunctive. [9.] D"*Ml3n (chattahn) peccatorum. From M^n, peccare, a scopo aherrare, a noun plural masculine without a singular, deduced from the conjugation Pihel, and therefore signifying intensity and habit. C^Mtan therefore means habitual transgressms, in any duties, but especially religious ones. It is found in the Psalms with one prajfix, (see verse 5.) The accent is Tiphhha anterius, a disjunctive and pra?iK>sitive. [10.] "roy (gnainad) stelit. Prirt. of Kal, which is thus declined ATT in the Ps. "T057 stetit, vel ah operc destitit^ and in a pause (-) is changed I. — 1.] PRAXIS. 21 into (t) tlius, I'QV {gnamdd). The fern, is nitt!S? stetit ilia, -11^57, ATT It : It : It stetenmt, and in a pause -11^27 (:) being changed into (t). In ytys b^b ITT cav, pestium, seu pestilentium hominum. D"^!2v 3li?iDn«*). The accent is Merca, a conjunctive followed by Rebhia-Geresh a disjunctive and composite. [13.] 'DXD^ (yashabh) sedit, for an indefinite time; mho kabitavit. ITT Prait. Kal. is ^W*^, but in a pause ^W'^ ; 2nd person, n^tt?'', sedisti; - T It T T : - T 1 st person, ''nDti?'*, sedi ; ^^ty*"*, sederunt, habitdrunt, and in Ps. Ixix. • : - T -> :iT 36, with 1 conversive of the Prseter, si:2K?'^1, et habitabunt ; also 1st ) : It: person plural ^Slltt?'^, sedimus. ntt?"* k4b. Accents, Munach a con- : - t itt j junctive, followed by Sylluk, the greatest disjunctive, with Soph- pasuk. Note on Van conversive In a continued sentence, one time is generally carried through the whole period. Therefore if a future precede, and a propter follow, that pra3ter must be rendered by a future time, and vice versa, as in Ps. i. 2, 3, nSH"' (yehge) meditabi- tur, riTfl, (ve-haja), et erit, properly /? nnina dw i "^s v. 2. ^ : V T : J- I *.• <• chephtso Yehova betliorath im kee oblectatio-ejus Yehovse in-lege certe quia is his delight of Yehova in the law for truly :nVb") DDi'» nin^ iminn-i T :iTT JT V : V J r I : va-laila yomam yehge oo-bethoratho et-noctu inter diu meditabitur et-in-lege-ejus and by night by day he will meditate and in his law [14.] DW I ''3 (kee-im) sedy ^udd si ; quia certe, Buxt. ''S, quid quoniam, Ps. i. 6 ; cum, quando, Ps. ii. 12; quamvis, Ps. xxv. 1 1 ; eUi, Ps. xlL 5. With a prajfix "^D\ et cUm, Ps. cxx. 7. *QS is con- ditional, si, Ps. vii. 4. These two words DS I "^3 are either dis- junctive, quod si, nam si; or adversative, sed. A short perpendicular line called pesick (pausula) is placed between them, and refers to music. The accents are Mahpahh, a conjunctive, here a small dis- junctive, and Tiphhha, a disjunctive. [15.1 rnina (be-thordth) in lege. From rTT*, jecit, projecit, in J- I TT Hiphil. nnin docuit, instituit: TTT\P\, doctrina, is an heemantic noun T T fern, signifies the learning in which any person is instructed as it were by the utterance (jactatione) of words. Hence, a law, whereby rectitude is inculcated. The final n being changed into D in re- T gimen, it becomes min lex, and with the preefix 3, in m'lns in lege. Accented with Merca, a conjunctive. [16.] nirr* (Yehova) Yehovce. An heemantic noun formed by C*) (as projHir names, such as Isaac, Jacob, &c., usually are in Hebrew) from H'^n, or rather n^n, /uit, as the letters 1 and ^ are readily T T TT interchanged. The accent is Rcbhia, a lesser disjunctive. This is the sacred name of God, derived from his essential character oi sdf- exitUncc, as implied in Exod. iiL 14, HTIM ItTK n^'HW ero qui ero. 1—2.] PRAXIS. 23 wherein the future, according to the genius of this language, implies perpetuity^ including the consideration of the past and present. The LXXII. render it lya ufit o m, ego sum ille qui est : where the par- ticiple av, in Latin ens, expresses existence, and thereby marks the distinction from idols, which non sunt, do not exist of themselves ; or Yehova may mean the " foundation of Being," because ever- lasting existence is a peculiar quality of Him alone, and by Him all things originate and exist. Many suppose that the Gentiles (tra- dionally) derived the name Jove from this sacred name, as the Greeks are found to have formed the name Zgyj from t^an life; implying that their supreme being was the fountain of life. But when the word '•s'tS precedes or follows TiMn^, the latter is pointed thus, T -; nin"' according to the punctuation of D^^ribw, Ehhim, in which form it is read in Ps. Ixix. 7; Ixxi. 5; cix. 21 ; cxl. 8; cxli. 8. On the name niH^ the learned Dr. Hales (Chron. vol. iii.) makes the following observation: "The true ancient pronunciation of this glorious and awful name was lost by the superstitious scruples of the Jews to utter it, perverting the meaning of Deut. xxviii. 58, and substituting for it Jehovah, formed by the vowels of JElohim. But the primitive pronunciation has been fortunately preserved in se- veral of the heathen classics, according to the pronunciation of those foreigners who had early intercourse with the Israelites, and after- wards with the Jews. Thus the Glarian Oracle (founded before the Trojan war), in answer to the inquiry, " Which of the Gods is he to be reckoned, who is called lAH?" uttered a remarkable response, preserved by Macrobius, of which this is a part : f^pal^io TOP Trdvrojv vitarov Qtbv tfi/mv' 'lAQ. *' Learn that the God supreme of all is 'lAQ." [17.] i^^pn (chephtso) oblectatio ejus. From ^Sn, voluit, is formed 24 PRAXIS. [I. — 2. the noun radical of five points V^H, voluntas, complacentia, t^r., sig- nifying any inclination or propensity; in the Psalms it is found with three praefixes, on account of which (••) penult becomes (:), (••) in the ult. syllable becomes (:), and from the former (:) comes (v). Hence ^SSn, oblectatio mea. i!J2n, oblectatio ejus, -which the LXXII. render TO Bixiifcu uvTov, voluntas ejus ; D!55n, oblectatio eorum. The accent is T : V Merca Mahpahh, a composite accent, a pause or disjunctive of the first class. [18.] imin^JI (oo-bhe-thorath-o) et in lege ejus, min, /e^(vide ^ T I : T Num. 15) with affixes changes n into D. Hence "^min, lexr mea ; ' T Tjmin, lex tua. In a pause (:) being changed into (•••) thus : It rfmin. With prajfixes; rfmiriD, de lege tua, and in a pause, V T : It • ▼ymin^ (as before), rj^'^i^^ ^i ^^^ ^^^^ Tjn*nin3, secundum legem IV T • : T : : T : tuam. With two praefixes iminn^l, et in lege ejus, TjminDJI, et de J T t : ; It • lege tud. In the plural it forms ilinin, from whence with praefix and affix V^li"1i^^ et lege ejus, Ps. civ. 45. Accents, Metheg in the T : third syllable, followed by Merca, a conjunctive. [19-] 'niu'^ (yehge) meditabitur. From T\^'n, which in its pri- V : V T T mary signification means auferre, removere. When referred to in- ternal feeling, it denotes that impulse of the mind which we, as it were, remote from within, when we give it utterance; and since it does not exclusively signify articulate speech, it is also applied to doves and lions, who are said gemere, and rugire. nSirr* is the Fut. Kal, which is thus declined. nHHM, meditahor, with dagesh lene (n being quiescent in (•.) ) vHu^, meditabitur, masculine for UIU^, V : V vv:iv and thus in the fern, nsnn, meditabitur, scil. lingua, Ps. xxxv. 28; in plural ^n\ meditabuntur. Tarcrum 7'»33"itt, clamant, like- wise muMitahimt, Ps. cxv. 7, (for !)n3n\) n being excluded. The accent is licbhio-Gercsh, a lesser disjunctive. Vid. Accents, No. 11. : 1-3.] PRAXIS. 25 [20.] □^i"' (yomam) inierdiu. ni\ dies, the day, as well natural as artificial ; and with D heman. UW, interdiu, as if DI^D, de die, T that is, always, whensoever disengaged from business. Accent, Merca, a conjunctive. [21.] nb'^bl (va-laila) et noctu. b'^b, nox, in which beasts howl, T :lTT borrows its signification from bb**, ululavit. A heteroclite noun, -T being masculine in the singidar, and feminine (as to the form) in the plural. With n , which is only ornamental, it becomes nb^'b, T T : - the (•) under "^ being changed into (:), the accent being preserved on the penultima. And in a pause nb"^b, (-) being changed into (t). T :iT In the plural, by a crasis or mixture of vowels, it is nib'^b, nodes, and with a praefix nib'^bs, in ipsis noctibus, (H emphatic being excluded,) Ps. xcii. 3. The accent is Sylluk, followed by Soph Pasuk. ^nbQ-bs? V T V?? n'^m V. 3. T T I palghe gnal shathool ke-hetz ve-liayah super rivos plantatum sicut lignum et erit beside the rivers planted as a tree and he shall be inra ^^'. inQ behitto yitteen piryo asher ma-yim in tempore suo dabit fructum suum quod aquarum in its season will give its fruit which of waters ^31 bi2l^-i^b /S ■ 1 nnbri J" T ' jahase-asher ve-c6l yibbdl lo ve-haleehoo quod faciet et-omne non marce?cet et folium ejus that he doeth and all shall not withei and its leaf : n^b^** yatzliach prospere-faciet shall prosper 26 PRAXIS. [1—3. [22.] iT^iT) (ve-haya) et erit. The 3rd person sing. masc. prset. T T : Kal. with 1 conversive of praet. into fut. and is thus declined: n''n,/M2V, wherein n is quiescent in (t), nTTtt?, qui fuit, Ps. cxxiv. T T T T V 1, with XO relative, H'TTI, et erit, with the royal accent Rebhia, nn^Tf, fuit ilia, n being changed into H ; TV'^Tl, fuisti, H being It :iT T • T changed into ** quiescent, "»n"^'^n, /ui, and Sl3'^^n, fuimus. But in the 3rd person plural H is cast away before \ and it becomes JlTT for ''\TV'T\, fuerunt, which added to participles denotes the prae- terimperfect and implies perseverance ; as -VH ni"Ttt3?, erant stantes, T : our feet were standing, i. e. stood, stabant. Ps. cxxii. 2, and thus in the N. T., Matt. vii. 29, «» 'hihda-Km ; and Mar. i. 4, lyCnro /^ccTrri^at. Accent, Rebhia, a disjunctive. [23.] yVS (keheetz) sicut arbor, \^r, properly lignum. It is said of wood both hewn and planted, except in its more tender state. With 3 the mark of similitude, in which is inserted dagesh lene after a quiescent marked with a royal accent. Targ. ^b"^S3, sicut arbor. In the plural D'»23?, ligna ; and in regimen D^ changed into ^ , and (••) into comp. sheva, it becomes "13?'' •»23?, ligna sylvce, -T ••-: logs of the wood, i.e. sterile trees, Ps. xcvL 12; also in Ps. civ. 16, we meet niiT^ '^!^27, ligna Domini, trees of the Lord, or as the Targum explains it, trees of natural production. Accent, Zarka, a disjunctive. [24.] \'>T\XO (sha-thool) plantata. The participle pahul of Kal. from bntt7, plantavit. Not found with prose writers, but only here and Ps. xeii 14, also in Hos. ix. and in Ez. xvii. and xix. 3?t^3, its -T general equivalent is used, by way of metaphor, also of fixing nails, a tent, a nation, and the heavens, and in Ps. xciv. 9, of the deeply- seated position of the ear. Accent, Yerach or Yareach ben-yomo, a conjunctivti. [25.] "73? {!gnv\) juxta, A preposition, which, as the sentence re- I.— 3.] PRAXIS. 27 quires, meBXiS super, suprajuxta, contra, apud,ad, versus, in, emdpropter. From rnV, ascendit It sometimes assumes '' in the form of a plural T T noun in regimen ; thus "^V, super, Ps. xxxii. 5. With prefixes, bs^l and '^\>V\ et super ; also b373, sicut super, Ps. cxix. 14. [26.] "^^jbs (palghe) rivos. From ^% divisit, comes the noun of •• : - - T six points, ^bss, divisio, rivus, fluvius, either because it is separated from the fountain, or because it divides the land; from this word comes the Greek TrzXacyoi;, and the Latin pelagus. In the plural the former (•••) being changed into (:) and the latter into (t), it becomes D'^Ubs, divisiones, also rivi. With an affix, V^bs, rivi ejus. In re- gimen (t) being changed into(:), and the previous (:) into (-), it becomes W3, which the Septuagint render ^nlo^ovg, decursus. Where note, that dagesh lene is here omitted in the letter 5 after sheva quiescent, since this is always absent from the letters hegadh- kepkath, when the preceding sheva quiescent has sprung from a long vowel. [27.] D"^D (ma-yim) aquarum. D'^tD, aqua, and aquc^, has no singular. The dual form denotes the higher waters in the heavens, and the lower in the earth, separated by the intervening atmosphere. In a pause it is written D*»D. In regimen "^D, as in Gen. vii. 7, and in •It Ex. vii. 19, "^121^121. With prefixes, D'^^H, istce aquce, viz., the clouds, .. .. .IT _ Ps. civ. 6. D"^Kl3, sicut istce aquce, denoting copiousness, Ps. xxii. 15. D*'^2l, in aquis, Ps. civ. 3. Eripe me, D^^^XS, ex aquis, i. e. from enemies. Accent, Merca Mapach, viz. ~. [28.] i*»1Q (pir-yo) fructum suum. From rnQ, fructificavit, by changing H into "^ comes "^^Q, fructus, a noun masculine without a plural, the fruit of the earth, a tree, or the womb. Hence Ps. cxxvii. 3. "jtasn ^IQ, fructus ventris. By metaphor, it means a reward, as in Ps. Iviii. 12. p'^l-^sb •'13"T[W, certe fructus, i. e. prce- m'lum (est) justo, Targum ^tO "lIlM, merces bona. With a prefix, 28 PRAXIS. [I. — 3. •'nea, defructu, i. e. pluvia, Ps. civ. 13. With affixes, the latter (.) being changed into (:), and the previous (:) into (•), it forms i"^"^^* fructm ejus, and ia^'IQ, fructus eorum, Ps. xxi. 11. Targ. Drf^^a, filii ipsorum. Accents of V"^3 "itTW, Mahpahh, a conjunctive, and Pashta, a lesser disjunctive. [29.] ]ri"' (yit-ten) dabit, shall give. The 3rd person singular, fut. Kal, from ^n3, dedit, posuit, tradidit, 3 being changed into dagesh. It is thus declined ]nW, daho, "\P\i^, dabis, 1P\> and )F\P\, dabit, JlDn\ dahunt. With Maccaph, (••) being shortened into (•••) it becomes ■]n;n, dahis, ];^>, dahit. With 1 copulative, \r\^\ et dabit, and with > conversive fut. '^nm, et dedisti, ^H^X et posuit, ^1P\^X et dederunt. But this verb ]n3, when ^^b, non, precedes and an infinitive follows, - T signifies concessit, permisit, Sfc, as )Pin b^b, non dabis, sanctum tuum, niS")b, ad videndum foveam, i. e. thou will not suffer, &c., Ps. xvi. 10, and in Ps. xiv. 7, iri** "'tt, quis dabit'? is equivalent to vellem utinam, (see Gram. ch. 7, §. 7 and 10). Accent, Munach superius. Vid. Accents, No. 21. [30.] iriys (behit-to) in tempore suo. From HIV, transivit, a noun • : T T rWS, is contracted into HV (so we find nb instead of mb), tempus. With prefixes, nV'2. and nvb, in tempore. With affixes and in the plural it takes dagesh to compensate the loss of the *T, and changes (..) into (•). Hence in the singular in3?2l. In Ps. Ixxxi. 16, DnV, tempits eorum, means their punishment. n37 is found in the Bible with both masc. and fern, plur., but the latter only in the Psalms. Thus niny, tempora, with b is, nii^3?b, in temporibus, i. e. in ca- lamities, Ps. ix. 10. With an affix >nin3?, tempora mea^ Ps. xxxi. T 16, mean my afflictions. This the LXXII. render xaJj^o/ ^ey, sortes meoe, but it should probably be K»i^ol fitv, my opportunities. The masc. plur. is WFW, and in regimen ^P\V, hence with the affix I.— 3.] PRAXIS. 29 V , di\ it forms Vn3?, his times, dagesh being assiimed as above to T T • compensate for the lost letter. Hence, also comes the adverbial particle nn V, nunc, Jam, &c. Accent, Kebhia. T - [N. B. Ancient grammarians and some versions supposed the word n^27b, Jes. 1. 4, to stand for i^^^vb n3?b, from a root riTlS?, oppor- T T T - T tune loqui, whence they preposterously deduced riS, tempus, but modern lexicographers (following J. G. Eichhorn) deny the exis- tence of such a root, by assigning to the above passage, in accordance with the Vulgate, the meaning of assistance, support.'] [31.] -inb^?"! (veha-le-hoo) et folium ejus. From nbl?, ascendit, comes J" T : T T rhv, folium, from its ascending quality, and means the highest part V T of the tree by which the fruit is protected. With the affix n , the radical H is removed, and hence the word is ^nbl''') for ^^nnbl^X Hence the particle hv, upon, above, against, as '^b^?, against me, vb2? - T T T over him, &c. Hence, also, the glorious name of God ^i^V, Ps. ix. 3. O thou most High! Also T\'^V, an upper room, and in the T • -: plural ni^^b^?, and in Ps. civ. 3. VHVb^?, gnaliyothav, his upper chambers, i. e. the clouds. Accent, Merca. [32.] biS'^'b^b (lo-yib-b5l) non marcescet. From bD3, marcuit, aruit, to dry up through heat or cold ; properly said of leaves, flowers, or fruits, which fall off when they have lost their moisture. biS*^, is the Fut. of Kal for bi^3"^, nun lost being compensated by dagesh. It is found in the Psalms in the 3rd person only, and in the plural •ibS'', emarcescent. Targum 'J^S^D'^, consumentur, and by the Septuagint l7recXcitai^n(ruv, inveterati sunt, which shows that they read it ^'y> without dagesh, and took it from nbsi, he waxed old. It r T T is found with 1 paragogic l^lbiS"^ ; in both examples i being iised for (:) on account of the pause. Accent, Athnac, a pause. [33.] bbl (ve-chol) et omne. From bbs, consummavit, totum ab- V : - T solvit, comes bs, otnne, totum^ho.., a noun masc. without a plur. ; 30 PRAXIS. [I. — 4. but if it be joined to a plural it means omneSy omnia, &c. With prefixes bblD, ab omni ; bbn, universum illud, universitas ; bb*), et omne; bbb, omni; \r:h\ et omnibus ; bba, in omni. And n emph. being excluded, bsSl, in hoc universo ; bsb, huic universo. Hence with the fern, affix H is formed nbs, all o/it, fern. So ibs, all of him, T T\ \ Dbs, a// of them, DDbs, a// of you, &c. Accent, Tiphca, a disjunctive. [34.] r^m^ (ya-hase) faciei. The fut. of Kal from r\W^, fecit. It is declined similarly to No. 19- nt2737M, /acmm, i. e. offeram bovem, (as Virgil also uses the verb facio), ni273?n, fades, 'HW'S^ faciei, n'wVP), faciei ilia. In the plural by elision of n, ^WV^, facient, and with 1 conversive ^ti:?5?'»1, et fecerunt. In all whicb it is to be observed, that the first radical letter (V) takes a compound sheva, viz., in the first person (••*:), and in the rest (-;), and points the preced- ing servile with the similar short point, (vid. Gram. ch. X. ii. 3., " A compound sheva, &c.") Accents, Metheg followed by Munach. [35.] n"*b!?^ (yats-liahh) prosperahitur, i. e. whatsoever that man shall do shall prosper. From nb!J, felix, prosper fuit, comes n'^b!^'*, the 3rd pers. sing. fut. Hiph, with patach furtive. The Targum reads, '-'• and every germ of ii "lllli^, bears seed, nb!^J2-*l and pi'oduces.^'' Accents, Sylluk before Soph Pasuk. asher cammots-im kee 2l, '--'at:*- t-t-: m die judicii magni. From DDtt7, judicavit. A noun masculine heemantic t^Qt£7D, judicium, taken either in an active or passive sense. Actively, it signifies morality, reverence for the law, statute, custom, innocency of life. Passively, when any one is in fact ab- solved, condemned, or suffers punishment. It is read in the Psalms with the prefixes, \ et, 2, in, b, ad, D, secundum. And H emphatic being excluded, tOQtI7^S, in judicio, t2Dtt?^b, ad judicium. With T : • - T : • - affixes, >t^Qtr», judicium meum, (and with b, ad,) also ?ft25ti7Z33, secundum statutum tuum. With affixes, casting away D** , it makes Tj''t:3Qt2?!D, judicia tua, and preceded by b, ad statuta tua ; also pre- ceded by -1 and ^5, Tf^t2Qtl^?2r)-1, et ajudiciis tuis. In regimen (t) being changed into (:), it makes ^tDSti7!2^ et judicia. Accent, Athnach. [44.] n^Wtani (ve-chatta-im) et peccatores. Vid. supra. No. 9- • T - : Accent, Eebhia Geresh, a composite accent, with Geresh pra3posi- tive. [45.] nirs, (ba-hadath) in cmtu. It is formed as n^^^S in No. 6. From "^V^, constituit, he appointed a certain time or place, comes - T the noun feminine without a plural, m^?, conventus, a meeting at a fixed time and place, ecclesia, &c. In regimen it changes n into n, r\lV, ccetus, preceded by 1, et, and D, in. The LXX., Iv (iov>iri in concilio. The Targum n2?*'D2l, in societate. With affixes, TyrilJ^, coetus tuus, Dni3?22, in coetu eorum. m^, a testimony, has a plural, T T-: - T" nil^, and is derived from 1'^^V, which is used only in Hiph T^^^H, he attested. Accent, Merca, after Metheg. [46.] : D'^p'^"^^ (tsad-di-kim) justorum. From pi!?, justijicavit. A noun masculine derived from Piliel. He is called p'^'^2, Justus, who is absolved from all charges. It is therefore, applied to speech in the sense Jidelis, verax. Hence the Sadducees derived their name, } D 34 PRAXIS. [I. — 6. they being self-rigliteous, or from the personal name pil-S ; see Schleusner, Lex. in N. T. With prefixes, p'^'^2'1, et Justus, p'^'^sb, kuic justo, n emphatic being omitted. In the plural D^p**"^!?, justi, veraces, is found preceded by H, isti, and \ et. Hence pT!^, righteousness, and preceded by "Tyb^S, a king, is formed the name p"l!J""<3bD, Melchizedek. Accent, Sylluk. "n-ni Dp'^'^s "H"''^ nin"' 37ii''"*'3 Ver. 6. •Av: • A- •- vjv T :<> -J- I- vede-rek tsaddikim derek Yehovah yodeang-kee et-via jus tor um viam Yehovah sciens quia and the way of-the-just the way Yehovah knoweth for :in^5n wswn tobeed reshahim peribit impiorum shall perish of the ungodly [47.] Syii** (yo-dheang) noscens, i. e. novit. Part. Ben. Kal, used as a present which does not exist in Hebrew. Formed (with patach furtive) from the verb '^^^, novit, cognovit. It is said of the mind - T (compare ti^w, scio, and u^at, video, to which it is related in form as well as sense), and implies a subsequent affection ; hence it signifies, ^©iY, fovit, approbavit, curam egit. Its synonyme is "I^BD, agnoscens, which differs in this, that no one can be "l^3D, who has not previously been 37li''. It is found also without the vau of i in Ps. xciv. 11, thus n'^. In the feminine it is in Ps. cxxxix. 14, TXS'V, for nnS patach being substituted for segol. In the plural masculine, D'*27li'', scientes, and in regimen ^^^li^, and without 1, ^3?1\ Also with T prefixed ^271''"), et scientes. With afhxes, >37l''b, cognoscenti- bus me, Tf^yi^b, cognoscentibus te. Accent, Munacli inferius, a con- junctive. [48.] T3>in (to-bhedh) 7?^r/6/V. Targuni TnJ)nn, auferetur. The II.— 1.] PRAXIS. 35 3rd person sing. fern. fut. of Kal, S quiescing in % from "T^N, periit, - T and is said of any thing lost to a person, while the thing itself may be either lost or uninjured. It is thus found in the Psalms, J^nb^n^ et peribitis^ ^1^^*^, peribunt^ and also preceded by 1, et. But before a pause it changes (:) into (••), making -ll^^, &c. PSALMUS II. 1. N. B As the learner may now be reasonably supposed to have acquired a tolerable knowledge of the language, and that the pro- nunciation of every new word will be found in the subjoined Praxis ; it is not considered necessary to exhibit the Latin and English versions of this and the following Psalms in parallel lines, as was done in the preceding. [49.] nzab (lam-ma) propter quid. H^ an indeclinable word, is an T TV T interrogative of the quality of a thing, quid? quomodo, qualiter, quam. It often admits Maccaph after it, and changes (t) into (-), the following letter being dageshed, as Tjb'nZS, quid (est) tibi f But before letters not admitting dagesh (as the gutturals and 1) it retains (t) as, tt7DW"nZ3, quid (est) homo ; ^ISnTTtt, quam multiplicati v: T - T sunt, &c. The same is done before nirT^ (which, from reverence, T : they used to pronounce '^D'TM, and accordingly we find all versions T -; treat it as an appellative, x,v^ioq, Dominus, Herr, Lord, &c. never Yehovah; compare Ps. Ixxxvi. where niiT' and "^D^S, are found T : T -: promiscuously eleven times, and treated alike by each of those trans- lations), Ps. Ixxxix. 47 ; nirf* nD"13?, usquequo Yehova ? But before T : T the gutturals TirW with (t), for euphony it changes (j) into (•••) and becomes "nO, as bTrcntt, quam cessans; also without Maccaph, 36 PRAXIS. [II.— 1. as ^l^'^V no, quam pr(Bvaluerunt, Ps. cxxxix. 7. There occur also : It some exceptions to these rules, for example, HO, Ps. iv. 3, and x. 13; M^inTfQ, Numb. xvi. 1. It is read in the Psalms with four pre- fixes, na^) and "n^!), et quid ; HSS, quoties, quoi ; H^S and n^2l, T - T - T - in quo, in quid, (which exclude H emphatic), HD? and nab, propter, T T TiT quid, quare, quamohrem, where b before a word of one syllable takes (t). Moreover it is to be observed that H^b without dagesh It t is acute, and with a euphonic dagesh, penacute, nxsb. But it is tIt acute before the gutturals 2?nW, as D'^nbw ns^b, quare Domine? v: It t and penacute before the other letters as ^W'r\ n^b, quare fremuerunt, J '.\T TiT &c. It is compounded of b, to, and n^, what ? [50.] But "^ID, quis? is an interrogative of a person; (vide Gram, ch. V. 1); as tt7^Sn '^12, quis iUe vir? It often implies also negation • T and impossibility, as ^D, quis eloquetur potentias Domini ? as if he said nemo ; or J^^^jibM nin'*^ ^D, quis sicut Yehova, Deus noster ? In the initial letters of which passage is contained the name of the Archangel Michael, bsS*'^:. It is read in the Psalms with two •• T !• prefixes, "^^ et quis, "»)aD, a quo. [51.] i\tl^y) (ra-gheshu) tumultuatce sunt. 3rd person plur. prat. J : IT Kal. from K?3"i, strepuit, properly said of a tumultuous assemblage. - T This verb is met only in this passage in the whole Scriptures and in the Chaldee conjugation Aphel, in Dan. vi. 7, ^IttJ^inn, concurrerunt ad regem. Hence the noun feminine ntt?!l"n, tumultus, Ps. Ixiv. 3, T : • and in regimen nXDT\, as )*)« ^'bs^'S nt!?2-lD, from the " tumult of - : • '.'IT •• -:j j- ; • •• the workers of iniquity." Hence also " to rage.'''* [52.] D''ia {go-y&nm) gentes. •'ia, gens, is a noun masculine, perhaps derived from nia, corpus, because a nation is a collective body of individuals. It is generally used in reference to the Gentiles, but sometimes also of the Jews. With prefixes, '♦ian, ilia gens ; 11. 2.] PRAXIS. . 37 >i2D, a gente, i. e., that there be not a nation, Ps. Ixxxiii. 5, (as D implies negation). In plural D'^i:! gentes, for D*'''i:i by syncope. With prefixes, D'^isn, illce gentes ; and omitting n emphatic, D'^iSS, inter has gentes. [53.] D'^JSSb-l (oo-leuminim) et nationes. From the obsolete DZ2M comes DS, matei\ whence DS, natio^ a people sprung from one mother; including so many as constitute a kingdom. Hence the Hebrew saying, ; H^Dv^ SvM DSb ]''S, non est natio nisi regnuvn^ (otherwise D*^7 may be derived from the Arabic root Z2M7, which implies connexion and union). In declension it assumes dagesh and shortens i into (•■•), and with H emphatic forms D'^^MH, illce nationes, and with b prosthetic, D'^^wb, nationes. With prefixes D^'lSSb-l, et 7iationes, (1 assuming i\ before (.•) ), D**Ssb2l, in nationibus, (13 taking (-) instead of sheva on account of the subsequent (:) ). For the verb •ISrf (yehgu), vide Num. 19. [54.] p'^l (rik) inane. A noun of masculine form without a plural, vacuum, vanum ; sometimes taken adverbially, inaniter, frustra, incassum, as in Ps. Ixxiii. 13; jT'H, "in vain have I cleansed my heart. Hence the word Raka, (the Sp*^"! of the Talmudists), which T •• Christ forbids to be used. Matt. v. 22, meaning " a worthless fel- low." And also the Greek p^'xo?, " a rag." Verse 2. \_6S']. ^h^'^iy^ (yith-yat'sboo) statuent se. The future Hithpahel of ni^"*, statuit, constituit, and in the Psalms is found in the 3rd - T person only, n5$'^n\ sistet seipsum, and ^^52^1'', semetipsos, consti- tuent. (Vid. Gram. ch. VII. sect. 3, 4.) [_6Q.'] >DbD (mal-che) reges. In regimen for D^^b^ ; plural masculine of Tfb^S, rex, imperator, qu. populi moderator, from "qb^, regnavit, Chaldaice consuluit, deliberavit. With prefixes, '^b^'^' 38 PRAXIS. [II.— 2. ipse rex^ rex ! Ijb^ni, et ipse rex ; TfbD'l, et rex^ (1 becoming ^ before a labial); Tfbxsb, regi^ or de rege^ and Tjbxab, ipsi regi ; n emphatic being omitted. With affixes it changes both segols into sheva, and the preceding sheva into patach, as "^sbD, rex mens, mi ; ^33 vQ, noster ; ^IDSbttb, regi nostra ; *)3b^, rex ejus ; DSblDSl, in rege ipsorum. In which 3 is marked with dagesh lene after (:). In plural it is formed like D^'^bQ, in Num. 26, both in its simple form and in regimen. Once with a grave affix, Ps. cv. 30 ; DH'^DbD, r^es eorum, in which dagesh lene is omitted after ( :), as above in Num. 26. From "IjbD, rex., comes the name Moloch ; but distinguish between this and TJsblD, Tncdach^ an angel or messenger, which comes from ?|bn, eVeV, or, according to others, from the Arabic and ^thiopic, - T 3Sb, implying message and service. [57.] V'^M (erets) terrCR. A radical noun common gender, tellus., terra, as well habitable as uninhabitable ; also signifies the lowest part of any thing, like the Chald. 3?nS, by the usual change of V into V. Hence Gr. «g«, inferius, humile, imum. Before a pause, or with n emphatic, even without a pause, it is written \^nM and VAT V~lMn, ipsa terra. In regimen it remains like all nouns of six points ; V T T yiS, as in Ps. cvii. 35 ; rf*!^ V~iM, et terram siccitatis. T • [58.] D''2Ti"n (ve-rozenim) et principes. Targum S'^DitabttJI, et dominatores, governors, counsellors. A noun plural masculine without a singular, related to the Arabic, 35)T"l, which, like the Hebrew "T33, implies weight, importance, honour. It is found in the Scriptures six times, and is always placed after TlbXi, rex, except in Is. xl. 23. 7?^ and pn, have both one and the same meaning, T only that the latter also occurs in the sense of emaciation, the root of which is rUI. T T [59.] '^"TOia (no-sedhu) comultarunt. From "TD^, fundamt. He ^ II.— 3.] PRAXIS. 39 laid foundation ; for counsels may be considered as the foundations of actions. 3rd pers. plur. prset. Niph., "> being changed into 1, hence IDia, and in the 3rd person plural Jl1Di3, fundarunt se pariter, they were banded together. Targum ^•lisnn*', convenerunt ; as the LXX. render it (rwvix^wxy, perhaps they read s^ini^ from in*', -: - T unioit. [60.] "in"' (ya-hhadh) simul. From "TrT*, univit ; comes "Tn**, -AT -T properly a noun meaning union, (see 1 Chr. xii. 17), but which can- not be translated into Latin except by an adverb, as una^ pariter, simul. Before a pause it is written in''. The form 1W would be -At — ITV but for the guttural. [61.] "by (gnal or hal) contra; denotes hostility 'm this passage, adversus^ contra. b271, et contra ; whence the Targum says, et cer- taut cum Messia ejus. [62.] irr^tt?^ (Meshi-hho) Messiam ejus. From ntTXS, oleo-unxit, comes rr^tTQ, unctus. By Antonomasia, our Saviour Messiah, Christ - • T the Lord, is so called in the N. T. (according to the genius of the Greek language, W being changed into ss, and the termination n into «5,) of Him the anointed kings and priests were types. In the final increment, (t) is shortened into (:) and with affixes, forms ^n^'t!:?^, unctus tuus ; in'^tt7tt, ejus ; ^XVW'dl^ uncto meo ; in^'tTXib, suo ; (in which b takes (*) on account of the subsequent (••). In the plural D'^rT^tTQ, uncti ; so called are all those sacred to God, or remarkable for dignity and piety ; whence (with prefix and affix,) tis. TT^tr^S, in Christos seu unctos meos. Ps. cv. 15. Verse 3. [63.] npn33 (nenat-teka) penitus disrumpemus. From p/ID, T : -I S - T disrupit, avulsit, abrupit. The future of Pihel (Avhich conjugation 40 . PRAXIS. [II— 3. denotes intensity/). It is read twice in the Psalms, in the 3rd person singular, piHD"', penitus disrumpet^ Ps. civ. 14. In the 1st person plural npnaa, with n paragogic which is in common to the 1 st person T : - : of the future in both numbers, (") being changed into (:) pro pn33. The termination n , usually called paragogic, implying exhortation T and encouragement. The prefixed 3, nos^ being derived from •l^nSM, anachnu, we. [64.] "HS (eth,) this particle generally denotes the accusative. With the prefix D, it has the same power as the simple D, as nWD nirr^, a Yehovah. With Maccaph it changes (••) into (v) and is T : written "ilS nWI, et. According to Gesenius nw originally denotes " this," «t;To?, the trace of which sense may be discovered in Ez. xliii. 7, and xlvii. 17, 18, 19, where HWI is substituted by nb^T, in the following verse 20. [65.] i!2'»ni~)DiD (mo-sero-themo) vincida eorum. Targum catenas earum. From "ID'*, erudiendo casti^avit, comes the heemantic noun, -T "IDiD, vinculum^ ^ being changed into \ or "iDitt, instead of "iDt^D, from HDM, he bound. In the plural it admits both terminations, U^ and ni ; whence in the masculine form with affix and prefix, "♦•IDiXsb nnn^, solvisti vincula mea, Ps. cxvi. 16, (with (••) instead IT" I : T : - • of ( :) contrary to analogy). In the feminine Dn"^nilDi?3!l (oomose- rothehem) et vincula ipsiyrum^ Ps. cvii. 14. It is found also with the poetic affix Id'' , especially in the metrical books. Also with "^ , my, T V , his, UTV , ehem, their. From the root ")D^, comes the noun "ID'ID, instruction, discipline. The singular occurs only as the name of a place, Deuter. x. 6, rnoio, to Moser. T" [(j(^.'] nyhv^y) (venash-leecha) et projiciamus. From "Tjba?, in TV.*:-: - T Hil)h ; ^>btt7n, jecit, projecit, ahjecit, as of children exposed by the mother. Tlie future Iliph, thus ^"^blTR prnjiviam ; T^V^PW et II — 4.] PRAXIS. 41 projecisii, (with *) conversive future), and (") in place of *» , ''DD'^btt^n, projicies me, and with 1 conversive, et projecisti me ; 1|'^btt73, proji- ciemus, and with n paragogic n3'»btt?3\ [67.] ^3^^ (mim-men-nu) a nobis. )}2, a preposition, a, ab, abs, JV • de, e, ex, pros, with a prefix 1^\ et ab. With "» paragogic ^IJl, (3 being dageshed), ab, prce. With affix •'SD, a me ; 51713^, ab unoquoque eorum. But with affixes it more usually casts away 2 and doubles H, as ''a^tt, a me; tj^^, a te, and before a pause "'J^tt. Also na^tt, ab ilia; !13^!D, a nobis, and ab illo ; for 'la , is an affix of the first person plural, and third singular for siHD . Vid. Gram. p. 21. ^2 , him, it ; and JlS , us. [68.] iD'^nh^ (gnabho-the-mo) densos fanes eorum. From nSJ^, in Pihel, contorsit, condensavit, complicavit, comes the noun common nin^, contortum, funis coniortus, scil. of three cords. In plural with a prefix D'^nh^S, infunibus, Ps. cxviii. 27. And with affix iD^^nhs;, by the LXX. rh ^wyor uvruv, jugum eorum. In addition to the plural masculine D^nhV, it is also found in the feminine ninhs? ; the root n^27 in Kal is not used. - T Verse 4. [69-] ^ttJi** (yo-shebh) sedens. The participle Ben. Kal, and J" without \ ^W'>, (vid. Gram. p. 5, note a), sedens, habitans, from itt7>, - T Num. xiii. With prefix "DXO^X et sedens ; ntt^TF, qui sedens es, with n relative. In the plural D^^tt?i'>, in regimen, •'idi^, and without 1 ''^tt?'^ and "^^tt?*^*), et habitantes. With affix H'^ntt?"', kabitantes ejus, i. e. its inhabitants. [70.] D'^Dtt?^ (bash-sha-ma-yim) in ipsis coelis. U^'QtD, cceli, is not • - T - •- T found in the singular, but is rendered indiiFerently codum and cmlos. Before a pause it is written D*'»tr?, (-) being changed into (t). With ■At t £ 42 PRAXIS. [II. — 4. prefixes D>Dl^n, isti cceli ; D'*tt2?'l, et cceli Once, Ps. xxxvi. 6, it • T T - • - T : is found D''Dt^n2l, in ipsis coelis, the H emphatic being excluded at • - T - : Other times. D^^tt? is a dual noun, compounded of Dtt7, ibi, and • - T T D''J3, a^MOP, as the clouds rest tliere. The dual form denotes the equal distance on both sides, or the two poles of the world, or rather the waters above and below the expanse. For D'^Dtt?, coeli, denotes • - T not only the abode of the blessed, but also the air. In regimen □"^D becomes '»1D, and reduplicated '»)D'*)D, and always so with affixes, as V»''tt, aquce ejus; DTT^^^tt, illorum ; J^3"^^"'D, nostrL Modern grammarians derive D**S5tt7 from a root, TM^W, Arabic and ^thiopic, • - T T T HDb, like the Hebrew D^n, to he high^ lofty, hence Heaven, and deny its composition with Ctt. [71.1 ^TVD"^ (yis-chak) ridebit. The 3rd person singular, future Kal, and found in this person only, (-) being changed into (t) be- cause of the pause ; whence in the plural ^pnb**, ridebunt. From pVitD, Itisitj risitj derisit, riaum fecit (said of any thing playful, even of - T war), also contempsit, for whatever is despised is ridiculed. [72.] •'b^S (Adho-nai) Dominus. The Targum renders it «-)»•»» T -: T : •• ^"^T, verbum Domini, denoting Messiah, who is The Word of t: - God, from "IDS, dixit. From pW, basis, comes "jilW, Dominus, as - T VV T it were the basis and prop of the family or house ; and as the Latin Domintis is derived from domus, so Grod is called Adonai by the Hebrews, as he presides over the universe, which is His house ; or it may be derived from ]sn, domineer, judge. When in regimen it forms ^i"TM, (t) being changed into (-;). In Ps. cxxxvi. 3, it is found in lx)t]i the absolute and constructed forms of its plural. Confess D''3*TWn ^3*THb, Domino dominorum. But '♦a^lM with (t), witliout A* -:iT •• -:i- T -: a pause, is said only of the Creator (compare our parentlietical note II. — 5.] praxis: 43 in [49] supra\ and is put for the singular absolute, Dominus and so differs from ^3*TM, Dominies meus, and >a*TM, Domini mei. With the prefixes n, b, and \ it casts off (-:) and forms '»3*7S^ et Domine T mi ; ''^^sb, Domino meo ; '»3^M3, in Domino meo. Accent, Kebhia- T - T - Geresh. [73.] yvh\ (yil-hagh) submnnabit. Future Kal, 3rd person singular from 2l3?b, subsannavit, derisiU Anglice, to sneer at, or - T curl the lip. The LXX. render it by the verb fAVKm^l^oj. This verb is used by the Hebrews with b, the sign of the dative, which therefore follows. It is found in the Psalms, in the 2nd person singular, also nj^bp, and in the 3rd person plural ^2>b"». [74.] ipb (la-mo) eis vel in eos. Compounded of b, to^ which It with an affix takes (t), and of itt, them, the poetic affix used for the prose Dn and D . Verse 5. [75.] TM (az) tunc, ex tempore. It is used of past and/uture time, and with •< paragogic, ''TM, tunc, only found in Ps. cxxv. Also with D prefixed tMD, qu. ex tunc, ab eo tempore, postquam, Quis stabit coram te, tJQS TMD, a tunc, (i. e. tempore,) irce tuoe. Targum, a tempore quo invalescit ira tua, Ps. Ixxvi. 8. When put absolutely it denotes past ages, as in Ps. xciii. 2. Pa/rata est sedes tua tM^, ex tunc, which the Targum renders NDb3? ]D, a seculo ; and the LXX. kTeh tots, ex T : T inde. Accent, Mahpahh. [76.] "121T' (yedhab-ber) hquetur. From I^T, hcuttis est, dixit. Future Pih. which is thus declined in the Psalms "1211N, loquxir, (and with H paragogic (••) being changed into (:), mSlS, eloquar. Before a pause it resumes (••), as mSllW*), et, Ps. xl. 6 ; ISIP, TA" --:r •• - : loqueris; *1S*T^, loquetur ; and with the accent retracted, ^S ^ST^, 44 PRAXIS. [II. — 5. loquetur os meum (and feminine 121^), !)"12nn, loquemini. With 7 paragogic, ^JllSin, where (••) is used for (:), on account of atlinac. •IIjIT, loquentur ; !l^2lT^ hquentur^ the (:) under *> being lost on account of the previous chirek, Ps. Ixxiii. 8. Also s\")2'T^1, et locuti sunt, Ps. Ixxviii. 19, where the shevated letter > rejects dagesh, which vau conversive should have given it, for !n2lT>*). [77.] iD'^bw (e-le-mo) a4 eos, bs, a preposition, ad, apud,juxta, is used sometimes for 737, super, propter (and therefore all verbs which are construed with 73?, are also construed with bw). It is -written with (v) to distinguish it from the name of God, bw ; 2iN2tt"bw% et super dolorerri, or de dolore, Ps. Ixix. 27. - It assumes K i - V : the affixes of plural nouns, and takes (•♦) with the light affixes, as "^bw, (and in a pause ''bw), ad me ; Tj^bw, ad te ; vbw, ad ipsum ; iX2*»bM, AT '• r •• T •• •• •* ad eos, poetically. But with the grave affixes (vid. Gram. Ch. V. note I) it changes (••) into (-:), as DD'^bw, ad vos ; Dn^^bN, ad eos. [78.] i53N2 (bheap-p6) in ird sua, Targum in fortitudine sua. From Vpt^, naribus flare (as the angry are wont to do), is formed by syncope, the noun masculine f)M, naris, nasus, sometimes put for the whole face or countenance, as being the most prominent part thereof. Also for fury and wrath, of wliich the distention of the nostrils is the indication. With prefixes ^Mtt, ah ird ; ^W1, et ira; r)S2, in ird; P)Mi^, et in ird. In the dual and with an affix it assumes dagesh to compensate the loss of 3, as D'^BW, nares ; tJSSM, ira tua ; iSM, ejus ; DQW, eorum. With prefixes ^BN21, in ird mea ; ^QM2, tud ; iDM3, ejus ; iSMb, pro ird sua, Ps. Ixxviii. 50. [79-] iainnD^l (oo-bha-charo-n6) et in furore svo. Root Tl'^n, arsit; hence ]i*in, ardor, cestus, ira, furor, and once adustum, is a noun masculine formed by the heemantic syllable ]i. In regimen and with affixes (▼) being changed into (-:), it forms )iin. With II. — C] PRAXIS. 45 prefix rfQM ^iintt, ah ardore tree tuce (which Bertram says is the infinitive Kal, with ) paragogic, ab cestuando), also ^i"ini, et cestus. With an affix, in loco; and once in the plural rf^ainn, cestus tuiy Ps. Ixxxviii. 17. [80.] ixsbnn'' (yebha-hale-mo) conturhabit eos. From bn2, in Pihel, festinare, accelerare, oftener taken in a bad sense, and hence, temere vel inconsulio agere. Also to hurry another so as to cause him to act hastily. The future Pihel, which is declined in the Psalms with afl^Lxes, thus 2nd person DbimD, conturbabis eos, and in the 3rd person as above. Here dagesh, the sign of the conj. Pihel, is absorbed, as a guttural does not admit it, and the final (••) in bns changes into (-:) on account of the affix, i at the end is a poetic addition, see [74]. Accent, Soph Pasuk preceded by Metheg. Verse 6. [81.] ''aM'J (va-ani) et ego. '>2S, ego, a pronoun of the first person; before a pause it is written with (t), ^3N, Ps. vi. 3. With a prefix, •It "^asi, et ego, where 1 has (-) before (-:), Gr. Ch. X. 2, 3. It is read also in another form ''Dbw, ego. Vid Gr. Ch. V. T [82.] >I^DD3 (na-sach-ti) inunxi. Targum inauguravi, LXX. • :j-t Kocria-ruB-n^, constitutus sum. The prsBt. Kal, found in the Psalms only in this place, from *tJD3, fudit, perfudit, libavit, inauguramt, regem constituit, which was done by anointing with oil. Hence "JJOa, a libation, or oblation of liquid things (as nn2tt, was of dry things), plural 0*^503, in regimen; ''3D3, which, with the affix DH gives DTT^SOD, their drink-offerings, Ps. xvi. 4. [83.] li''i (Tsiy-yon) Sion. From r\*^% siccitas, comes ^i>»2, the name of a mount, from the dryness of the place, on whose summit was a citadel, which, when taken by David, was called The City of 46 PRAXIS. [II.--7. David; also The Mount of the Lord, and of Holiness, at the north side of which lay the Temple. It is found with the prefixes D, ex, 2, in, and b, de, Ps. Ixxxvii. 5. [84.] "in (har) montem. Contracted from "l*in, mons. [85.] *^Wlp (kodh-shi) sanctitatis meoe. From tt?"Tp, ab mu com- !• :t -t 7nuni ad sacrum separavit, comes W^ip (kodesh) sanctitas, res sancta (the opposite of which is bin, profanum). With prefixes l&i|9», ex sancto; cHp21, in ipsa sanciiiate, (p emphatic being excluded). With affixes i in the penult, changes into (t), kametz chatuph, and (v) into (:), hence '^Wlp, sanctitas mea; r^Wlp, (and in a pause ?fir?lp), sanctitas tua ; itzJlp, ejus; '^ttJlpSl, in sanctitate mea ; it&lp2, V : T : T • : T : : t : sua ; ittflpb, ad sanctitatem ejiis. :t : Verse 7. [86.] nnSDS (asap-pera) enarrabo. From 1DD, numeravit, nar- ravit, enarravit, in Pihel, as if enumerating to others. (Its synon3mie is T3n, indicavit). The future Pihel, thus found in the Psalms, "IQDN, numerabo, Ps. xxii. 18 ; and with n paragogic, (••) being clianged into (:), mQDM, accurate enarrabo. With an affix naiQDN, enarrabo illam ; 1BD\ recensebit ; "1503, recensebimus ; ^nQOn, enarretis. And in Ps. Ixiv. 6, •*)n3D^, narrabunt, which the LXX. render 5rptf(re3-i}* insculpsit, statuit, decrevit, from the custom of engraving laws on stone or brass. It is found with the prefixes, 1, ety and b, in. With maccaph it shortens i into (t) kamets chatuph, and makes 'pU (;^««), decretum, (Vid. Gr. p. 6). [89.] "1»« (amar) dixit. Praet. Kal, which is thus declined in - T the Psalms "IDN, dixit ille^ locutus est, i.e., with another or with himself, cogitavit; IDMI, et dixit; m»«, dixisti, Ps. xvL 2. •'ninN, - T : ♦ : : - T • : - t dixi; in'Oi^, dixerunt J ^m^^\ et dixerunt. I :iT J :iT : [90.] '•aa (beni) Jilius mens. From n32l, cedijicavit, comes ]21, J*: TT filius ; as parents rear up their children. Its s jnonyme is "13. It is used as well of animate as of inanimate things, Ps. Ixxx. 16. M super ]3, flium quern rohordsti tibi, i. e. the branch, which springs from the tree as a child from the parent. In regimen it is always marked by (•••) with or without maccaph, as ''D'^^''"]2, Jilius Yemini (Benyemita), Ps.vii. 1, or D*»^M1 ^3, Jilius, i. e. catulus unicornium^ Ps. xxix. 6. With prefixes p% et Jilius; pSl, injilium; \::h,Jilio. With an aflS.x (••) changed into ( ;), it becomes ^^2., Jilius mens ; 132, Jilius ejus, vel suus. [91.] 'Hi^'A (at-ta) tu; es understood, as the personal pronoun implies the verb substantive. For 'HT^'i^, see Gr. p. 18. Before a pause as in Ps. xvi. 2, it is sometimes written niHW. With a prefix TAT nnWI, ettu; or n omitted, .^M^ Ps. vi. 4, in which form it is found T - : T - : five times in Scripture. In plural DDW, 'oos, [92.] Di*n (hay-yom) hoc die, Di>, dies, sometimes taken for the j- natural space of twenty-four hours, sometimes for the day-time only. Doubled Qi> Oi'', die die, means daily, Ps. Ixviii. 20. With 48 PRAXIS. [II.— 8. a prefix dI^^D, a die ; Di*n, hie diea^ hodie; Di"^3, sicut dies ; Di'^b, in die, or de die ; Di'^Sl, in die. And n emphatic being excluded, Di*2, in hoc die ; Di*3, sicut hie dies; once with an affix itti^, o^/es ejus^ Ps. xxxvii. 13. Targum m^m Mtti^, dies calamitatis ejus. Its plural is D'^XS'*, days ; but D**^'», with dagesh is the plural of D'', the sea. [93.] Tf**i^"Tb^ (yelidh-ti-cha) genui te. Praet. Kal, 1st person singular from "rb^, genuit, but more properly applied to females in the sense peperit, parturivit. Thus declined ^rb'', genuit, or "rb'^l, et genuit ; '^r\lh\ genui. With the affix tJ, the (t) of the first • :- T syllable is shortened into (;) and (-) of the second radical is changed into (•)foT euphony; hence ^J'^Mlb'*. Hence lh\ puer^, Ang. a lad; rilbitt, nativity ; and nilbin, feminine plural, generations. Verse 8. [94.] bWH? (she-al) pete. The imp. Kal, from bwtt?, rogavit, petiity qucesiviti postidavit. Plural i^bstt?, petite, for s^b^tt?, with (-.-) under a guttural, Ps. cxxii. 6. Hence biWtt?, the grave, as if always un- satisfied, vid. No. 299. Or if M be here considered a substitute for V, biWQ? can mean hoUow, cavity, hence pit, hell. [95.1 n^nwi (ve-ettena) et dabo. ]nM, is the 1st person singular future Kal, from ]n3 (No. 29), with n parag., (••) being changed into (:). Also in Ps. Ixix. 12, n^nsi, where 1 conversive before a guttural requires (▼). With affixes -inDinM, constituam eum. In 2nd person ••33nn, trades me ; J)n3nn, eum ; Jl23nn, dabis (efficies) nos ut oves, &c., Ps. xliv. 12. S)33rin, dabis yd pones eum, Ps. Ixxiv. 14. In the 3rd person and with ^ conversive QSn^X et tradidit eos, Ps. cvi. 41. [96.] ^rhn^ (nH'hhul&tYie-cliB.) possessio7iem tuam. From bn3, possedit, comes nbriD, noun feminine possessio, whatsoever is ceded gratuitously to another. Once written with n, Ps. xvi. 6, nbn3. II.— 9.] PRAXIS. 49 With a prefix nbnSv, in possessionem. In regimen H is changed T -:- : T into n , (vid. Gram. p. 16), nbllD. With affixes, n heing changed into n, it forms TjnbriD, (and in a pause Tjnbn^), possessio tua^ or with : IT -: - isv T -:- \ et, prefixed ; inbn2, ejus ; -IDribn^, nostra ; DlDnbniD, vestra ; Tynbn32l, in possessione tua ; inbn3^^, et in possessione ejus; QnbnSI, et possessio eorum, T T -:- ; [97.] Tyn-tnSI (va-ahhuz-zatheca) et hcereditatem tuam. From TnS, prehendit, apprehendit, tenuity comes the noun feminine - T without plural n-TPlM, apprehensio^ hcereditas^ res possessa, as a T •% -: country house or field. It has a dagesh euph. and is read only in this place in the Psalms, the final H being changed into n, because of the affix Ty, t//^. [98.] ^D5M (ai^hse) fines. From DDM, finivity cessavit^ comes the ■• : - - T noun masculine DSH Jinis, terminus^ the extremity of any thing. It is formed like :ibD, No. 26, and therefore in the plural makes D'^DSM, and in regimen "'DSM, in which form it is read five times in the Psalms, being always followed by V"^W, terminos ter'rce, i. e. the inhabitants thereof. With a prefix ^^^i^n '^DESb, in jines terrce, V T T •• : - : Ps. lix. 14. DSS is also used in the sense, nisi^ tantHm^ tantummodo^ &c. Verse 9- [99.] D5?'"in (tero-hem) confringes eos. Targ. conteres eos. LXX. TTot^uviTg uvTov?, reges eos ut pastor, having read D27"in from nVI, pavif, rexit; hence in Rev. ii. 27, Troif^ocvsT uvrovq, reget eos, &c. From the root Wl, /regit, contrimt, comes the future of Kal, 2nd person - T regularly 5)3?n/n, tirhoang, and casting away one 2?, 5?nn, and Avith the affix D , it forms D2;"in. This verb is rather Chaldee than Hebrew, being used for V"^""' of the same signification, !^ being - T changed into V. Accent, Tiphhha anterius. F 50 PRAXIS. [II.— 10. [100.] laiira (be-shebhet) virga, D only signifying the instru- ment. IDDU7, virga, sceptrum^ baculus, a noun of common gender, but more frequently masculine. A pastoral staff, denoting the chief tribual authority. From the Syriac tDHtt?, extendit, for the Hebrew - T verb is ID^S, porrexit. Sceptrum is evidently related to , finxity for- mavit. It is attributed both to God and man, and means quovh modo cdiquid effigiare. It is found without *1 in Ps. xciv. 9, thus n!i^, and with H relative in Ps. xxxiii. 15; "iSiTT, qui format. [104.] D!^S3n (tenap-petsem) penitus dissipahis eos. Targum, diarumpes eoSy and the LXX. confringes eos^ scil. a-wT^r^tn uvrctn. The future of Pihel with the aflSx D , t/iem, which causes (••) ultimate to be changed into (••). From ^D3, sparsit, dispersit^ disaipavit. It -T is said of any scattering which implies breaking. Hence in Ps. cxxxvii. 9, VS3X ^'w^/ shall dash. Verse 10. [10.5.] ^\^'S^ (vp-hntta) W w?/wr. From ni3?, comes HV, and from 11. — 11.] PRAXIS. 51 this the adverb HiT\V, nunc, Jam, expressing the present time, or T - that about to arrive immediatelt/. With prefix nn5?1, et nunc, and T - ; before a pause nn^l, and without Pf, DVX Also nn57^, ex hoc TAT : T - : T - •• nunc, 1. e. ex hoc tempore. [106.] sib'^Sbn (\\^^-\.Q^-\\\) intelUgite. The imperative of Hiphil, 2nd person plural, with dagesh lene after (:), facite ut intelligatis, studete ut sapientes sitis. From bStt?, prudenter se gessit ; but more - T commonly in Hiphil, inteUexit, intelligere fecit, as being the cause of prudence to one's self or others. Its primary meaning in Kal is secundari, prosperari. Hence b^tt?, successus, prudentia. [107.] 'TlDSin (hiv-va-seroo) erudimini vos. Imp. plur. of Niph., 2nd person plural, "> being changed into 1 dageshed. From "iD**, se - T erudivit, ccistigavit, scil. in word or deed. The Targum renders it, receive chastisement, referring to morals. The Praet. of Niph. is "HDi^, nosar ; future 1D«*1S, evvaser ; imper. ID-IH, inf. idem; Part. Ben. .. ^ ... .. ^ . T [108.] y*lN '^tOQlC' (sho-phete aretz) y^^t/^■c•«/^?e5, i.Q.judices terrce. vlT •• : J The nominative plural masculine in regimen for D'^tOStt? of the Ben. Kal, of the verb tDS127, judicavit, either simply declared what was - T legal or illegal, or relatively, absolved or condemned the accused. The Ben. Kal, tOShtt? or I02tt7, judicans, is also used as a noun, judex. It is read with a prefix, Ps. cix. 31, ^IDSb^D, a judicibus ; and with an afiix, Ps. cxli. 6, Un^'^'^W , judices eorum ; ^'2'^^W, Judex noster. Is. xxxiii. 22. Verse 11. [109.] ^IIIV (gnibhdoo) colite. The 2nd person plural imperative J : • of Kal, from l^V, servivif, implying servitude, whether free or con- - T strained, but when used in reference to God or the earth, it signifies coluit. In the Chald. I'D.V signifies facer e, because servitude im- 52 PRAXIS. [II.— 12. plies doing somewhat. The dagesh lene is omitted in J)*T3V after the (:) as this sheva comes from a long vowel ; viz. singular ihSJ. Hence 1^37, servus, and rni^5? or mh^, servitus, T -: T -: [110.] nST^S (beyir-a) m ifmore. From M1\ ^mw/^, comes the AT : • : -T noun feminine nSI"*, timor^ reverentia, pietas in Deum^ religio ; for T :• reverential fear is the chief thing in the worship of God. Hence Horace uses "-Metus Deorum." In regimen it becomes nS")*', (Gram, p. 16). With prefixes _3nW*>'*2l, in timore, and nS'T»b, ad timorem. With affixes it changes n into il and become? TynWT^S, cum re- V T ; • : verentid tui ; rjnwn^b, in timore tuo ; TynS")''D-1, et sicut timor tuuSy Ps. xc. 1 1 . [111.] !lb**in (ve-ghee-loo) et exultate. The Septuagint read Kxi tcyxXXiua-ds xvrS, scil." ei. Targum, et orate in timore. The 2nd person plural imperative of Hiph. of the form a^lp, (Gram. p. 84), and would therefore by analogy be •ib'^^n, but the characteristic n is • T removed by aphaeresis, which leaves ^"^X from 7^, exidtare, and implies an exhibition of delight by some outward gesture ; in which it differs from n^tT, Icetari. Modern grammarians adopt a root - T b^2l as well as b-*)2l, and declare ^'^y\ to be Kal, not Hiph. [112.] ni37'n2l (bir-ha-dha) in tremore. A noun feminine without It T : • plural from 137^ tremuit. It is found twice in the Psalms, scil. Ps. xlviii. 7. rns?"!, trenwr, and with a prefix m37*na, where !l has (.), T T : TT : • on account of the following sheva. Verse 12. [113.] JlpBI?3(nash-8hekoo)o«c2<^mm«. Toxgum, receive instruction^ and tlie LXX. ^^ec^cc, signifies ciim exarserit nasm ejus, i. e. burning with anger. The feminine *nS?in, ardebit, comburet ; and with "1 conversive 'H^^Sni, et exarsit (ignis), Ps. cvi. 1 8. [118.] t^l?D3 (kim-hat), quasi parum. LXX. Iv rdy^n, cito, in brevi. From tD2?^, diminutus fuit, comes the noun masculine t057D, - T - : r amentum, a chip, small piece, thence paucity in general, &c. With 54 PRAXIS. [II. — 12. verbs it takes the nature of an adverb, as in Ps. viii. 6, Fecisti eum deficere, t037D, parum ab angelis. With 3 implying similitude, lD3?tt3, secundum parum^ &c. In the plural it takes dagesh euphonic, as t3"^r357D, pauciy Ps. cix. 8. [119.] "'Dirrbs (col hhose) om7ies sperantes ; 73 (see No. 33). '•J T On account of Maccaph it changes i into (t), (see Gram. p. 6), and makes "bs, omnisy omnes^ omnia. With prefixes "723, in omni, in toto ; bsb, omnibus; "bstt, ab omni; "b!D3, secundum omne. T : T • T : " Observe, the Masora has noted two places in the Bible in which b3 is marked with an accent, and therefore in these places it is It to be pronounced cal, not col, once in Ps. xxxv. 10 < ''JnaiS^S? bs, - : - It (cal) omnia ossa mea. Also in Prov. xix. 7, 2n"**nM bs, omnes T •• -: It Jratres pauperis.^'' [120.] ^Din, from HDn, recepit se ad aliquem ; to seek protection •• ) T T under any thing, whereby one might be safe from injury from above. Hence, when transferred to the mind, it signifies fidit, con- fidit, speravit. The Ben. Kal, in the singular HDiil. In the plural n radical is excluded along with the previous vowel, whence D'^Din, sperantes, confidentes. And with H relative, D"^Dinn, qui confidunt; and excluding H emphatic '^'SL D'^Dinb, Us qui confidunt in te. In T • - regimen ''Din, confidentes. Moreover, in this passage there is an enallage of the construct for the absolute state, but this word is almost always construed with 3, which therefore follows. [121.] is (bho) in eo ; 3 is the preposition in, and i the singular affix (see Gram. p. 23), with a prefix to, et in eo. N. B Tlie change of lb into lb in the word ?y^mb\ [No. 93], lias been ably accounted for in the 11 th edition of Gesenius's Hebr. Gram. § 27, 3. III. — 1.] PRAXIS. 55 PSALMUS III. 3. Verse 1. [122.] "niDT^ (mizmor) psalmus. A heemantiv noun masculine without a plural, signifying a poetic song set to music, sometimes found with the addition of "T^tC*, canticum^ meaning a song, first composed for an instrument, and afterwards adapted to the voice ; but "ni^tZS T'tt? means the opposite. From IDT, putavit^ prcecidit ; : • • -T in Pihel "I^T, cecinit^ modulatus est^ viz., a concise and short song. Bishop Lowth and others explain the connexion between "1XST and 1Z3T, with the idea of cutting, namely, the caesuras, short parallel -T sentences of Hebrew songs and poetry. [123.] l*nb (le-Dhaveedh) of David, or inspired to David. LXX. A* t: to; Afiiwi^. From lil, amicus, dilectus, comes "lil, qu. amabilis. The prefix b, to, implying that the Psalms were inspired to him by the Holy Spirit, as he says in Ps. xlv. 2, " my tongue is the pen of a ready writer." [124.] ininS (bebhor-hho) infugere ejus, iorfugd. From ni3, : T : - T fugit, aufugit, comes the infinitive of Kal, ni"l2l. But on account of the afiix i, patach furt. vanishes, and i is changed into (t :), S being prefixed, the mark of the gerund, signifying cum fugeret ipse. Vn'D. and D13 are aften synonymes, but the latter chiefly expresses fleeing before the enemy or danger, with some exceptions, as Cant. ii. and iv. where it is used of the shadows ; whilst mil is more related (even in sound) to " break up," " break through," as XT^'2., a holt, bar; Tjb n"l2l, Gon. xxvii. 43, and Num. xxiv. 11, break up, get thyself off ; H'^'^S is the poetical epithet of the serpent, on ac- • T count of its bolting propensity. 56 PRAXIS. [III. — 2. [125.] ''aStt (mip-pene) afaciebus^ i. e. the features which denote passion. D'^33, facies^ a noun masculine plural from n2D, aspexit, • T T T respexity vert'it. In regimen D"^ being changed into *» , (Gr. p. 16), and (t) into (:), and with the prefix D, >3BD, a faciebus^ vel con- sjpectu. [126.] D'17C72W (Abh-sha-lom) Absalom. The rebellious son of T : - David and Maacah. Derived from SM, paler ^ et Divtt?, pax^ meaning T the Father of Peaca Verse 2. [127.] •*)21'^ (rab-bu) multiplicati sunt. For Jism, 3rd person J - : ■» plural pret. Kal, DT by syncope for ^^"1, auctus est, whether in - T quantity or quality. Before a pause -121") becomes ^"Sn. IT [128.] "'"1!^ (tsa-rai) hostes, sive angustiatores mei. LXX. d B-^t'/Sotrig fee, qui tribulant me. From l-l^, arctare, angustum reddere ; "l!^, arctus, angustus, is a participial noun, and as a substantive an- T gustia, a strait, as well of mind as of body ; active, kostis vel aw- gustiator, one who drives into a strait. In the plural D^!^, and with • T an affix, excluding D^, it gives '»"l!^, and before a pause ^")!i ; in - T TT feminijie HI!?; anguMia. It occurs in Ps. iv. 2, with the prefix 21, in the form 1S2, in angustia (n emphatic being excluded). [129-] D''21"l (rabbim) muki. From 2n"l (see No. 127), comes the noun masculine HI, multitudo, multus (whence Rabbi, master), Sm, et midtus. In a pause it is written with (t), sn. In the plural AT it assumes dagesh to supply the defect of the absent letter, and becomes D^2n. [130.] U^Jyp (k2L-m\m) surgentes. The nominative plural masculine of Dp, surgens, the Ben. Kal of the verb D^lp, surgere, ^ being cast off (vid. Gr. p. 85). In the plural it is always taken in a bad sense, for enemies. With affixes, dropping D>, it becomes >»,"?. III.— 3.] PKAXIS. 57 [131.1 '♦v^ (gna-lai) contra me; b57 receives the affixes of nouns ./T T plural, and with the light affixes takes (t), as •13"^v3?, super nos; but with the grave, (vid. Gr. p. 19, note), it takes (-.-), as QrT^bS?, sK27er illos, Yerse 3. [132.] U^'l'nsMo-m.QrQQm) dicentes. The plural masculine of 1^'W, V • : r the Ben. Kal from n^W, dixit, vid. No. 89. Accent, Yerach, pre- - T ceded by Metheg. [133.] "^DdSv (lenaphshee) animce mece. From t2?D3, the soid, person, or self, as Isaiah, li. 23, that said Tjl£?S3b, to thee, Job. xvi. 4, •»t^'5D nnr\ 0212753 W"^ -ib, would that you were in my place ; and so the word may be considered, Ps. vii. 3, and ii. 1, not to my soul but to me; a noun of the common gender, but generally used in the feminine. In the plural it changes the former (v) into (:), and the latter into (t), and gives nitD*D3, animce ; 0*^11^03 occurs only in T : • T : Ez. xiii. 20. Before a pause it is tt7D3, and before affixes it first V T changes both (•••) into (:), and then the former into (-), thus >tt?DD, anima mea. According to Parkhurst 27D3 properly signifies a creature that lives by breathing ; hence, the animal frame, including the affections and desires. Accent, Merka Mahpachatum. [134.] ]'^S (^pronounced ain) non or nulla. This form is used in the continuation of a sentence for pw, a negative particle equivalent to b4 V, non, but always implies the substantive verb, and is therefore used only with nouns, pronouns, and participles. [135.] ib nn^^tt?"^ (yeshuhatha-llo) non (est) salus ei. From the T T : root ^B?"*, salvavit, comes the noun feminine n57-1l2?'^, salus, and em- - T T : phatice, with the double feminine sign nn^^tZ?'', no salvation at all, T T : as if alluding to his great wickedness in the matter of Uriah. [136.] ib (llo) ei ; 7 is the sign of the dative, and i the pro- 58 PRAXIS. [III.— 4. nominal affix, as ibi, ei el. Here to supply the absence of Map- pach, ib has dagesh forte, which is called by the ancient Hebraists p'^rnD nnw, athe-merahhik, i. e. veniens e longinquo^ and is one • T •• •• T kind of the dagesh euphonic of the moderns. [137.] D'^nbsa (be-lo-heem) m />eo. InthQElokim. A noun plural formed from the singular nibw, Deus, by the exclusion of patach furtivum and the point mappik. This name Elohim is attributed in the Psalms, not only to the Godhead, but also to angels, as in Ps. viii. 6, and even to the great ones of the earth, as in Ps. Ixxxii. 1. With the prefixes db^\ it has (••), aleph being quiescent, as CiibMS, for DTrbsS, in Deo, or per Deum. Perha{)s from nbw, v:v T T jurare, or from the Arabic nbw, (aliha) coiere. " Thou shalt /ear the Lord thy God, and serve Him, and swear by His name," Deut. vi. 13. [138.] nbo (sela). This word occurs above seventy times in the T V Psalms, and thrice in Habakkuk, always at the end of a sentence, and never in construction. It is derived from bo or bbo, to elevatCy - T and was most probably a note of music, or direction to the singers in the Temple to raise their voices or instruments at this period. The LXX. render it by ^ix-<\/(iXfAx, which signifies a variation in singing or melody. Bishop Hare says, " Ad cantus rationem unice spectat." Gesenius combines nbo, nbtt?, sUeo, and thence deriving a sub- t T T T stantive nbo, which with n of direction becoming nbo, ad sile?i- T|V Hum ! he considers as a sign of the pause where the singing ceased and instrumental music began. Verse 4. [139.] p» (maghen) dypeus. This is translated by the LXX. ««»TiX»jVT«p /uoy, sitsceptor mens, my protector. An heemantic noun, derived from pa, texit. III. — 5.] PRAXIS. 59 [140.] '^IVjI (bahadhi) circa vel pro me. From mS?, transit-, comes 137, ad, usque; and in regimen '^IV. With the prefix IS, it is IV^, which, with affixes, changes patach into the composite chateph- patach, which therefore points the preceding with patach, (Gr. p. 58), and hence the form ^^IVZ. Moderns give the root IVTl com- •-: - - T pared to the Arabic IVZ, distitit. [141.] ''iinS (kebhodee) gloria mea. From the verb 1^3, gravis : - T fuit, comes the noun 11^3, gloria, which, in regimen and with T affixes, changes (t) into {:) (Gr. p. 6Q), as in this place. But with a prefix it preserves (t), as in linSH, iUius glorioe. Accent, Kebhia- [142.] b^'I^S-l (oo-mereem) et exaltans ; \ et, is here read -1, be- cause "it always assumes this form before its cognate labials, i, D, 5, and words whose first corsonant has (:)," as ^^"T-1, Ps. iv. 4 ; D^'H^-I, in which U^IH is the Partic. Ben. in Hiphil, from D^~l, altum esse, ^ being excluded and compensated by (••), being formed, as D'^pD, from D^p, surgere. (Vid. Gr. p. 85). [143.] "^tt7b^") {ro^loLQk;) ca,put-meum ; W)^n, a noun masculine, mjow?, initium cujuslibet rei. Plural D^tt?M"). In this word and/owr otfiers T the plural is marked by (t), viz., Di\ a day, D*'D*'; "T^37, a city, D*^*137; • T • 'T tt?l3M, a (jpoor) man, D^tt7JM ; and rV% a house, D"*n21 ; being pro- bably formed from obsolete nominatives. Verse 5. [144.] >bip (kolee) voce med. For "^bip2, in vel cum voce med. From bip, vox, sonus, a noun masculine with a plural feminine. It comprises all sounds, even thunder, Greek (^mvi A333?''1 {Y&j-jdih2iJiQrn) et exatidiet me, but with *) conversive of the future, et exaudivit me. From n33?, incipere loqui, exaudire, TT &c., which in the future Kal is nD37S, 1st person singular; n3m, 2nd person singular ; n237'', 3rd person singular, and with the affix :> of [14'7-] '^'^^ (mehar) de monte, scil. Morice, on which the Temple was about to be built. As in, mons, begins with a guttural, which therefore does not admit dagesh, D is pointed with (••); in other cases with (•), as H'^Sl^, a domo. In the plural "in makes 0*^111, monies, in which it compensates the want of dagesh by (t). ■ [AJf^ [148.] ic?lp (kodsho) sanctitatis suce. Vid. supra. No. 85, and for nbo, vid. No. 138. T V Verse 6. [149.] ^nnDQI? (shachabhti) Ego accubui. Pret. Kal, from :23tt?, • : - T - T accubuit. Regular, like lp5 or "TXib. "^-~ [150.] n3tt?^S"l (va-ishana) et dormivi. Removing 1 conversive of yn 'IT the future (which takes (t) before a guttural), and n paragogic, there remains ^ttJ'^N, the future of Kal, of the verb \(D^, dormivit, in T • - T which the first radical •» quiesces in (•). The accent is Merka Mapachatum, a disjunctive of the first class (equal to a colon), preceded by the euphonic Metheg. [151.] Tli!2'»pn (hcki-tso-thi) evigilavi. The 1st person singular pret. of Hiph. from y^pU, evigilavit, the Hiph. voice of V'^P^ which 111—7] PRAXIS. 61 in the preterite of this voice, and of Niphal generally, takes "1 before n and 3, (••), penult, being shortened into ( .-) or compound sheva (v:). (Vid. Gr. p. 84). [152.] '»3^^D'' (yis-meche-ni) sustentabit me. The 3rd person singular pret. of Kal, from "Ty^D, sustentavit, with the pronominal affix - T ''i , me ; future TjbDN, lybDn, TjbD'' ; but on account of the affix, i, the terminal point of the future, changes into (••). (Vid. Gr. p. 79). Verse 7. [153.] MH^S (eerd) timebo. The future of Kal, from WT», timuii, T • "T which is thus declined ; MT'M, (in which *» quiesces in (•), and M in (t) ), s-i*^n, «-)^\ plural M-i-^a, .'isn^n, .1N-1>% &c. T • T • T • : • : • [154.] ni:3!2*lD (me-ribh-bhoth) a myriadibus. A finite number for an indefinite ; n^^"!, myrias, a myriad, or 10,000, is a noun T T : feminine. In the plural ninil'n, and in regimen (t) being shortened T : into (:), and the former (:) being changed into (•), it becomes JliiS^I. Derived from n!2"l, multiplicavit. Accent, Merka. : • - T [155.] UV (gnam or ham) populi. A noun masculine derived from UtyS, like D^S and Dsb, implies connexion, assemblage; - T - T - T compare cj^a, o'^o?, the German sammeln, &c. &c., the Persian ham. With prefixes D37^, e j!?o/>w/o ; DVb.populo; UVZ, in populo ; GVX etpopulus; US71, populus ilk. T T . f [156.] ^'^'DD (sa-bhibh) circumquaque. This word is properly a • T noun, signifying circuitus, but taken also adverbially. Derived from i!lD, circumdedit. Accent, Rebhia-Geresh. - T [157.] ^ntt? (sha-thu) posuerunt aciem adversus me, as the fol- JT lowing b^? implies hostility. The 3rd person plural pret. of Kal, from n^itt?, ponere. The 3rd person singular is nt27, posuit^ the second T radical (1) being expunged in the preterite of quiescents of the ra^c-^ 62 PRAXIS. [III.— 8. second radical. (Vid. Gr. p. 84). This AHW is distinguished from IT siHtt? (from JIH^, bibit\ merely by the accent. It t t Verse 8. [158.1 n^-p (koo-ma) surge. Imperative of Kal with H para- , which in Hiph. changes > into i, and forms ^^tt^in, - t " • or contracted 3?tt?in, scdva, and with n paragogic n37'^tt?in ; accent T same as last. Affix "^3 , me. [160.] /T'Sn (hik-keetha) percussisti. From nD3, which in Hiph. TJ* • TT gives 'n'2r\i D being absorbed by dagesh, and in the 2nd person singular the third radical H is changed in "^ quiescent. Accent, Mimach inferius. [161.] "^D'^'M (oyebai) inimicos meos. A participial noun, formed from D'^iM, the Ben. participle of Kal, from n^^M, odit. Sometimes written without \ thus n"»'M ; and with the pronominal suffix ^^'''W, inimici met. [162.] >nb (le-hhi) maxilla. To strike on or with the cheek- bone was a mark of ignominy, as we read in the history of Samson. The word is >n\ but before the pause (") '•nb. Derived from nnb, • : 'AV T T not used as a verb. In the LXX. version, we find here fcurxiAx;, gratis^ sine causd (my enemies without cause), which word may originally have been fceidnu^, jai£> bones; they having read D3nb, from T • : D3n, gratis, (from ^n, gratia). T • [163.] ''as? (shinne) dentes. ]tt?, dens, a noun of the common gender, from ptt?, acuit. In the dual D"'3l£', on account of the double row of teeth, (••) being changed into (■), and in regimen D^ being changed into (••), it makes ''att?. Accent, Tiphea posterius. 111—9] PRAXIS. 63 [164.] !?n^W (shih-har-to) i^enitus confre^isti. From l^t^, /re^ity the regular pret. of Pihel, would be 121127, but before Maccaph, the Gut., and Resh, (-) is generally used instead of (••) ; hence the forms I^W, shibbar ; TSM, ibbad. This voice denotes intenseness of action. Verse 9- [165.] nirr^b (lai-ho-vah) YehovcBy vel, ad Yehovam ; scilicet, pertinet, vel adscribenda est il\2i,-Salus. The salvation belongs, or is to be ascribed, to the Lord only. LXX. Tow Kvpiov ^ and D, for sake of accelerating the pronunciation. Theme Vtt?'', salvavit. Vid. No. 135. - T [167.] ^!3yb2? (gnal gnam-mecha) super-populum-tuum. From the root D^2?, comes the noun masculine D3?, populus. With the royal - T accents it takes (t) as 037. In the plural D'^ZS^, populi. Vid. No. 155. [168.] Tjri!3"l21 (bir-cha-the-ca) benedictio-tua, noun feminine IV T : • nD"i2, benedictioy copia. In regimen, H being changed into n (vid. T T : Gr. p. 16), and (t) into (:), the preceding (:) becomes (•), and hence the word is n3"112, scil. Yehovce ; or with an affix TyriDlS. In plural ni!D~l2. From "TJia, genuflexi% the Pih. is 'Tjns, to invoke^ praise, bless the Deity , because it was usually done kneeling ; hence, generally, for any invocation whether for good or bad, or any blessing conferred. Our word broker probably comes from the same source, since the Spanish alboroque (see John Stephens' Span. Diet.), whence it seems to be derived, was the term for the conclusion of a bargain ratified by drink and a blessing. 64 PRAXIS. [IV— 1, 2. PSALMUS IV. 1. Verse 1. [169.] nSJilDb (la-menat-seahh) Prcecentori^ vel Archimusico Bythner. n23D is the participial noun formed from the pihel voice of the verb n^3, prcefuit^ vicit. It is remarkable that this - T word is very variously rendered by commentators. The LXX. render it by lU TO TgA«?, infinem. TheChaldee paraphrast, "for triumph., or the Triumpher.^'' Aquila, by t« N1% justitia, Veritas, which with the affix > changes both segols into ( : ), and the former again into (.), and makes ^ipT!^. The accent of "Tibw is Mahpach- zarkatum, a conjunctive. [For "l-^!2, vid. No. 128.] T - [174.] >h POmn (hir-hhabh-ta-lee) dilatationem-fecisti-miki). The pret. of Hipliil, from nm, ampliatus est, for the heart is enlarged - T in joy. Accent, Munach inferius. [175.] '^h (Ihe) miki. Dative of the pronoun ''aM, ego. For the dagesh, see No. 136. [176.] •»33n (hhoii-ne-nee) miserere-mei The imperative of Kal is ... y pan, and by syncope ^h. On account of the affix it takes dagesh, and changes cholem into kamets chateph, which gives ^33n. The • •• T imperative is formed like Zib, from ^D. (Yid. Gr. p. 90). - T [177.] 57^27^ (oo-shemang) et audi. The imperative of Kal from J- : V^W, aiidivit. Obs. ^ for 1 before a shevaed letter. The imperative is thus declined ^DtC', feminine "^SJtitiS?; plural IS^XSti:?. Hence Isaiah, liii. 1, " who hath given credit J)3n2?Dl27b, to our report^''^ which is •• T \ : • rendered in the N. T. by t») utcori v>f^m, to our hearing, i. e. the word of the Gospel. John, xii. 38, and Rom. x. 16. [178.] ^nbcn (tephil-la-thec) orationem vel supplicationem meam. n v>^n is an hecmantiv noun formed from 773, judicavit de causa T ' : - T vel lite. It implies intercession through a Mediator. In the plural ni^Dn, preces. 66 . PRAXIS. [lY.— 3. Verse 3. [179.] tt7'^W"^32l (beiie-eesh) //2V viji. Ye sons of the illustrious man, perhaps of Saul ; for such is the force of the word 127'*N, equivalent to vir in Latin, quasi a virtute. Observe also DIN is T T equivalent to homo^ and tt?3N, a low or mean person (vid. supra. No. 2). From ]% filius, comes the plural D'^DSl, and in regimen "^aa. Th. n33, cedificavit. TT [180.] n^"l^ (gnad-me) usquequo. 13? is a particle of time; and ntt, an interrogative pronoun ; it is used also in the forms HD and niD, see above nxsb. [For '♦li^D, see No. 141]. T T T • : [181.] n^b^b (lich-lim-ma) in ignominiam vertetis. n^bs is T • : -v. T • : a noun feminine formed from DbD3, the Niphal voice of obs not in use, puduit, erubuit. From this noun the Latin calumnia seems to be derived. The LXX. having translated this passage tMf tto'ts /ixpvKci^hoi ; ivxti, &c., seem to have read ''liDS, graves, and nsb ^b, probably from the error of a transcriber in the copy which they used. An ellipse of some such verb as J|3i^n ODn.n, which must be sup- plied in this sentence before the word ''li^D, is not seldom in Hebrew, and we shall have some more to take notice of in these Psalms. In his Lehrgebaude, p. 851, Gesenius supposes the word Mbn to be T understood, Ps. iii. 9 ; upon thy people come thy blessing. [182.] ]JanNn (te-eha-bhoon) diligetis, pn, inane (No. 54). The 2nd person plural masculine future of Kal, from sns, dilexit; in - T the 1st person singular of the future, the radical M is usually dropped, lest two alephs should come together (vid. Gr. p. 41). ] paragogic being added to verbs ending in 5), points the preceding second radical with a long vowel. The opposite to this verb is N3tt7, ••T odio habiiit. lY. — 4.] PRAXIS. 67 [183.] -Itt^p^n (tehhak-keshoo) studiose-qucG7'etis. The 2nd person plural future of Pihel, which implies intensity. From tt?p2, qucesivit, - T which is not used. Future of Pih. ttJpnW, inquiram. This is the reading of Stephens in this place ; other editions have not the dagesh. [184.] :iT3 (ca-zabh) mendacium. A noun masculine from ^T3, JTT -T of which the participle of Kal occurs, Ps. cxvi. 11. In Pih. (and Niph. Hiph.), this verb is used of deception, telling lies, not in Kal, and it is a wrong supposition, that in that passage David meant all men to be liars ; he merely says, " I said in my haste," (not DlWvS all men, but) " DIMrfbs, the whole of man" is " nt*3," a vanishing, T T T T transient being, without any better part in him. Still more un- warrantable and harsh does our English version make Jeremiah (xv. 18) say to God, wilt thou be altogether unto me like a liar, whilst the Prophet himself explains his own meaning, " waters that fail ;" :nTDS signifying a vanishing brook which mocks the longing T : - traveller in the desert. The words, which in Scripture correspond to liar, are C?n3, Is. xxx. 9; nT3 t2?^S, Prov. xix. 22; ntS nn'^, TV TT • TT •• Ps. V. 6; -iptt? nn'T^, Ps. Ixiii. 12-, Dnptt7 nn*":!, Ps. ci. 7; "Iptt? is a lie, which stands for him that utters it, only Prov. xvii. 4. Verse 4. [185.] ^ill^ (oo-dhehoo) Quin scitote. The imperative of Kal, from 371"', scivit, which, like most verbs beginning with >, drops "^ in -T the imperative and infinitive of Kal. When the third radical is a guttural, the infinitive ends in n , not n , as HVI, scire. In Hith- pahel it changes •» into X as 'Sl^nn, n'^^Hil, (vid. Gr. p. 42). [186.] nh^n (hiph-la) segreganit. The 3rd person singular pret. of Hiphil, in which n final quiesces in (t), from the unused 68 PRAXIS. [lY.— 5. nbs, divisit, separavit. Wlience the LXX. have rendered it by f6xvftu(rru(ri, mirahilemfeclt. [187.] iv"TDn (hhaseedh-lo) j»/wm sibi^ i.e. to his own glory. A A J* T noun masculine T'DPf, pius^ beneficus^ and in relation to God, one who hath received a benefit from Him. From TDn, misericordia^ &c. ; plural D^lDn, mercies. Hence also, m>Dn, noun feminine, • T -: T • -: the name of a bird, supposed to be the stork, from the account given by naturalists of its affectionate nature. Gr. trro^yii, from iaQ (pa-ne-cha)yn, mus- jT r : turn, seu vinum novum^ an heemantiv noun, formed from tt?n\ - T possediU either because it is part of the possessions of man, or as Buxtorf says, because it takes possession of man. [For ^'SD^ see T No. 127.] This verse is to be understood thus: " Thou hast given gladness into my heart, n3?D, more than the time (i. e. more than they had at the time when) their corn and wine were plentiful." To supply the ellipse in Hebrew, the verse would require four words instead of the one n^tt, namely, ntt7« n^S QnnDt&D rh'TCX, Verse 9. [210.] Dibc?2 (besha-lom) in-pace ; Dibtt7, pax, a noun masc. J T : T plural, D^):2ibe?. From obtt?, pacem colere ; also in Pihel ohw, perficere, compkre, rependere. OS [211.] ^'^TV^ (yahh-dav) pariter. From in^, simul, una^ and T : - - T sometimes with "^ interposed, V^TH'', in which form it is found but T : - thrice in the Scriptures. Accent, Zarka. 72 PRAXIS. [Y. — 1. [212.] nnSttJw (esh-kebha) accubabo. LXX. xcifAn^tia-cfcui. The future of Kal with H parogogic, from n5tt7, cvhuitjacuit. []t£7*»S'l, e^ dormiam, future of Kal from ^tt?"^, dwrnivity which see in No. 150. - T Accent, Metka mahpachatum, a greater disjunctive]. [213.] "n^b, (lebha-dadh) solum. From IIS, unicm fuit, comes ATT : " T the noun masculine ITS, solitudo, LXX. Kurx^ciyxs. T T [214.] ntaflb (la-bhe-tahh) in-fiducia ; TV^% Jiducia, a noun masculine without a plural from W^'D^ fidit. It is taken adverbially with the prefix b, which takes (t) before a penacute dissyllable. LXX. [215.] **3^^tt?in (to-shee-bhe-nee) facies-kabitare-ilie, 2nd person singular future of Hiph. from ^Itt?*^, No. 13, the first radical being - T changed into i. (Vid. Gr. p. 81). Accents, Metheg, and Sylluk before Soph-pasuk. PSALM US V. n. Verse 1. [216.] nib'^narrbw (el-hannechee-loth). "Forsan, super instru- mentis pneumaticis quxper/orari (bbn), solent." — Bythncr. Ac- cordingly, it would stand for nibnS; an opinion still supported l:>y the Moderns. From the same root, also b^bn, a pipe, is derived. But the LXX. and others render it vttI^ t?? tcXn^ovcfAova-m, " for her Avho hath obtained the inheritance,^^ i.e. the Church. It would thereby be derived from bna, possedit. It docs not occur again in - T the Scriptures. Y— 2, 3.] PRAXIS, 73 Verse 2. [217.] "^"IKSM (ama-rai) verba-mea. A noun masculine 1?2H dic- turn, verhum, from nZ2S, dixit. Plural D'^'IDS, formed by changing - T • T-: i into (-:), and (v) into (t). In regimen ''"n^S; with the affix ''"IDM; also a noun feminine niXSS, plural nin^N T : • T-: [218.] rT3"^TSn (ha-azee-nah) percipe-auribus. From the noun T J'-:i- \tA, auris^ is formed a verb in Hiphil ^TWH, of which this is the imperative, with n paragogic, and (-:) under the guttural. Plural •*l3^TSrT. Accents, Munahh after Metheg. [219.] 'n'y^'2. (bee-na) intellige. Imperative of Kal from ^•'IS or ^'^a, T J' intelligere. In Hiph. '^DD^nn, make, or cause me to understand. [220.] ^y^yn (haghee-ghee) meditationem-meam, A noun masculine S'^nn, meditatio, formed from the verb H^H, vid. No. 19, by doubling • T T T the second radical, and casting away the third. LXX. xpscvysis ^«t;, clamorem meam. I^yn probably implies fervour, from a root nHH, • T " T which in Arabic signifies to burn. Verse 3. [221.] nn*'tt?pn (hak-shee-bha) attende. Imperative of Hiph. with n paragogic, from the root ^tTp, aurem advertit. - T [222.] '^3?1t27 (shav-hee) clamoris-mei. Eegularly 37127, but on ac- count of the affix, (•••) being changed into (••), and (-) into (:), the former (:) is changed into (-), hence ''2712?, from V^XD, in Pihel 27-127, clamavit. [223.] bbsriM (eth-pal-lal) orabo. From bbo, oravit, in hith- IT - : V - T pahel, se judicavit, oravit se Judicando. It takes (t) on account of the pause. 74 PRAXIS. [Y. — 4, 5. Verse 4. f 224.] np21 (bo-ker) mane. From "ipS, qucesivit, as *' that may •••J - T then be sought for, which lay concealed because of the dark." Gesenius assigns to 1p21, its Arabic meaning, splitting, cleavin^^ hence in both languages ^pS, {ploughing) cattle ; (compare the Latin T T , armentum for aramentum) ; as also, the word under consideration, *1p2l, morning^ day-break, when day and light break forth. [For 3?)att?n, see No. 188, and for ^bip, No. 144]. [225. J "T|12?W (e-heroch) disponam, scil. preces. The future of Kal TV.IV of the verb "Tynj?. both active and neuter. Active, disponere, instruere. -T Neutraliter, oestimari, in which latter it seems to be derived from "Tjnj?, pretium. [226.] Tfb (lecha) tibi. Dative singular from JinW, tu. It seems : T - to be compounded of b, the sign of the dative case, and y\ , the affix. Before a pause "Tyb, the points being transposed. In the plural D^b, T V T vobis. Accent, Rebhia Geresh. [227.] nSSWI (va-atsappe) et-speculabor. The future of Pih. in which n quiesces in (•••), and 1 is pointed with (-) because of the following compound sheva. From JID^, speculatus est, oculos animum- que intendit. Accents, Metheg, and Sylluk before Soph-pasuk. Verse 5. [228.] bw (el) Deus. From b'^W, foriis, and by elision of \ b«, fortitiidoy potentia. In the plural D"*bM, fortes, i. e. angeli, et prin- cipes, [229.] y^n (cha-phets) miens. Ben. Kal of the same form, with the 3rd person singular pret. of Kal, V^H, vduit, from which it can only be distinguished by the sense. Y. — 6.] PRAXIS. 75 [230.] 37tt7"l (re-shang) impietatem. A noun masculine from rtt?"!, see No. 7. The accent of this with the previous word forms - T Merca-zarkatum j^. [231.] Tjn^"^ (ye-ghoorcha). 3rd person sing, future of Kal, from 1^2, incoluit (of the form of D^p, Gr. p. 85), with the affix "TJ , tecum. Tf-)^s is the same as ?|^r "n^'», or VjnW, so in Ps. cxx. 5, "TJIZ^D >PnX I have lived (with) Mesech. [232.] ^n (rang) malum. A noun masculine concrete (also 3?")), It malus^ and abstract, malum. From 37^*), malum esse. The LXX. took it in the concrete sense, Trowifevof^ivoi;. Verse 6. [233.] Dobbin •ins^'^n"^ (yith-yat's'bhoo ho-leleem) non consistent vesani. For ^2*», see No. 55 ; D'^bbin, plural masculine of the Ben. -T • : Kal, from bbn, insanivit, gloriatus est. Accent, Tiphha anterius, - T [234.] i:i3b (lene-ghedh) coram. From "t:i3, coram, b pleonastic vjv : being prefixed. [235.] Tf"^3"^37 {gnQ-ne-ch^a) oculis-tuis ; 1>2?, ocw/z^s, before a pause changes (-) into (t). In regimen, from the affix and dual number (-) and (.) are contracted into (••), thus X^V. In the dual it gives D*»D*'2?, oculi (before a pause U^T^). In regimen, D"' is changed into > , as ^y>"S^ oculi Yehovce, &c. ]*'37 is feminine, like aU members of the animal body which nature has made double ; one exception , in the Kethibh, Cant. iv. 7, "TnS2, the Keri has changed into nnSS, making it conform to the rule. Vid. No. 254. [236.] nWiJC (sa-ne-tha) odisti. The pret. of Kal, 2nd person T "T singular, from W3b, odio habidt, M quiesces in (••). Accent, Eebhia- Geresh. [237.] "^bs^Q (po-hale) operantes. Ben. Kal plural masculine in regimen, for D''bl?b, from b3?D, fecit From this verb the names 76 PRAXIS. [V. — 7. of the voices, Niphal, Pihel, Hiphil, &c. are borrowed ; formerly it served also for a general paradigm, but has by modern Grammarians been discharged from this office, on account of the dagesh forte re- quired by three conjugations, which is inadmissible in 3?, besides the uncertain pronunciation of this letter ; also D has the inconvenience of requiring a dagesh lene in certain positions. [238.] pS (aven) iniquitatem. LXX. ccv6^Uv. " Ex metrica liquet vocem hanc semper esse monosyllabam." — Bishop Hare. Scil. on, seu awen. With affixes "^^iM QDIn, &c., this word actually resembles the T word lis, riches, power, manly vigour, with which it must not be confounded. Verse 7. [239.] TaWi^ (teab-bedh) perdes. 2nd person singular future of Pihel, perdes ; for in that voice it has an active signification, "T21M, perdidit, per ire-fecit; but in Kal, neuter, "TnW, periit. [240.] '^n^'^T (do-bhere) loquentes, i. e. locutores. Nominative plural V •• : I masculine in regimen, of the Ben. Kal, from "ID*^, locutus est. Ac- cents, Yerahh, following Metheg. [For DTD (ca-zabh) mendacium, i TT Noun mas. from STD, see No. 184. Accent, Merca-Mahpachatum]. -T [241.] D^tt'^"l27''W (eesh da-meem) virum sanguinum, i. e. sangui- nolentum. From CIS, rubiiit, comes Ul, sanguis; plural a"^D"T, -T T • T sanguines. [242.] nbn^Jl (oo-mir-md) et doll, i. e. dolosum. A heemantiv T : • noun feminine, from TllT^.jecit, projecit In plural mr^H, fraudes. T T : • The LXX. translate it, kcci TriKpiea, et amaritudine; perhaps they read 71112, bitterness. T T OS [243.] n3?n'» (yc-tha-heb) abominabitur. Fut. of Piliel from nW, abominatus est, scil. visu vel alio sensu. Observe, this form nm"', does not admit the characteristic dagesh, as the middle radical is a gi.ttural, althou^^h tlic vowel before 3? does not, on that account, V. — 8.] PKAXIS. 77 always become long, thus Deut. vii. 26, ^aDl^Hn Siyni, we find n remaining both times. Accent, Mahpahh-zarkatum. Verse 8. [244.] D*"l)2 (berobh) in multitudirie ; "21, copia, multitudo ; a J : noun masculine, from D2"), copiosum esse, - T [245.] Tf"nDn (hhas-decha) misericordice-tuce. Formed from the noun masculine, IDn, misericordia, henignitas. With the affix t[ , both (v) being changed into (:), and the former again into (-), the compound becomes tJIDII. In the plural it makes D'^lDn, and in regimen ''IDn. Accent, Tiphhha anterius. [246.] «in« (a-bho) introibo. The future of Kal (1 being omit- J T ted sometimes, thus ^^HS), from Sil2, venire, ingredi. Accent, T Munahh inferius. [247.] T^n^S (be-the-cha). From n'^3, do7nus, which in regimen and with affixes contracts both vowels into (••), as T[ri"^22, domus tua ; D'^rivM n"^2l"1^, usque-ad domum Domini. From n^S, pernoctari ; J. ...; ^.. or we derive n-IS from iT^, and this from rT32l, oedificavit T T [248.] ninntt?S (esh-ta-hha-ve) incurvaho-me. Future of Hithp. from nnti?, incurvatus, humiliatus est. As the first radical is one of T T the sibilant letters, it is transposed with the preformant n, for euphony (vid. Gr. p. 27, Note b). This verb assumes in Hithp. 1 before the final n, and omits dagesh from the second radical as it is a guttural. Accent, Merka, following Metheg. [249.] b::*rTb« (el-he-chal) in templo ; b^^H, a noun masculine, signifying a temple, tabernacle, or royal palace. In regimen it changes (t) into (-). In the plural D^'b^^H, whence in regimen '^bp'^n, (t) being changed into (:). [For '^\lh\), vid. No. 85, and for ?[nsn**2. No. 110]. 78 PRAXIS. [V.— 9, 10. Verse 9. [250.] ^2n3 (nehhe-nee). Imperative of Kal, from TlU'iy duxit, • '• i T T with the affix "^D ; contracted for '^3nn3. Accent, Munach superius. [251.] ?jnp*T!5n (bhetsidh-kathe-cha) in-justitid-tud. From p"T!^, V T : • : - T justijlcavit, comes the noun feminine np*72, justitia. With the affix 1 T : it changes H into n, (t) penult, into (:), and the former (:) into (•). •In the plural nip!!?. [252.] ^5?^b (lema-han) propter, ^^tt, is an indeclinable word, always formed with the adjunct b. With a verb it signifies ut, as p^'^F\ ]2?S2b, ut justificeris. Probably derived from rT2^, respondit^ -:•--: T T as if " answering to a cause." [253.] "'"nitt? (sho-rerai) inimicos-meos. From m2?, intuitus estj ^r : ) - T observavit, comes the Ben. Kal TlitZ?, observator, which is always taken in a bad sense. It is used in the Psalms with the affix > , only, as here; and before a pause with (t), as "^inb*, Ps. xxvii. 11, [254.] "ltt?'}n (hav-shar) dirige. From "III?'*, rectus, planus fuit, V- : - - T comes 'T't^in, in Hiph. > being changed into 1. It takes (-) in the last syllable in place of (••), which, gutturals, or T when final, reject; and 1 instead of i. The mark (o) refers to the marginal reading, •ntTTf, which takes the same vowel points. This is called the ''"Ip, Keri^ read; and the text, the DTl3, Kethibh, written. Vid. Gr. p. 102. [For -^asb, see Nq. 204]. [255.] tJ3"T^ (dar-ke-cha) viam-tuam. From T[T7, via, which with the affix changes both segols into (:), and the former (:) into (-). Verse 10. [256.] in^Da (bephce-hoo) in-ore-ejus. Scil. 2, in, '^D, ore, -in, ejus. From nS, as, oris, the interior cavity of the mouth. In regimen, Y._10.] PRAXIS, 79 and with affixes it changes n into \ as D'^bbiS? "^Stt, ex-ore parvulo- rum, Ps. viii. 3. Accent, Pazer. [257.] HDi^i (necho-na) recta via; scil. ?fT^, i. e. rectum, rectitude, *' Veritas Jirmata.^^ The feminine singular and plural are used like the neuter singular and plural in Latin, or " thing," " things," in English, to express something general, not tangible ; HDI^D, an^ thing T ! proper; n'lb^n, Ps. xii. 4, magna, great things; Ps. xxvii. 4, HH^, one thing; nniM, the same thing. The masculine plural is seldom T applied in the same manner, it occurs, e. g. Prov. viii. 6, D'^l'^n^, honesta, nobilia. It is the participle in Niphal, ]i3D ; in the feminine T (t) being changed into (:), HiiDS; from '^'O, aptum vel stabilis esse, T : cholem quiescing in i. LXX. uXtihtx. [258.] D3*lp (kir-bam) intimum eorum. From ^"Hp, appropin- AT : • - T quavit, comes ^"Ip, pars interior, quse aliis appropinquat. With affixes, both (•••) are first shortened into (:), and then the former (••) into (.), which with the affix Q , their, them, gives D2~ip. [259.] ni^n (hav-voth) pravitates. The plural of the noun feminine n^PT, accidens seu eventus malus, from niH, fuit. This T- TT passage the LXX. render « x-u^^U ccvrav iaoltxix, cor eorum vanum est. Accents, Merka Mahpachatum, disjunctive major. [260.] "n^p (ke-bher) sepulchrum. A noun masculine from "iDp, sepelivit. Accent, Metheg, because of Maccaph which connects this word with the next in respect of accent. [261.] n^iriQ (pa-tho6-ahh) semper patens. The participle pahul - i T of Kal from ririD, aperuit. Accent, Merka. - T [262.] Uyil (gero-nam) guttur-eorum. An heemantiv noun mas- bn> (ya-hhalee-koon). Future of Hiph. plural, with ^ paragogic, from \hr\, lnhricum-reddidit LXX. l5oA<»i;c-«», dolose - T agehant. Accents, Metheg and Sylluk. Verse II. [265.J D^"^tt7Sn (ha-ashee-mem) desola-eos. The imperative of Hiph. from DtTS, vastavit. In Hiph. D*»tt7Sn, and in the imperative, - T • v:v and with the affix D , DD'^t2?Srf. Accent, kadma, a conjunctive, preceded by Metheg and followed by Pesik. [266.] D^nbw (Elo-heem) Deus. See No. 137. [267.] ^ vQ'» (yip-peloo) decidant The future of Kal, the first radical 3 being changed into dagesh; from 723, cecidit, accidit, ruit, - T decidit e loco vel statu superiore melioreque. Vid. No. 370, IT* bb"!. [268.] DrrTllS^^bD (mim-mo-hatso-the-hem) a consiliis-suis. From ^y, considuity by changing •» into i, comes the heemantiv noun feminine n!J3?itt, consilium^ but it is read only in the plural, T •• as ni-J2?iD. Accents, Metheg, Yerahh, and Merka Mapachatum. [269.] DH'^J^ttJQ (pish-he-hem) proevaricationum-ewum). A noun masculine ytt7Q, defectus, from Ttt^Q, transgressua est. In the singular, with affixes it changes (-.♦), and (-) into (:), and again the former (:) into (•), as in ''3727Q, defectio mca; D37tt?5, eonnn. In the plural (-) is changed into (t), and (•••) into (:), as in D''2?tt75, which with the light affixes retains (t), but with the grave shortens it into (:), as in '♦ytt^Q, defectiones mem. Accent, Tiphhha anterius. y. — 12.] PRAXIS. 81 [270.] iX2n'»''Tn (had-dee-hhe-mo) expeUe-eos. LXX. s|«cra» ecvrovg. The imperative of Hiph. 3 being changed into dagesh. From m3, -T impulit, expulit. Here occurs the poetical affix iD instead of D , eos, them. [271.] 'nD"^3 (kee ma-roo) quoniam rebellaverunt. 3rd person plural preterite of Kal, of the verb n~iD, rebellisfuit^ mutavit verba ; T T amarum reddidit, in which latter it approaches to Titt, amarus - T fait. LXX. TTx^iTriKxyoiv c-g, from TriK^etim^ amaritudinem affero^ to cause bitterness or dissatisfaction to a person. [272.] T|:2 (bhach) contra-te. Scil. ^ in, % te, from whence TfSl, It ; in te, and with n paragogic Pf^S ; but before a pause the points T : being transposed, it becomes "TJB. T Verse 12. [273.] !)n^b'^1 (veyis-mehhoo) et Icetabuntur. From n^b, Icetatus : : • : - t est, comes n^bs, Icetabor, the future of Kal, and with n paragogic nnJStrw. [For ''Din, see No. 120]. [274.] obi^b (leho-lam) in-sceculum; obil!?, cevum, is derived JT : T from Db^, abscondit, because the future ages are hidden from us. It - T is attributed indiscriminately to future as well as past tifae, from whence, perhaps, the Latin olim. When spoken of the Jubilee, it stands for fifty years. [275.] •iDan*' (yeran-ne-noo) prcecovda-canent. The 3rd person plural future of Pih. which is p"l, from p"l, exclamavit prce Icetitia. Future of Pih. p^S, and in the 3rd person plural, (:) being changed into (••) before a pause, it is •1D3n'' for ^D2~l\ [276.] Ty^^l (vetha-sech) et-operire-facies. LXX. ku\ Kxrua-Ki^vaia-uq J" T : ev ocvToiq, et habitabls in eis ; having borrowed the signification from TjiD, tabernaculum. From 'TJ^D, operuit, comes by syncopating the - T K 82 PRAXIS. [y.— 13. second radical, the Hiphil IJDn, operire fecit, and 2nd person iTDin, .. .. .. ^ &c. [iD^^b^, from ^3?, super, 1X3 , iUos^. [277.] •12ib3?^1 (veyah-letsoo) et-exultabunt. 3rd person plural future of Kal, from vb^?, Icetatm fuit, exultavit. The 1st person - T singular future of Kal, is n!5brN, for n!^brw from V^brW, in which (v:) loses {'-) on account of the following sheva. So (-:) in the 3rd person plural 51!jb37'*, loses its (:), and sometimes its (-) making S)!?b3?> and 5l!$by\ [278.] "'isn's (o-habhe) amantes. From iHM, or ISHN, amavit, J"-: I - T " T comes Dn*M, Ben. Kal, which in the plural, by changing (..) into (-:) becomes C^^nW, in regimen ^^n'S, diligentes nomen tuum. Accent, Merca after Metheg. [279.] T[lQtt7 (sheme-cha) nomen-tuum ; Dtt?, nomen, is a noun masculine, perhaps from the Syriac >Dti?, nominavit. With affixes it always changes (••) into (:), but previously into (•) if" another (:) follows, as >Dtt72, in-nomine-meo ; Tftttt?, nomen tuum, and with a pause Tj?3tt?. In the plural by a feminine form ni^tl?, and with affixes, by changing (••) into (••), CniKSK?, nomina-eomm. 1 : Verse 13. [280.] ?f"l2n (tebha-rech) benedices. 2nd person singular future V" T t of Pihel, for Tf "^Sn, the excluded dagesh being compensated by (t), from 1^12 ; in Pihel ^"12 or II^S, henedixit. Future IjnSM, for - T •••• - •• "T-: T["^::N. When used in reference to God, it is taken both actively and passively, thus, He blessing us with His gifts, and we blessing Him /or His gifts. See No. 168. [281.] n32i3 (cat-tsin-n&) sicut-scuto; 71 emph. being excluded by D, sicut ; n32, spina, a thorn, but more frequently scutum, probably, from the projection in the centre. From the unused VI.— 1.] PRAXIS. 83 p!^, frigescere, in allusion to the piercing nature of cold. Gesenius - T makes one meaning of p!J equivalent to p2l, whence n3!^, a shield^ - T -T T • scutum^ which covered the whole body. The n21^ was different from T • the pD, as appears from Ps. xxxv. 2. Apprehende n2!^1 pD, clypeum et scutum ; and also larger. 1 Kings, x. 16, 17, "Solomon made n3!?, 7 • targets, and D'^S^ltt, shields.^^ [282.] li!^l (ra-ts6n) benevolentid. A noun masculine heem. from n!^"l, benevolus fuit. In regimen and with aflSLxes "jiin. T T : [283.] -lanta^^n (tah-teren-no6) coronabis-eum. 2nd person sing, of the future of Kal (with the affix 513 ), for "ib^i^, from "ItD^, coro- navit. On account of the affix, i changes into (-•), and then, as " compound sheva does not admit simple sheva after it," (-:) loses its own vowel (-). The meaning of to crown belongs to this root, properly only in Pih. (see No. 401), here it is better translated by " surround," or affect round about for the sake of protection; 1 Sam. xxiii. 26, D'^ltO^?, Saul and his men surroimd David and his with a hostile intention. PSALMUS VI. \ Verse 1, [284.] n'^i)"^ X2t^ n"b3? (gnal-hash-shemineeth)sMjPeroctot?a?w. Super instrumento octo chordarum Bythner. n'^D'^XStt?, octava, is the feminine ordinal, of which the masculine is >3''DE7, octavus, from the numeral noun n^btt?, octo, vid. Gr. p. 75. The LXX. render it i»5rgp T?5 oy^ovi^, pro octavd. Gesenius contends that 1 Chr. xv. where three different voices are designated, verse 21, n'^S'^^tt?, octave. 84 PRAXIS. [VL— 2, 3. implies the ground- tone, i. e. bass ; verse 20, H^a^V, maidens'' voice, r-i the treble; verse 19, 3?'^^tt?nb, to sin^ aloud, dear, the tenor, and that iT^D'^tttt? is no where the name of an instrument. It must have been these verses of the Chronicles which suggested to former translators the idea of the base voice, and accordingly, we find them render here, " ad gravem symphoniam," and " ad pinguem, sive bassum, tonum ;" with regard to "ad pinguem" we may remind the learner thatlDtt? is expressive of fatness, although, at present, it is generally agreed that pinguis has nothing to do with our n'^3*^toti?. [For the words nib'^22S n^'^rh, see Nos. 169, 170, and for ^BSS, No. 78.] • : • -;■•- :i- ; : - : Verse 2. [285.] "^an^Din (tho-chee-hhe-nee) arguas-me. The 2nd person singular future of Hiph. n^'Din, with the affix >3 , from niS'^, arguit, > being changed in Hiph. into i. Hence future of Hiph. rT'lJiM; 2Qd person JT^Din ; (3rd person PI^Sl*'), and with the affix '^Dn'^Din. [286.] TjriDnSl (ba-hhama-thecha) in-ardore-tuo. Compounded of J :iT-:i- 2, in, TV^iH, ardor, cestus, noun feminine and the affix r] , tuus. With the prefix, n!2n2l, in furore ; in regimen T^T^, and with T •• : - -: the affix ^n^n. Plural nian. From UXV, incaluiU : T -: •• - T [287.] ''3"1DTI (theyas-sere-nee) corripias-me. The 2nd person singular future of Pihel, from 1D*», corripuit, casiigamt, saltem acriori reprehensione. In Pihel 1D^; future 1D''N; 1D'*n, ''HD^in, &c.; (vid. Gr. p. 81), with the affix "♦a , me. Verse 3. [288.] [For ^33n, see No. 176.] ^^W bVtt« (um-lal a-ncc) r/c/^!??* ego sum. A noun masculine formed from the conjugation Puhal, b Ijeing doubled instead of dagesh, for b^M ; wherefore it would be more yi._4, 5.] PRAXIS. 85 correctly written with (t). From bX3M, dehilis fait. Accent, the - T great distinctive, Merka mapachatum. Modern Grammarians call the conjugation of bvDM, Pulal, and assert, that by way of exception the pronoun singular absolute of the first person with what usually is the 3rd preterite of the verb, is used here for ^nbbX2M. [289-] "^^SSn (repha-e-nee) sana-me. The imperative of Kal of MSn, sanavit^ with the affix "^3 , me. Accent, the conjunctive Merka. T T f 290.] !lbn^3 (nibh-haloo) conturbata-sunt. The 3rd person plur. preterite of Niph. which is in the singular, bn^3 ; from bn^, turba- - : • - T tus est Accent, the conjunctive Munahh. [291.] ''^^^S? (gnatsa-mai) ossa mea. From D!^37, robustus fuit, |Tt-: -t comes the noun of common gender t]!^2?, rohur, os, vel aliquid solidum. V V "With the affix it changes both (•••) into ( :), and then, the former into (-), thus ^D!i3?, OS meum. In the plural the latter (•••) being changed into (t) and the former into (-:), it admits both terminations, D"^23!^y, • T -: and ni^!^17, ossa. Hence "^D!S37, ossa niea^ and before a pause *»^!?y. T-: - T-: It T-: Verse 4. [292.] nbnn3 ">B:?S3V For tt7D3, anima, see No. 133. Accent, Tiphhha anterius. And for nbna3, see No. 290. Accent, Munahh jT -: : • inferius, here called Hillui, being followed by Athnahh. [293.] 1«D (meodh) mlde. An adverb, derived from the noun masculine, *TWD, vehementia. [294.] Tia""l37 (gnad-ma-thai) usqiie-quo; *>n^, quando, and be- IT T - " T fore a pause ^T^. The ellipse " differes auxilium?" or a similar ex- IT T pression, is easily supplied after usque-quo. Verse 5. [295]. IX^Xb (shoo-bha) revertere. From n^ltt?, reverti; and with JT an accusative resiituere. The imperative of Kal, in which \ the 86 PRAXIS. [VI. — 6. second radical, quiesces in •% thus ^^W, and with H paragogic, nn'^W; feminine, "^n-ltZ?; plural, -in^tt?. T • [296.] n^^bn (hhal-letsa) erij)e animam meam. The imperative jT : - of Pihel, which is read in the Psalms in the 2nd person plural only, and with n paragogic. From vbn, extraxit. [For >3i*>2?in, see No. 159. For ^r^b. No. 252, and for TJ-^TDn, No. 245.] Veese 6. [297.] mas (bam-ma-veth) in ipsa morte, quoniam H emphatic, excluditur. A noun masculine HID, mors. In regimen and with VT affixes (t) and (•..) are contracted into i, thus niD, as Dnixsb, ad ^ T : mortem eorum. [298.] TfnDT (zich-re-cha) memoria-tui. From 13T, recordatus est, (S V : • - T comes the noun masculine IDT, memoria, tam privata quam publico, tlius nDTb, m memoriam. With affixes it changes (••) penult, into (:), and (v) ult. in (:), and again the former (:) into (•), whence [299.] biStt?2 (bish-61) in-sepulchro. biStt?, a noun of the com- mon gender, but oftener feminine, derived from bstt?, petiit, rogavit, - T as if never satisfied ; or according to modern etymology biWC?, quasi bij?C7, cavity^ Jiollow, hollowness, thence heU. The prefix 3 takes (•) on account of the following (:). In Ps. ix. 18, we read nbiStt^b, T : • with n local, signifying in, ad, versus. LXX. h t5 a^jj, in Hades. [300.] TybTni** (yo-dhel-ldch) confitebitur-tibi. From 11^\ jecit. It VI T T projecit, comes the Hiphil min, vocem projecit, confessus est. The future of Hiph. miM, is of double irregularity, for ^ is changed into \ and n quiesces in (•.•). The dagesh in b, occurring after maccaph is called da^heek, and possesses a double connecting power. Accents, Metheg, and Sylluk ante Soph-Pasuk. YI_7, 8.] PRAXIS. 87 Verse 7. [301.1 ^PiVy^ (ya-ghah-tee) labor avi. The 1st person singular • :<;-T preterite of Kal, from "Sy^^ laboravit, defatigatus fuit. Accent, -T Mahpach. [302.] •'hnDS^l (bean-hha-thee) in-gemitu-meo. From n3M, gemuit^ used only in Niphal and related to the verbs HiW, p3S, pW, comes TT - T - T ther feminine noun nn3M, gemitus, suspirium. With affixes it changes T T-: n into n, (t) penult, into (:), and therefore (-:) is changed into (-), thus ^nn3W. Accent, Eebheea, preceded by Gahya. [303.] nnCCM (as-hhe) natare-faciam. The future of Hiph. in which n quiesces in (v), from nPItt?, natavit; this root occurs a second time. Is. XXV. 11, and lastly Ez. xlvii. 5. [304.] Tl^tt (mit-ta-thee) lectum-meum. A noun feminine heem. ntStt, lectus^ for ntODtt, and on account of the affix, H being changed T • T : • into n. From nt^2, exiendit, inclinavit. Comp. KXiva and jcxivvt, T T [305.] "^h^ttl^ (bedhim-ha-thee) in-lachryma-mea. From 2?S3"^, lachrymatus est, comes the noun feminine n2?^'=T, lackryma, H being changed into n, with the affix. In plural nij?^"^. Accent, Eebhia Geresh. [306.] "^WnV (gnar-see) stratum-meum. From b")5?, stratus sen lectus ex ligno factus. With the affix, it changes both (•.•) into (:), and the former (:) into (-), and makes ''bn^. The proper meaning of b~l27 is a bedstead with a tester to it, or bridal bed ; the idea of wood is none of its essentials ; that of Og was of iron, see Deuter. iii. [307.] nD^« (am-se) liquefaciam. Future of Hiphil, in which H quiesces in (v), from nOiO, liquefacii. T T Verse 8. [308.] ^'D^'r D3>3?2 r\WW^ (gna-she-sha mic-ca-has gne-nee) cor- 88 PRAXIS. [VL— 9, 10. rosus-est prce-indignatione ocidus metes; n^WV, 3rd sing, feminine preterite of Kal, from WWV, tinecbs genuit, it produced moths. Accent, - T Munach, following Metheg. [D273D, from D, prce^ and 0^3, which signifies, actively^ provoca- -j- • tion ; passively, indignation or anger. From D^3, indignatus fuit.'] - T \^y^'3i from X^'S, oculus, with the affix ^'^V, and > , meus. Vid. No. 235.] [309-] ''"mil^'biS Tlpnv (gna-theca bechol-tso-rerai) inveteravit 1 T : I T : T : T propter omnes angustiatores-meos. 11yir\'^, 3rd person singular T : T preterite of Kal feminine, to agree with '\^V, from pill?, transferri ideoque estate provehi. ^ '^mil^ for '^"n*ii!i, without a pause: from D''"i"lil^, the plural It : I - : • : masculine of "ni!^, Ben. Kal, from "n!J, ligavit, vinxit, and Metaph. - T coarctavii, Angl. straitened. With the suffix "^ , my, after a noun plural. Verse 9- % •*|1^D (sooroo) recedite. 2nd person plural imperative of Kal, from "l^lD, formed like Qp, see Gr. p. 84. Accent, Munahh inferius. [For •'brb, see No. 237, for pS, No. 238, and for rJIStt?, No. 177.] ••-; VT - T IF •»*»D2l bip (kol bich-yee) vocem fletus-mei. [For bip, see No. 144.] From n^Sl, flevit, comes the noun masculine "^DSl, fletus ; T T 'J before a pause "^32, and with the affix •» , '^•'321, fletus-meus. Verse 10. IF Tiann (tchhin-na-thee) supplicationem-meam. An heem. noun feminine nan^, from pn, gratiosus fuit ; and with the affix "», my, T • : -T it changes n into n, thus "^nann. • T • : IF ^ribcn (tcphil-la-thee) om^/owem-wmm. Vid. No. 178. Accent, ^' T • i: Merca preceded by a Galiya. See Nos. 1 and 302. yil — L] PRAXIS. 89 ^ ^y^^ (yik-kalih) accipiet. 3rd person sing. fut. of Kal, from np\ It • - T accepit, b being compensated by dagesh. Future flpM, PTpn, np^, and before a pause np''. Verse 11. ^ ^Wy^ (yebho-shoo) pudore-qfficientur. 3rd person plural future of Kal, from K?ia, erubescere. Future XD'y2'A, and with H paragogic, n£t?i3R Accent, Mahpach. ^ ^bna*'*! (veyib-ba-halo6) et-terrebuntur. 3rd person plural future of Niph., the omitted 3 being compensated by dagesh. From bn^, - T turbatus est, which in Niph. is bnn3. Accent, Munahh. ^ "^Il'^'S'bs (col-oyebhai) omnea-inimici-mei. Vid. No. 161, AT : I T IF ^atZ?"^ (ya-shoo-bhoo) revertentur. 3rd person plural future of ••• T Kal, which is iS^tTM, remrtm\ from n-12?, redire, reverti, of the form T of D^p, vid. Gr. p. 84. Accent, Eebhia-Geresh. ^ -Iti?':!"^ (ye-bh5-shoo) pudore-afficientur. More properly •Itt^i::'', third person plural future of Kal, from ttJin, erubuit. ^ 272*1 (ra-ghang) subito. As an adverb, from the noun substantive -IT 372"), scissioy disruptio, item momentum. Before a pause V^^. LXX. PSALMUS VII. r. Verse 1. Shiggaion, Hebrew p^'Stt?. The meaning of this term is much T • disputed, The root being 7121^7, erravit, peccavit. Buxtorf and T T Bythner render the word by "ode erratica, vel varia, quae omnibus 00 PRAXIS. [Vll.— 1. raiionibus musicce simul decantabatur." The same meaning seems applicable to the "Prayer of the Prophet Habbakkuk," ch. iii. 1, which is said to be niDI^'ritZ? hv, "according to variable songs or I : • V.- tunes." Margin Engl. Version. Parkhurst understands the term to refer to David's and Israel's wanderings from God's law, and from their own place, on that account. It occurs only in these two places of Holy Scripture. The LXX. render it here by Ycc\uoq, and in Habb. by META' 'ilAH~2. Gesenius supposes this mtt? to be like NIlt27, H^W, to be great, lofty. The Pael of the latter root in Syriac means to sing praises, hence he calls "jV3t27, nomen verbale pielicum, hymniis. T • 5[ "ntt? (shar) cecinit, preterite of Kal, from ^'W, canere. Also the It Ben. Kal is *ia?, canens, cantor, plural D'»"127. T 'T [310.] •'"ll^'^'bs? (gnal-dibhray) super verba. From the noun jnasculine "1^1'^, verbum, sermo, comes the form ^2*1 in regimen, by T T - : changing the former (t) into (:), and the latter into (-), thus "lD*r"b37. In the plural C")^"^, verba, (t) is changed in (:), and the preceding (:) into (•), hence tt?n2-nn'^-br. With affixes, and also in the plural, it shortens the former (t) into (:), thus Tfnin, verbum tuum, •tJ'»1^'^, verba tua, VT : [311.] W^D (Choosh). The proper name of one of the sons of Ham, from whom the Ethiopians were descended. Here it seems to have been one of those enemies of David, who exasperated Saul against him, 1 Sam. xxvi. 19. Bythner suspects, that David here alludes to Saul himself, the son of W^p. [312.] '*3^1!2*»"]2l (ben-jemee-nee) Jllii Jemini, quasi Je?w/wa?/, a pa- tronymic from Benjamin. The Targum renders it, " On the destruc- tion of Saul, the son of Kish, of the tribe of Benjamin." Benjamin is derived from ]'^t5>"]2l, Jilius dextrce, or filius senectutis meoe, )'*a% quasi D'»)D^; \q\ JUius foriunce, nam '}'*»"*, dextra, etiara Fortunam • T • T significavit. yil— 2, 3.] PRAXIS. 91 Yekse 2. r313.1 •'/T'Dn ^S (becha hha-seethee) in-te speravi. From nDn, •A. Tj: TT conjidit, comes, by clianging H into ''j the 1st person singular,, Tl"^Dn for •^nnon. in the plural by casting away H, -^iDn, sjje- • • T • : - T T rdrunt^ for 'inDn, see Nos. 120 and 333, : It ^ ^317'^t27in (ho-shee-he-nee) sahum-me-fac. See No. 159* [314.] '^DlTbS/iS (mic-col ro-dhephal) ab-omnibus persequenti- - : T • bus-me. \p,from, "bs, before Maccaph for bs, changing i into (t). T See Nos. 33 and 119.] ^li"), is the Ben. Kal, from ^Tl, secw^wsvel - T persecutus est. In plural D"^S*fi"), in regimen "'Si'"), and with the afhx '^Dlh. Accent, Eebhia-Geresh. [315.] '^ib'^S^ni (ve-hat-see-le-nee) e^er?^e-we. From b^^D, mj0W2V, eripuit, which in Hiphil compensates 2 by dagesh, thus b^'S^H, and with the affix ''i , '^^b'^-^n, rescue me. In plural Jlb"^'!^n, eripite. Verse 3. [316.] ?lht^''"^Q (pen-yit-roph) ne-forte rapiat. [For ]B, see No. 115.] The verb after ]Q is found only twice in the preterite tense; 2 Sam. XX. 6, and 2 Kings, ii. 16. ^'"ItS"^, future of Kal from r|"lID, : • - T rapuit^ dentibus-dilaceravit. Future P]niOM, &c. Accent, Munahh inferius. J^ll^ means also alimentum, like Tpat^jj. [317.] n^'nWS (kear-ye) ut-leo ; rfHW, leo grandior, with D the sign of similitude. From n~!W, discerpsit [For '^C75D, see No. 1 33.] [318.] piB (po-rek) lacerans, Ben. Kal from p*lQ, rupit, carnem- - T laceravit. Accent, Rebhia-Geresh. [319.] b'^-!5/3 1'^MI (ve-en mat- seel) et-non liberans. [For "|'^M, see No. 134.] b'^S^D, participle of Hiph. liberans sen liberator, for b*^!S5D^, 3 being compensated by dagesh. 92 PRAXIS. [YIL— 4, 5, Veese 4. [320.] Tl'^t2727 (gna-see-thee) feci. 1 st person singular preterite • J* T of Kal from nt!!?r, fecit^ H being changed into "^ quiescent. T T [321.] rii^Y (zoth) }ioc^ istud. The demonstrative pronoun feminine ■which supplies the place of a neuter, which the Hebrews have not. [322.] tt?> (yesh) est, which is of all genders and perons, from the unused Htt?"', est, sunt. Before Maccaph, it is written with (v) ; T T with a prefix tt?"**) ; and with n interrogative ti7Tr, an est ? [323.] bl5? (gna-vel) iniquitas. A noun masculine without a V/T plural from bl2?, Pih. b-l^, iniquusfuit, impie egit. Aocent, Merchah. [324.] '»s3!D2 (bechap-pai) in-volis-meis. From 3, m, and ?]3, concavitas cujuslibet rei, vola manus, a noun feminine derived from J^D3, incurvavit. With affixes, and in the dual number it assumes - T dagesh to compensate the defect of the absent letter. In the dual D''B3, and with the affix "^SS, or before a pause "^53, manus meas. • -- - - at- Verse 5. [325.] *»nbX23 (ga-mal-tee) retribui. From bDH, retribuit, preterite • : - TV -T of Kal, of which Tlb^^, is the 1st person singular. Hence the noun masculine, rarely feminine, bj22, a camel, so called, says T T Bochart, from the unrelenting and revengeful nature of his temper when excited ; insomuch that it has become a proverb among those nations which are most familiar with it Accent, Tiplihha anterius. [326.] •'DbtC* (sho-lemee) pacifico-meo, i. e. to him who was at peace with me. Ben. Kal from obtt?, pacificus fait, pacem-cduit. - T [For 3?"!, malum, see No. 232.] [327.] nii v>nW1 (va-ahhal-letsa) etiam erui. The future of Pihel from V^n, extraxit, liberavit, jyericulo-extraxit, for V^HW, "with n yil._6.] PKAxis. 93 paragogic, (-) being changed into (;), and 1 conversive taking (t) before «. [For mi!^, vid. No. 309.] [328.] Dp''"! (re-kam) gratis. From p**"!, p"l, p'^n, vanus, inanis. It •• which with D heemantiv forms the adverb, Dp'^l. Verse 6. [329.] ^Ty^ (yee-rad-doph) persequatur, et alios ad persequendum incitet. A future compounded of Kal and Pihel, from ?|1"1, secutus i <- <''i^lH^ esty &c., vid. No. 314. In Kal the future is P)i'^")«, persequar ; 3rd person singular r^^"^ ; and 3rd person singular in Pihel, is Pl'in*', from both which is formed ?l''^"l'>. LXX. Kot,'vo(!hiai%ci.i u^x, persequatur merito, [For in^'iw, see No. 161.] Modern Grammarians nearly all deny the original existence of what the ancient called /ormo? mixtce, like ^'TI''. Eichhorn says, " rectius legitur vel in Kal vel in Pihel ;" Ewald (3rd Ed. Lz. 1838, § 290) goes so far as to suppose the dagesh in V\Ty> to be lene even after the vowel patach, which, on account of 1 (he thinks) has grown out of sheva. According to Kennicott there are manuscripts " qui shva sub ") legunt, &c., alii chateph patach." Gesenius has devoted four pages to the formce mixtce. See his Lehrgebaude, Leipzig, 1817, pp. 460-4. With regard to '^W^l, we have mentioned above that tTDS stands for person as well as souk [330.] ^b?***! (ve-yas-segh) et-comprehendat. The future of Hiph. from !lti73, attigit, apprehendit, 2 being changed into dagesh. - T [331. J Dbl'^l (ve-yir-mos) et concidcet. The future of Kal from J :• : DD"), calcavit. - T [332.] \^~lHb (la-a-rets) in-ipsam-terram. From ynw, ter^-a^ Gr. VJT T gpflf. With n emphatic ^ISn, ipsa terra, which being excluded after V T T the letters D, 7, D, gives \^"IM7, tn-ipsa-terra. 94 PRAXIS. [VII.— 6, 7. [333.] "^^n (lihay-yai) mtam-meam. From the plural noun U^^U, At - vita (like D'^D^Ipl, old age ; 0*^33, face^ and others) we say >^n, my : • T — Ufe^ in pause, "'"n. D'^^n occurs also as plural masculine of the ad- jective TI, vivus^ vivens. The dagesh in •», and the same "TT being used (in the Pentateuch), also as third person masculine singular of the preterite for HTT, induced Kimchi to assign for its root '»'^n, an T T -T opinion still held by Grammarians of the present day, who, in fact, acknowledge no last radical n to be genuine where it has not a Mappik, as in PT^; any other H radical at the end of the word being a mere substitute for the genuine *» (seldom 1) which always appears in corresponding roots in Arabic, and in the Hebrew itself before D and n, and in participle Pahul (see Paradigm Tv7'2). Also before TT and 1 such original "> is not very scarce. Examples are Deuter. xxxii. 37 ; Jes. xxi. 12; and Psalms, xxxvi. 8 and 9; Ivii. 2; Ixxiii. 2; Ixxvii. 4 ; Ixxviii. 44 ; cxxviii. 3. ^ "^lin^^ (oo-che-bho-dee) et-gloriam-meam. Vid. No. 141. Accent, Shalsheleth. [334.] "I5^b (le-ha-phar) in ipso pulvere ; ")S57, pulvis, a noun «>TT|V TT masculine with a plural feminine nilD3?, in regimen. [335.] ]2t27^ (yash-ken) hahitare-faciat. 3rd person singular future of Hiph. from ptC*, habitavit. - T Verse 7. If n^^p (koo-ma) surge. Vid. No. 158. Accent, Mahpahh Zar- bM, ad-me, &c. The im- T : _ .. perative of Kal, from I^V, evigilare^ of the form of H^^p. No. 158. T [For i:)2t2?^, see No. 43.] [339.] n'^^2 (tsiv-vee-tha) prcecepisti. From n'l!^, comes in Pihel T !•• TT 71^% jussit, &c. In the 3rd person singular preterite, n quiesces in T* (t), as n-1!? M^n, ipse mandavit, and in the second, n is changed T* into "^, as rx^^% and sometimes with n paragogic. Verse 8. f niV^ (va-hadhath) et-congregatio. Vid. No. 45. ^ D'^^^b (le-um-mim) popuhrum. Vid. No. 53. [340.] ''JDIliDn (teso-bhebhec-ca) circumdabit-te. From ^HD, circumivit^ comes in pohel by changing dagesh into i, ^2210, which with n paragogic gives in the future HlSiiDM, (••) being changed T : -: into (:). In the affix "^7 in this place, dagesh is found, compensative T for the excluded D epenthetic in rj^l^^iDn. f n^bri (ve-ha-leha) \ et, br, propter, n , illam. Vid. No. 131. T V T : : - T [341.] Dinzab (lam-ma-r6m) in-altum ; Di")^, altum, a noun ^ T - T masculine heemantiv, and as an adjective, alius, sublimis, from WH, ultum esse. [For nn^ltt?, vid. No. 295.] 96 PRAXIS. [YIL— 9, 10. Verse 9. [342.] ^^T' (ya-dheen) judicabit populos. Targum causam aget populorum — Bythner. The future of Kal of the root ']^'^ or Y^. [For D^^lJ, vid. No. 167-] [343.] ''Dt^Dtt? (shoph-te-nee) judica-me. From 12212?, judicavit, ■J" : T - T comes the imperative of Kal, toiCtt?, and with the affix ''a , "^^IDStiT. : : T In the plural ^'^'ZiXD.judicate. % ''P'7!I3 (ke-tsidh-kee) secundum-justitiam-meam. Vid. No. 173. [344.] '♦an!3^ (oo-che-thum-mee) et-secundum-perfectionem-meam super me. LXX. Ka't kxtu, T«y ukxkUv f^ov^ innocenHam. A noun masculine Dh, perfection from D?2n, integer fuit. With affixes it - T takes dagesh, and changes i into (•%), as •'KJnS, in-integritatate-mea. Before the following word ^'bs?, we may supply an ellipse such as T T bi^II, retribuey and render the verse, " Judge me, O Lord, (and) re- ward me, according to my perfection and innocence." Verse 10. [345.] ""l^!l"^ (yigh-mor) consumatur, dejiciat. From 11!22, which is taken both in a good and a bad sense. In the former it signifies perfecity absolvit. In the latter de/ecit, destructus fuit. The 3rd person singular future of Kal nb2l^, but i being shortened into (t) chatoof on account of Maccaph, ll^iT*. T : • [346.] D^37tt7"l I 3?"1 M3 (na-rang-reshaim) M3, nunc quceso. A • T : - T T particle of timej denoting entreaty. Accent, Munahh superius. [For 3?-l, vid. No. 232, and for WVWIy No. 7.] [347.] ^^^^n^ {oo-ihecho-nen) et-stabilies, i)^''\'2yju8turn. 2nd person future of Pohel, which is piD, aptavity stabilivity from ^J»D, in which verb in Pihel the second radical quiesces in i, and the third is doubled. VII— 11.] PRAXIS. 97 In Ps. vii. 13, it is found in the 3rd person singular with 1 conversive of the future, as n23iD'^1, et aptavit^ vel paravit ilium. Accent, Yerahh. [For p"^"^!?, see No. 46. Accent, Merca Mapachatum.] [348.] ]nb^ (oo-bho-chen) et-probans. The Ben. Kal, with ^ before a labial, from ]n2l, probavit [For nisb, see IS^. 207. Accent, Tiphhha anterius.] I [349.] ni^bs^ (oo-chela-yoth) et renes. A noun plural feminine T ; without a singular, from nbs, desideravit, as being the supposed T T seat of desire, " (t) penult, in every increment, or in regimen, being shortened into (:)," it becomes nl'^vD, Verse 11. [350.] "'SH^ (ma-ghin-nee) clypeus-meua. LXX. it fioiiB^td ^«y, ad- jutorium meum, by metaphor. From "pi, texit, comes ptt, dypeus, Vid. No. 139. In affixes, and change of number it changes (••) into (.), but always retains (t), because the heemantiv noun formed by )2 comes from a defective verb. In plural "^tUSd and in regimen • • T V"iW "^3^^, scuta terrce, i. e. princes and magistrates. [351.] 5?*'tt?iD (mo-sheeang) servantem. The participle of Hiphil, from VW\ which, by changing "^ into i, gives in Hiph. Sy^'ttJin, - T " • auxilium tulit. With an affix it is found, Ps. cvi. 21, D5?^t27iD, sal- T vatoris eorum. [352.] nb-ntt?** (yish-re lebh) rectos corde. From ntt?\ rectus fult, comes the noun adjective Itt?^, rectus^ and as a substantive T T rectum^ rectitude. In the plural by changing (t) into (••), it makes D'^^lt!?''. In regimen (t) being changed into (:), of the previous (:) it makes (.), hence "'"lti?\ 98 PRAXIS. [VIL— 12, 13. Verse 12. f tDSitt? (sho-iphet) Judicans, i. e. judex. Vid. No. 108. J" f p^^'2 (tssid-deek) Justus. Vid. No. 46. f353.] nVX bsi (ve-El zo-hem) et-Deus indignans. For b«, vid. No. 228. DVT, Ben. Kal from DVT, indignatus^ detestatus fuit. It implies the external exhibition of anger. Accent Merca. Mendelssohn, the German Translator of the Psalms, renders DVT an accusative parallel to p'^'^2, and bw, as a poetical repetition of the nominative, ** God judges the righteous and him that acts wantonly every day," Verse 13. IF :a^l^^ b^b dm (im-lo-yashoobh) si non conversusfuerit^ which the TV J LXX. read in the 2nd person l;r«rTp«(p«iTg. The 3rd person singular fiiture of Kal, scil. :iJia?W, ^.1K?n, S'ltt?'', from n-1tt?, redire, reverti. T T T Accent, Tiphhha anterius. [354.] i2nn (hhar-bo) gladium-suum, A noun feminine S"in, J : - gladius, from n^n, exsiccatus vel vastatus fuit. With an affix it first changes both (•••) into (:), and then the former (:) into (-), thus i2nn, gladius-suus ; ''S"in, gladius-meus. Before a pause it changes only the former (•••) into (t), thus Snn. With a prefix it makes no change in the points, thus mnD, a-gladio ; and with the letters 3, b, D, it excludes n emphatic, as SIPIS, tanquam ipsum gladium. In plural feminine the latter (•••) is changed into (t), and the former into (-:), as nimn, gladii, [355.] t&irsb'' (yil-tosh) acuet. Future of Kal from ICDb, acuit, jjolivit, as of instruments of iron or brass. [356.] inttJp (kash-to) arcum-suum. From the Chaldaic HWp, jaciUattit estf comes iltt^p, arcust a noun of common gender, but VII— 14.] PRAXIS. 99 oftener feminine. Before a pause Htl^p. In the plural n^Ht^p, V T T : Modern Grammarians derive HWp from ttJIp, a curvitatey (unde to'|« KXf^cTTvXxy apud Hom. et Hesiod.); a similar form is nST from F)5)T. The Chaldee ilWp is a denominative from HWp. [357.] 'jT'T^ (da-rach) tetendity when used in reference to a bow or arrows, alias, calcaviU Preterite of Kal. IF n33i:D"'1 (va-yecho-neneha) et-paravit-illum, Vid. No 347. Verse 14. [358.] X^'^H (h.Q-c\iQQri) parare-fecit 3rd person singular preterite of Hiph., ") being excluded, from ]J|D, aptare. Before servile 3 and n it assumes i, thus nii'^DH, aptdsti, &c., 3rd person plural i)D*>Dn, aptdrunt, [359.] m?3"'»b3 (kele-ma-"fcth) vasa-mortis. From the noun maec. ^bs, comes the plural D'^'^bs, by syncope D*»b3, and in regimen '•bs. [For rrsp, vid. No. 297]. [360.] V-^n (hhit-sav) sagittas-suas. From V^n, discidit, dimi- diavit, comes the noun masculine ^TT, sagitta ; plural D'^-!Jn, in re- gimen >.!^n, and with the affix VS^n, by assuming dagesh compsn- sative, and changing (••) into (•). [361.] C^pbhb (ledho-lekeem) in ardcntes, vel persecutores. The Ben. plural of Kal from pbl, insecutus est, item metaph. exarsit ut - T ignis. [362.] "hV^^ (yiph-hal) ejiciet. The 3rd person singular future of Kal with (t) before a pause, for b^D"^, from ^V^, fecit This verb gave names to the voices of Hebrew verbs, see No. 237. Some have also rejected IpQ, because of the changes of Q and D, and have - T adopted Tttb or blfip, in its place. Gesenius renders the three last - T - T words thus elegantly : " He turns (renders) his arrows burning ones, that is, he hurls burning arrows." 100 PRAXIS. [VII.— 15, 16. Verse 15. [363.] nan (hin-ne) ecce. From ]n, en^ ecce, and with n para- gogic nan. A demonstrative particle, used also with affixes ^an, ecce tu or ecce te ; ''Dan, ecce ego ; in pause ''aan, ecce me, &c. &c. [364.] I'lWbsn"' (yehhab-bel aven) pcurturiet iniquitatem. The future of Pihel, in which, on account of Maccaph, (..) changes into (v), from bnn, in pignus accepit, in Pihel, corrupit^ perdidit ; etiam, parturivit. [For pW, see No. 238.] The ground meaning of bin is binding and winding, hence its various renderings of rope, pledge, injury, destruction, perversion, labour, and pangs. [365.] mni (veha-ra) et-concepit. The preterite of Kal, with *) conversive of the preterite. [366.] b627 {^Qrm^V) perversitatem, cerumnosum-laborem. A noun T T masculine from b^3?, laboramt. In regimen the former (t) is changed - T into (-:), and the latter into (-), whence blDl?, Ps. cxl. 10. [367.] "iptr? 'ib'^l (veya-ladh sha-ker) et-peperit mendacium. [For viT -jt: Tb"*, vid. No. 93]. "IpEt? a radical noun from *1pti?, mentiius est. Before a pause the former (v) is changed into (t), thus npl!?, plural C'npQ?, mendacia. Observe : the Munahh is moved back to prevent • T : the concurrence of two accented syllables. The same see above, [108], [237], and [326]. Veese 16. [368.] "Tia (bor) cisternam^ yoif&veam. A radical noun of masc gender signifying as well a cistem for water, as a pitfal, also a grave. [369.] ni3 (ca-rd) excldit, vel fodit. Preterite of Kal, of which the 2nd person is n^'IS, the third radical, n, being changed into ^ T • T quiescent; and 3rd person plural Jn3, in which the third radical n is caet away before -T. See [333]. Accent, Tiphhha anterius. VII— 17, 18.] PRAXIS. 101 [370.] imBrT'l (vay-yahh-perehoo) et-effodit-eam. The 3rd person singular future of Kal, with the affix in , which causes the i in lisn*', to be changed into (:), and (-:) loses its own (-). It has 1 conversive of the future. From ^^r\,fodit^ excavavit ^ vS^I (vay-yippol) et-cadet, for et-cecidit, with 1 conversive future from bD3, ruit, cecidit. Vid. No. 267. - T [371.] nntrs (beshd-hhath) in-foveam. A noun feminine nntt?, -J- : - - fovea^ item corruptio, as in Ps. xvi. 10, which the LXX. render hx^B-o^oiv, which is also quoted in Acts, ii. 27. Before a pause i^PItt?. -I T The root H^W, to descend, sink down, has probably given rise to this word like ni3 to HTl^, although ^ict^B-o^d evidently aims at S^'^XD, - - - - T which in Pihel is used of corruption and destruction. [For bl?S"', see No. 362.] V^RSE 17. IF :iW^ (ya-sho6bh) convertetur, Vid. verse 13. For ibto3?, vid. J T T -: No. 366, and for itr?^")!. No. 143. [372.] ilpip (kodh-kedho) in-caput-ejus ; lf7*7p, «'er?ear, the highest : : T : T part of the head, a noun masculine without a plural, from lip, ver- licem indinavit On account of the affix, i is changed into (:). Hence iipip. : : T [373.] iDttn(hhama-s6)«?/o/ew?e«-e;Ms; Dttn, vis, violentia, a noun masculine. In regimen Dttn. With an affix iDDPT, violentia ejus, and in the plural D^Dttn tt7"^SD, a mro molentiarum, i. e. violentissimo, • T -: [374.] T1^ (ye-redh) descendet. 3rd person singular future of Kal from *TT», descendit. In the future *» is concealed in (••), thus -T T")> (for "n***^), in pause we find Tl***! with (-), also in the feminine plural before na, T "Verse 18. IF n-Ti« for this word see No. 300, and for ipi23, No. 173. 102 PRAXIS. [VIII.— 1, 2. [375.] (TlXaTMl (va-azam-mera) et-psaUam. From IttT, putavit, T : — :i- -T prcecidity comes in Pihel "nST, cecinit^ modvlatus est. See No. 122. Future of Pihel n^TS, and with n paragogic changing (••) into (••) m^TN, which it resumes again before a pause. [376.] ^^^hv (gnel-yon) AltissimL A noun masculine heemantiv, excelsus, sublimis, being also considered as one of the names of The MOST High. From rhv, ascendit. PSALMUS VIII. n. Verse 1. IF n?^3^b, For this word, vid. No. 169. [377.] n^ri2in"b37 (gnal hag-git-teeth) pro torcidarihus, vel super instrumento musico torculari. From ns, torctdar, comes iT^nil, a noun feminine of uncertain signification. The LXX. render it v^reg rav Xnvavy for the winepresses^ as if the Psalm were composed for the time of vintage. Parkhurst thinks it had respect unto Him who " trod the wine-press alone," Isa. Ixiii. 4. The Targum explains it thus, "on the harp which David brought from Gath," nn ]D. (xesenius imagines a word n2, (in a third sense, namely) contracted from n3!l3, pukatio instrum. mtcsicorum^ and from that derives tVPi^t an instrument which serves for such pidsation or striking. Verse 2. [378.] !13^il*TM ( Adho-ne-noo) Domine-nosier. From p'*TS, Domitius (vid. No. 72), is formed the plural D*'3*1N, Doinhii., which with the affix 5)3 , our, excluding W , gives na'^a^W. VIIL— 2, 3.] PRAXIS. 103 [379.] ")"''7W"nZ3 (ma-ftcldir) quam illustre ; "l>1N, magnijicus, J' - T validus, a noun adjective. In plural D'^'T^'^M, potentes, sublimes, re- gimen '^n^'^M. From *T1M, fortis, admirabilis fuit, not used in Kal. [380.] nsn 1tt?M (asher tena) quod ponere, i. e. quod, potius, qui posuisti. From ^n3, dedit, comes, by casting off 3, the imperative ]n ; -T and assuming n paragogic, (••) being changed into (:) 'H'lPi. Hence the T : infinitive after the imperative form is used for the preterite. — By thner. But Bishop Hare says, " there is no example of an infinitive of this form in ^HD, (of which the infinitive is nn for riDI^), but it is proved by various examples that this is the form of the imperative. To me, therefore, the imperative seems to be put for the 2nd person of the preterite, which, I think, is also done in 'H'^'^h (from WD, ponere\ Ps. Ivi. 9." Vid. Gr. p. 45, in fine. Gesenius (Lehrgebaude, p. 777) considers this T\^F\ as the imperative used for future optative. T : Having laid down certain rul^ how the imperative following or preceding a future thereby becomes itself a future, as Ps. cxxviii. 5, n«n^ for Ti^-^TX) ; Is. vi. 9, ^^»tt? for ^ViyDr\, he continues, " so, perhaps, likewise the diflicult passage, Ps. viii. 2, How glorious is thy name in all lands who mightest set thy glory over the heaven, i. e. would that thou spreadest thy glory over the heaven ; may it be spread over the heaven in the whole creation." With regard to 'Htt^S, V -: he refers to Job. ix. 15, for a comparison. [381.] Tjiin (ho-dhecha) laudem-tuam ; lin, gloria, laus, a noun radical, and with the afiix Tflin, gloria-tua. With a pause (0 is changed into (v), thus ^lin. [For D^'^at^n, vid. No. 70]. AV • T T - Verse 3. [382.] D"^ vbi^ '^QD (mip-pee gno-lelim) ex-ore parvulorum. [For ''G^, vid. No. 256]. From bbs^, egit, fecit, comes the participial - T noun in Kal, bbir ; plural D>bbiy. 104 PRAXIS. [VIII.— 4. [383.] D^pS''*) (veyo-nekeem) et-sugentium. The masculine plural from pDi>, lactans^ a participial noun in Kal, from p2^, suxiU [384.] T^ rnD** (yis-sadh-ta gnoz) funddsti-fortitudinem. 2nd i T :v-* person singular preterite of Piliel in whicli the dagesh implies j^rm?- ter. 'From 10*^^ /undamt. LXX.. KccTYiprtcruj per/ecisti. Accent, Merca Mapachatum, praecedente Yerahh, [385.] T3? (gnoz) robur, imperium, laus. A noun masculine with- out a plural from t'tV^/oriis, potens vel robustm fuit. With an affix -T it assumes dagesh, and changes i into (%), thus ''•T!?, robur meum. % For l^^^b, propter, vid. No. 252, and for Tymi!?, angustiatores - - t V : tuo8, No. 309. [386.] n^'StC'nb (lehash-beeth) ad-cessare-faciendum. From r\DXD, cessavit, comes in Hiphil, /T^Slt^rT, infinitive, preceded by b the sign of the gerund. IF n^'iM (o-yebh). Vid. No. 161. [387.] Dp3n!3!1 (oo-mith-nak-kem) et-ulciscentem-se. The parti- ciple in Hithpahel, from Dp3, tdtus est. -T Verse 4. [388.] nwnW">3 (kee er-e) Quum videbo. Alii, quoties. The future Kal, from nW"l, vidit. 1st person nS"lW; 2nd person nSin ; 3rd person HWH"^, &c. Accent, Munahh inferius. [389.] Tf^XSO:? (sha-me-cha) ccelos-tuos. From C^llStt?, cceli^ which V TV • - T casts away the termination because of the affix Tf , thy. In regimen it changes Q** into *» , and (t) into (:), thus ^Dtt?a, in ccelis. Accent, Tiphhha anterius. [390.] nb37D (ma-hase) opus. From r\W'S, fecit, comes the noun J" -: - T T masculine heemantiv, ntt?3?tt, which in regimen changes (...) before n into (") as above. In the plural D^toUD, which is in regimen >tt?3?K). VIII.— 5.] PRAXIS. 105 [391.] rl^Pi^^"^^ (ets-beho-the-chsi) diptorum-tuorum. From3?il?, tinxit, coloravit, comes the noun feminine heemantiv, ^Sl^M, digitus, formed by M. In the plural (-) is changed into (t), thus ni3?2l!JN; but with an affix (t) is shortened into (:), as '^ni^SlJK, di^itos meos. [392.] r\y (ya-re-ahh) lunam. A radical noun, akin to n*^"!, odor, fragrantia, from the fragrance of night. But the Latins derive Luna from luceo^ because she shines so brightly by night Bythner. Hence the conjunctive accent Yerahh m^ (more correctly VH^) receives its name, m** is in modern times considered a primitive noun, from which m'', month, is derived. [393.] D'^iDiDI (vecho-cha-bheem) eif-ste^/«5. The plur. of the noun • T I : masculine D!Di3, Stella, with 1 prefixed. The derivation of this word T : is uncertain, unless, as Bythner suggests, it may be derived, per antiphrasin, from T\'D.'D, extinxit. Parkhurst says, that the word l2Di!3, in Arabic, signifies to glister. From this word the impostor T Ba/r-Gochab, Son of a Star, in the reign of Adrian (or as the Romans called him Barcochebas), took his name, with evident allusion to the prophecy in Num. xxiv. 17, as if he were the "Star out of Jacob." But this false Messiah was destroyed by the Emperor's General, Julius Severus, with an incredible number of his followers. [394.] nnSDiS (co-nan-ta) (quas) prceparasti. The 2nd person T :iT lingular preterite of Pihel, with H paragogic, and (-) changed into (t) because of the pause. From ^^ID, stabilivit ; Piliel piD, and in 2nd person n^iiD. Yid. No. 347. Between the verse just finished T : - and that which follows there is understood an expression like itfM TN, "then I say." Verse 5. [395.] tt?i3S-n?3 (ma-enosh) ^mW (est) Ao»2o; m*i2W, a noun masc. jv: T '•"• signifying wretched man, and similar to the Latin mortalis, as being N 106 PRAXIS. [VIII.— 6. liable to wretchedness and even to death. From tt73M, lethali morbo - T cegrotavit. In the plural it is irregular, viz., D"'t273M, homines misery • T-: in regimen ^W^^. [396.] •*13"'3Tn"''3 (kee-thiz-keren-noo) quod recorderis-ejus. The future of Kal 1*12TM, recordabor ; *li3Tn, from whence with the aflSx ^3 , him^ it, after a verb, comes •*)3*12Tn. [397.] DIM (a-dham) hominis. From DIM, rubuit^ comes DIS, T T - T T T homo terrenus ex rvhra terra formatus. It includes both sexes, as in Gen. v. 2, et vocavit, nomen eorum DIM. When opposed to t2?''M, T T it means a plebeian. See also Nos. 2 and 395. [398.] siaipSn (thiph-kedhen-noo) visites-eum. The 2nd person iv : : • smgular future of Kal from TpQ, visitavit, with the affix •*I3 , as - T abovBs No. 396. This verb is taken both in a good and a bad sense, signifying to visit with blessings as well as with judgments. Verse 6. [399.] ^rnDnni (vat-tehhas-sere-hoo) et-deficere-facies eum. LXX. iXeirraa-ecg, minuisti. The future of Pihel with 1 conversive, from IDnn, in which, on account of the affix, (••) changes into (:). Eoot IDn, defecit. A better rendering of ^mDnni, is carere fecisti, privasti eum. See IDHD, Eccles. iv. 8, bereave, deprive. f For ^V72, vid. No. 118. D'^rlbstt, a Deo, vel ab angelis. [400.] "TW^^ (veha-dhar) et-decore. A noun masculine radical jTT : with t prefixed. In regimen Tin. With affixes, and in the plural number, the former (t) is changed into (-:), thus '?fmn. In the :iT-: plural Dmn. • T -: [401.] ^mtS3?^ (tehat-tere-hoo) coronabis-eum. 2nd person I" : - : singular future of Pihel nt33?n, on account of the affix (••) changes into (:), from nisy, circumdedit. Vid. No. 283. VIII— 7.] PRAXIS. 107 Verse 7. [402.] •inb"^tt7X2in (tam-shee-le-hoo) dominum-constitues-eum. 2iid person singular future of Hipliil, which is 7*^27^!!, from btt7tt, domi- natus est. Accent, Tiphhha anterius, a prepositive. IT ''tC'J?^^ (bema-hase) in operibus. Vid. No. 390. [403.] ^*'"T'' (ya-dhe-cha) manuum-tuarum, i. e., of thy creatures. AVT From m*', projecit^ jaculatus est, comes *T», manus, a projiciendo. TT T Hence '^T^, manus mea. In regimen it changes (t) into (-), thus •T T'Sl, in manum inimici, but with an affix it again resumes (t), as iT^S, in manu ejus. In the dual D">T', duce manus, which in regimen T : • -T changes D*^ into "» , and (t) into (;), thus >T>. [404.] nrntt? (shat-ta) posuisti. ntt?, posuit, the preterite of Kal, TJ- T from TV\W, ponere ; of which the feminine is nHtt?, ilia posuit, as in T T Ps. ixxxiv. 4. But in the 2nd person singular nntJ?, posuisti, with n paragogic, for Dtt?, which k for niltt?, and which, by analogy, T - T : - would be nnitt?. In the 1st person singular "^I^W, posui. T : -T • - [405.] Tin/n (ta-hhath) sub, infra, also loco, vice. A preposition, which assumes the plural affixes of nouns, with which it changes (-) ultimate into (:), thus Tinn, sub me ; si^^'i^nn, sub nobis. [406.] y^hy^ irdi.^-\kY) pedibus ejus ; brn, />es, is a noun feminine from b^n, detraxit, because (says Bythner) "detractors go to and fro - T detailing slanders." But Parkhurst derives it from b^l, to smite, strike, or impress, as the feet are pressed against the ground. Thus the LXX. render it in Isa. xxxii. 20, by Ttrocnl. Before a pause it changes the former (•••) into (t), as b^nSl, in pede. With affixes and in VAT : the dual or plural number it changes both (v) into ( :), and then the former (:) into (-), as •'bin, pes meus; and from the dual D^^b^l, pedes; Vb^Tnnn, svb pedibus ejus. The phrase " to put under his feet" 108 PRAXIS. [YIII.— 8. denotes on the one hand the highest power, and on the other, the lowest subjection. At the present day it is established to derive the verb h^^ from bm, and not the contrary, which is certainly the more natural way. Verse 8. [407.] n3!^ (tso-ne) ovis^ i. e., oves, pecus lanigera, A noun formed from ]fc^!?, ovis, by omitting M and adding n paragogic. It is applied to sheep and goats. [408.] D'^sbw') (va-ala-phim) et boves vel armenta. From F)bM, • T -:r - T docuit, duxit (and in Pihel, discere fecit\ comes the radical noun ?)bN, dux^ also bos, as it were, the leader of the herd. In the plural the former (•••) changes into (-:), and the latter into (t), and forms with the prefix D'^Dbw'). Hence comes the first letter of the alphabet, Aleph, and also the Greek words lxi*Ttt7 (sa-dai) agrorum ; nitt?, ager, a noun masculine IT T V T radical (in regimen nitt?). In plural it becomes niltt?. A Syrian singular is ''Ttt?, and before a pause ''Itt?. Verse 9. [411.] "iiQ!S (tsip-p6r) volatile coelorum. A noun of common gender, including generally all birds, but particularly the spar- row, as it is supposed to imitate its note, thus tsip tsip. In the plural D'^IQ!^, a Hebrew noun which affords the rare example of •t:* changing i into (t:), Ps. civ. 17. [For U>11W, vid No. 70.] [412.] ^T[^ (oo-dheghe) et pisces. A noun masculine y\, piscis, from nn'^, multiplicari, being remarkable for its fecundity. In plural TT U^yi, which in regimen, by changing (t) into ( : ), gives "^^n. In the feminine form it is nH"^, from whence with an affix it changes H T T into n, thus UTyT\, piscem eorum. T T : [413.] D'Tl (hay-yam) ipsius maris. From the unused Dtt**, At- -t comes D"^, mare, which denotes not so much the water itself, as the 110 PRAXIS. [IX.— 1, 2. place thereof. lu the plural it assumes dagesh and changes (t) into (-), thus CKi^, Maria. [414.] n^y (gno-bher) transiens. The Ben. Kalfrom "1^3?, tram- - T ivit. LXX. Tfit ^iOiTTO^lVO^lVX. [415.] ninnS (or-hhoth) semitas ; mW, a noun masculine with a plural feminine from mS, iter fecit. In the plural (-) changes - T into (t), and i sometimes into (t) and sometimes remains; hence nimW and nim'W, and in regimen nin"lN. tt: t :t % Verse 10 is the same with the first verse. PSALMUSIX. D. Verse 1. [416.] ]ilb n^!3"b^ (gnal-mooth lab-ben) super mortem Labben, vel, ejus qui in medio stetit, scil. Goliath, who is called, 1 Sam. xvii. 4, D'^32n tt?''M, nir medietatum sive intermedins^ scilicet, inter duas acies. The LXX., apparently deriving n-*lX3"b37 from ob^, - T occultavit, have rendered the passage, vTrlf rZv K^v(pim rov vlov, pro occtdtis filii. Rabbi Kimchi says it is contracted for il-IXibs?, a T-; species of musical instrument. n^lD, mors (same as illia), is derived VT from nia, mori. Agreeably to Kimchi's reading H^'^hv, Junius T -: and Tremellius translate symphonice acutce (treble); having trans- lated n^3^Dtt7, ad gravem symphoniam (bass) ; see above, 284. Verse 2. [417.] ^"^nisbs^ (niph-leo-the-cha) mirahilia-tua. The participle of Niiihal sbsa, mirabilisy from wbD, which in Niphal signifies T : • T T mirunii admirabile esse \q\ fieri. Likewise occultari. (It seems to be IX. — 4, 5, 6.] PRAXIS. Ill closely allied to nbs, wliich in Niphal, nbQ3, signifies segregari.) T T . T : • In the plural MbD3 gives D'^wbDD, but oftener the feminine nisbD3, T : • • T : • T : • mirabilia^ wliich with affixes changes (t) into (:), sometimes also dropping the *) of i, as rj^risbSD. Verse 4. [418.] n^tZ72 (beshoobh) in-revertendo. From 'D.^W, reverti, the infinitive of Kal with a prefixed, the Gerund. Vid. No. 295. [419.] linw (a-hhor) re^rorswm. From "IPIM, j»os!?, comes lins, AT - - T posterius, and adverbially reirorsum. Vid. Gr. p. 74, in voce *'"inN, note (b). [420.] •*)bc?3'' (yic-ca-sheloo) impingent. 3rd person plural future of Niphal from btt?S, impegit^ pedibus-offeyidit^ which in Niphal is - T btt?33, and in the future the 3 is changed into dagesh forte in 3. Hence b'^t^S, securis. Verse 5. [421.] *'2*»'T) (vedhee-nee) et-cmsam-meam ; ]"'1, causa, judicium, lis, is a noun masculine without a plural, from ^^n, judicare. [422.] SS)::^ (lechis-se) in-solio ; «D3, solium, a throne, is a noun of masculine gender with a feminine plural niWDS. Verse 6. [423.] m5?2l (ga-har-ta) increpdsti; 2nd person singular preterite T :j- t of Kal, from ^'VX increpavit, and with an accusative, increpando per- - T didit. [424.] mSM (ib-badh-ta) perdidisti ; 2nd person singular pret. of Pihel, which is "T2«, perdidit, from IDM, periit. [425.] rr^m (ma-hhee-tha) delesti ; 2nd person singular pret. T • T of Kal, for nnnD, n being changed into > quiescent. From nn^, delevit, aholevit. [426.] 'rs^ (va-hedh) in sempiternum. From mV, transiit. 112 PRAXIS. [IX.— 7. comes I'S, usque, adkuc, and hence it signifies eternity. It conveys the idea of a longer time than ob'h?, aeculum, as appears from Ps. T X. 16. It always departs from the rule according to which it ought to be 1571 like U^\ or "T^?*) like inW; it occurs only in a pause, T T T T TV TV whence, perhaps, the transposition of (t v) into (vt). Yerse 7. [427.] 'l^ri (tam-moo) consummatce sunt. From D?Di^, integer J- - t fuit^ finivit, comes the preterite of Kal by syncope Cn, and in the plural, the second radical being compensated by dagesh, Jj^n. [428.] niinn (hhora-bhoth) vastitates. Plural of nsnn. From tt: t : t S^n, to be dry, waste. The LXX. render rtv IptjS-potJ l|gA<;rov u,\ ^ofc(peuccij " t and so does Luther, " the swords of the enemy have come to an end;" accordingly, they suppose the punctuation nill*in, plural of T-: ^nn, and, moreover, assume a suffix V , (Vnimn). A construc- T T : - tion of this kind begins with what grammarians call an absolute nominative, thus : the enemy — ^his swords have come to an end ; so Ps. xi. 4, Yehovah — in Heaven is his throne; Ps. xviii. 31, Grod — perfect is his way. Gesenius (who imagines Vnisin, his devasta- T : T tions) adduces as examples of such ellipsis suffixi, niTinb for nnvnnb. Gen. vi. 19, miatl for •»mttT1, Ps. cxviii. 14. See also D^S for a?3n3, No. 598. mn combines the ideas of dryness and s : T \ : destroying, like ^ififog and |66>, siccus and seco; related in sound, and partly in meaning are Kcippu, Ku^of, carpo, &c. [429.] n23b (la-ne-tsahh) in ceternum; n!^3, and four times in the Psalms, n23, victoria, &c., implying the finishing of an action, and when prefixed by 13? or b, signifying perpetuity, viz., in perpe- tuum. From H^, viciL -r [430.] U^'lV') (ve-ha-rim) et urbes ; T»3?, urbs, is a noun of fern. • T ! gender. By preeminence applied to Jerusalem. In the plural U^IV, IX.— 8, 9.] PRAXIS. 113 ia regimen "^n^. From "l^V, excitar.e, quasi excitata muris, &c. ••T etiamqiie incolis. rf^lS? probably means tliy adversaries; in the V T same sense it occurs, Ps. cxxxix. 20; 1 Sam. xxviii. 16. [431.] ntt7n2 (na-thash-ta) destruxisti ; the preterite of Kal, from T : - T C7nD, extirpavit^ proprie de arboribus dicitur, et metaph. de idolis et - T nationibus. [482.] -rnw (a-bhadh) periit. The preterite of Kal. Vid. No. 48. v.- T [433.] T\12>'n (hem-ma) ipsis. From the singular 'in, ille^ comes Tl" plural Dn, illi, and with n paragogic nXSH. The absolute pronoun after the suffixes is used for the sake of emphasis, " their very memory;" see Prov. xxiii. 15, ''DS M, also mine^ ho,. Sometimes it • T is the accusative ''3M D^ "^3312, Gen. xxvii. 34, blesfi also me; or • T - • •• : T prepositional niHM T[">bl? b^b, 2 Chr. xxxv. 21, not against thee. T - V T Verse 8. [434.] nrr?'» (ye-shebh) sedebit.^ The future of Kal, in which the first radical "^ is lost in (••), thus 3tt7M, sedebo ; ^WPl, DK?^, from nB?>, sedit. - T Verse 9. [435.] S^m (vehoo) et ipse. The pronoun masculine of the 3rd person S^in, ille. [436.] 'Ci'W'^ (yish-pot) judicabit ; 3rd person sing. fut. of Kal, which is l2btt7M, judicabo^ from t^DlZ?, judicavit^ condemnavit. : V - T [437.] b^n (te-bhel) orbem habitabilem. A noun radical, feminine gender, not so general in signification as ^"HM, but answering to the Greek oUcvum. It seems akin to b^n, confusio, (from bbs, con- V V - T fudit^ miscuit, quasi commixtio terrce). The modern derivation is from bn*», Hi^. b'^nin, whence the substantive b-1S, bJin**, proventus {terrce), bnn, the habitable world, here, by Metonymy, its inhabit- ants. 114 PRAXIS. [IX.— 10. [438.] D^"1ttJ^D2l (beme-sha-rim) in rectitudinibus. From nK?\ r T I" : - T rectus^ cequusfuity comes the plural noun heemantiv □'^ntt?'^):^, recti- • T tudineSy in which "» quiesces in (••). With 3, m, having an adverbial force. Verse 10. [439.] '^TT'I (vee-hee) et erit From n^n,/w2^ which in thQ future is iTTTN, ero, (wherein n quiesces in (-.•)). But more frequently it loses the third radical 71 by Apocope, the medial ^ quiescing, which is peculiar to this verb. But, that •♦ may quiesce, it requires (•) before it; and (:) as well simple as compound, is placed beneath the letters ^"^nw, as their natural point. Thus it becomes "^nw, ero ; ' v: ^n'', sit, erit; and >n^"1, et-erit, in which (:) under '» is taken away, because (•) precedes it. Accent, Mahpahh-zarkatum. [440.] D^ltCD (mis-gabh) exaltatio^ seu locus editus. A heemantiv noun masculine from ^b, exaltatus fuit. -T [441.] '%\T7 (lad-dach) ipsi pauperi ; TJT, pauper ^ misery a noun masculine without a plural, from "rjD"^, contudity contrivit. Before a - T pause Ty^b, pauperiy wherein b excludes n emphatic. T - IT n^P\vb (lehit-toth) ad-tempora. Vid. No. 30. [442.] nnS^S (bat-sa-ra) in ipsa ayigvMia. From "I'l!?, arctarCy It T - comes the participial noun ^!J, arctuSy angustus ; feminine n"i!J, T T T angustay and as a substantive angor animiy et cruciatus corjyoris. With the prefix 2, m!52, and when n emph. is excluded m-!^2, in : T T : T T - hoc angustiay Ps. x. 1. For greater emphasis (vid. Gram. p. 12, note a), it is sometimes found with the double feminine sign, thus nm2J2, in ipsa summa angustia. With an affix it changes H into TiT T - n, as, " In die '»nn!i, angustice mece.^^ In the plural nil!?. IX.— 11, 12, 13.] PRAXIS. 115 Verse 11. [443.] ^niDD'^1 (veyibh-techoo) et sperabunt ; 3rd person plural J : : * : preterite of Kal, from nt^21, Jidit. Future niO^M, &c. [444.] nnVi'Mb (lo-ha-zabh-ta) non dereliquisti. The preterite of T :-T I Kal, 2nd person sing, from ST3?, deseruit, dereliquit. From this verb -T and person comes the form in Ps. xxii. 2. •^DD^T^? n^b "^bN "«bN, •AT : — : JT T ' "\ J- •• which is in the Targ. ''DnpntT? snb "^nbs "^rrbw, thus in Mark, xv. • - : - ; T : • t v; • t v: 34. lAft>/, Ixm, Xuf^S, (roc/3xx,^xvt, in which (Ixui), from "^H vN, the n is • Tv: omitted, because the Greeks do not admit the aspirate in the middle of a word; and the (•) ^^ MDb is lengthened by means of the vowel T : A, [445.] r]>wn^ (do-reshe-cha) qucerentes te. The Ben. Kal t&n^, J V : I and with 1, tt7"li"T, from tJ?")*T, studiose-qucesivit. In the plural D''ti?~li"T, and in regimen ^ttT)^, and with the affix Tf , Ty^tt?")*!. Verse 12. [446.] snST (zam-meroo) cantate ; 2nd person plural imperative of Pihel, from n!2T, (see 122). Before a pause it resumes its regular form in PiheL, ?n^T, for the verb in Pihel is "ISit. [447.] J^ISn (hag-ghee-doo) annunciate. For Jll'^Sn, the 2nd person plural imperative of Hiphil, from the verb n>:in, annunciavit, which is found only in Hiphil. Derived from f:i3, coram, by re- jecting 3. [448.] Vnib'^vS? (gnalee-lo-thav) opera ejus. A noun feminine IT !• -: nb**b3?, opus, studium, and in a bad sense, fraus. In the plural T • -: nib"^b2;. Verse 13. [449.] nniS (o-tham) eorum. This form, which is given as the 116 PRAXIS. [IX. — 14. accusative plural of Dn, they (vid. Gram. p. 18), is really derived from the particle nw, the sign of the accusative case. With the light affixes it changes (-.) into i and becomes ""niM, me; TjniM te ; iniN, eum ; nniw, earn ipsam rem ; DniS, eos. But with the T T grave affixes it changes (••) into (•••), as DDnW, vos. [450.] "n^T (za-char) recordatus est. The preterite of Kal with a At t pause, for IDT, memorfuit. [451.] riDti? b^b (lo-sha-chahh) non oblitus-est. The preterite of Kal ; occurs again in Ps. x. 11. [452.] npV^ (tsa-hakath) clamoris. From p2?!J, damavit, comes the noun feminine np3?!^, clamor. In regimen H is changed into T T : T n , and (t) penult, into (:), which under the guttural becomes (-:), which points the preceding letter with its own (-). o [453.] U^'^^V affUctorum, pauperum. From nD37, afflixit, comes the l-T-: TT noun masculine 13^, humilis, and in the plural (t), being changed TT into (-:), 0*^13!!?, mansuetu This form is found in the marginal •T-: reading. From the same verb comes also the noun masculine ''33?, afflictiis ; plural D^^'Sr (which is here the reading of our text, the points (-T -:) belonging to the word in the margin), and in regimen ^'*yS. There is much connexion between the two words, as men are rendered hwly and meek by affliction. Verse 14. [454.] ''aDan (hhon-ne-nee) miserere met. Some copies read >D33n, but the former is the better reading, for the imperative of Kal would be ^isn, and on account of the affix, i is changed into (r) kametz chatooph. From pn, misertua est. Vid. No. 176. [455.] nwn (re-e) mde. The imperative of Kal from nW"), vidit, of the form of nba (vid. Gram. p. 88), which, with all verbs ending TT in n quiescent, forms the imperative in (••)» as nbi. In the feminine IX.— 15.] PRAXIS. 117 gender and in the plural number it casts away H, thus "^S1^, et vide (filia) ; .1«n-1, et videte. [456.'] "^^D^ (hon-yee) afflictionem meam; "^aV, afflictio, both mental and bodily, is a noun masculine without a plural, from nD27, afflixit With affixes (•) before "^ changes into (:), and (t:) loses its (:), thus •: T [457.] "^Ma'^XD (mis-so-neaee) ab odientibus me ; M3b, {so-ne) odio habens, osor, a participial noun in Kal, from WDb, odit. Plural D'^SD^, Vid. No. 236. [458.] '^D^in'D (mero-memee) exaltans me. From D^n, cdtum esse, which in Pihel causes the second radical to quiesce in i, and doubles the third, thus D^in, elevavit, whence the participle, with the affix, '^DXSin/S. Gesenius (Lehrgebiiude, p. 802) considers this "^SSDintt as an imperative (be) elevating me ; as, on the other hand, we sometimes find the participle preceding the finite verb assimilates the latter to itself, thus, Prov. xix. 26, Xm"^ instead of XV^riH ; Is. Ivii. 3, TOtm for n^i-tm, &c. r: • - T - : [459-] m^"''"l^t^D (mish-sha-hare'ma-veth) aw Kal, not Hiphil. [463.] ?in2?5)tt7"»2l (bee-shoo-ha-the-cha) in salute tua. Vid. No. 166, for n2?^li?\ solus, a noun feminine, and therefore in regimen changing n , into H , thus n3?!lC7^ ; with the affix Tfn3?^2?^, and in T - - : :* T : a pause Tjn^^tZ?'', and the (:) under *» being removed because of the I V T : preceding 2, Tyn5?-127'>3. From V^\ salvavii. • I V T • - T Verse 16. [464.] !)3?nta (ta-bhehoo) demerscB sunt, gentes. The preterite J :iT of Kal, from 37213, immersus, vel demersus est. - T [465.] ^WV (gna-soo) fecerunt. The preterite of Kal, in which n quiesces in (t), from 71WV, fecit. [466.] nana (bere-sheth) in rete ; HWn, rete ; a noun feminine radical without plural, from whence, by excluding the middle radical tt?. comes the Latin rete. nttJn, quasi ntt^T^, the root being tth*» in the sense of capio. [467.] -IT (zoo) quod. A poetical pronoun of time, place, and thing, of common gender and of both numbers. Hie, is, iste, and ^i, iUi, isti. As in Ps. x. 2, ^T, quas, &c. [468.1 -li^ta (ta-m&-noo) absconderunt. For !)attlD, (•) in this place returning into (t) because of the accent Rebhia. [469.] nisba (nil-kedha) capitis est. The 3rd person fern. pret. ;t : : • of Niphal, to agree with its nominative b3"i, pes. From TDb, cepit, apprehendit. IX.— 17, 18, 19.] PRAXIS. 119 Vehse 17- [470.] 3?"Ti3 (no-dhdng) notus est. The preterite of Niphal in which •» is changed into i, from J?T», novit. - T [471.] hvb'2, (bepho-hal) inopere. From bl^D, operatus est, comes the noun masculine v5?b, opzis. [472.] ti7piD (no-kesh) illaqueatus est It is either the Ben. Kal, from tt?p3, a verb of the same signification, and is then active, or -T the preterite of Niphal of tt^p**, illagueamt, > being changed into i, and the usual (-) into (••)• [473.] )Y3.'n (Hig-ga-yon). A noun masculine without a plural meditatiOi murmur, from n^H, removere, as if removed from within. T T The JJjj Itx-^oix^xroq of the LXX. anciently explained vocis inter canendum mutatio is supposed by Gesenius to mean the interruption of the instrumental music, and he accordingly takes 'fi'^lT\ here like nbo, as an indication to the pi^formers, rendering the former, T V (compare Ps. xcii. 4), playing of the harp (to begin), the latter, pause, (to singing). Verse 18. [474.] ^n^tt? (sheche-hhe) oblitoe. In regimen from D>nDti?, the plural masculine of n^tt?, (the (t) being changed into (:)). From Ty'2W, oblitus est. - T Verse 19. [475.] n2t^"» (yish-sha-chahh) oblivioni tradetur. The 3rd person singular future of Niphal, from nSti?, oblitus est. - T [476.] "ji"*iM (ebh-yon) egenus. A noun masculine heemantiv, from n^M, voluit, cupiit. T T [477.] T\S\)P\ (tik-vath) expectatio pauperum, LXX. « vxof^ovlt tcHv 120 PRAXIS. [IX.— 20, 21. 7rev>)T&>», soil, patientia ; mp^ is a noun feminine lieemantiv in re- t: • gimen nipn, from mp, in Pihel, expectavit. -: • TT [478.] U*^^TJ (gnaniy-yeem) pauperum, vel offlictorum ; "^a^, af- fiictus^ pauper^ which in the plural assumes dagesh euphonic, thus U^^yS, in regimen *»''3^. Vid. No. 453. The word b^b of the pre- ceding clause must be supplied here. Verse 20. [479.] ti^'bs (al yah-6z) ne prcevaleat^ vel roboretur. LXX. (An xpxTxiova-S-a. The 3rd person singular future of Kal, formed by syncopating the middle radical, and found in this person only; feminine T37n, ilia prcevalebit. From TT3?, prcevaluit, rohustusfuit. T ' -T [480.] •ItODt^'^ (yish-sha-phe-too) judicentur, 3rd person plural future of Niphal, from lDDtI7, judicavit. Verse 21. [481.] nn'^tt? (shee-tha) j»owe, vel mcwte. The imperative of Kal, the n paragogic being added. From r\^W or r\W, ponere. Accent, Mahpakh-zarkatum. [482.] rriia (mo-ra) timorem. A heemantiv noun Hlitt, timor, and by change of the letters M and n, miD. From K~i>, timuit^ the *< being changed into \ [483.] nnS (la-hem) super eis. Compounded of b, the sign of i-.- T the dative case (which before affixes takes (t) ), and the affix DH. It is used as the dative plural of M'ln, iUe. Vid. Gr. p. 18. Accent, Merka Mahpachatum. [484.] 51^T (ye-dheho6) ut sciant The 3rd person plural future of Kal, from 3?1^, novit The first person is VIS, novi^ the ^ being lost in (••). X.— 1, 2.] PRAXIS. 121 P S A L M U S X.I. Verse 1. [485.] lb37i^ (ta-liamod) stabis. 2nd person singular future of Kal, in which the guttural assuming the compound sheva (-:), punctuates the preceding letter with the simple vowel (-), (vid, Gr. p. 58), from ia27, steilt, - T [486.] pim2 (bera-hhok) in lon^inquo. A noun masculine p^FH, longhiquus^ and adverbially hnge^ as well of time as oi place ; here we are to understand keeping aloof from rendering assistance. From pVr^^ hnge^ procid abfuit. In plural (t) being changed into (:), it makes D^ipinn. [487.] D'^^S^/n (tah-leem) abscondes te, vel ocidos tuos, LXX. vTTipof^g, 2nd person singular future of Hiph. from uhv, abscondit [488.] nii^5?b (lehit-toth) in temporibns. LXX. If tvKctiptxig^ in opportimitaiibm. From HV, tempus. Vid. No. 30. Verse 2. [489.] niSIl2 (begha-avath) in superbia. From nS2, elatiis, elecatus j--:r: tt fuit, comes by changing n into \ the noun feminine niK5, elatio^ T-:- suj)erbia. In this place H is changed in n because of regimen. [490.] ^'i^? pbl** (yidh-lak gna-nee) insequetiu' qfflictum. LXX. A- T J- : • l^TTvfii^irxi Tcruy^oq. By thner, with the LXX., Luther, and Gesenius, consider "^33? as a nominative; the latter renders accordingly " angs- tigt sich der Leidende, i. e., angit se afflictus. Hare and our authorized version make it the accusative. The future of Kal from p7*T, exarsity and metaph. ardenti animo persecut7(s est. P 122 PRAXIS. [X.— 3, 4. [491.1 •IJ^Din*' (yit-ta-phesoo) capiantur. 3rd person plural future :iT • of Niphal, from bsn, prehendit. Accent, Shalsheleth. - T [*492.] nilSTDn (bhim-zim-moth) in cogiiationibus, sell, pravis. A noun feminine heemantiv HSTtt, cogitatio^ from DDT, cogitavit, T • : - T generally taken in a bad sense. Plural ni^TtS. [493.] •l^ttJn (liha-slia-bhoo) quas excogitaverunt. 3rd person IT T plural preterite of Kal, from ^BJn, excogitavit. Thus before a pause - T for !};32?n. [^T, quas^ see above. Ps. ix. 16]. : T Verse 3. [494.] bbn (hil-lel) laudavitse, seugloriatur. The LXX. rendered J •• • it, (TTxivitrxt ufiet^TuXogy laudatur peccator. The preterite of Pohel, insanum reddidit, from bbn, inmnivit. In Hiph. splendere, lucere ; - T and in Hithp. laudibm se efferre. [See 233.] [495.] niMn (ta-avath) super desiderio. A noun feminine heem. J — :i- msn, cupiditas, which in regimen changes H into n ; from n^lM, T-; - T - T • cupiit. [496.] ?[n2l "S'^b.^ (oo-bho-tseang be-rech) et avarua sibi benedicity seu blanditur. Hare. Alii, et avaro benedixit. 3?!^h, the Ben. Kal, from V^^Hy Qucestui deditus fait, item, Divisit. Mendelssohn and - T Gesenius render this 57^521, plunderer, robber ; the former translates, " and the robber blesses himself that he scoffs at the Godhead." [497.] TjISl (be-rech) benedixit, et rarius mdedixit, the preterite of Pihel, from 'JJ'nSl, genua flexit. See [168.] [498.] VM3 (uee-ets) exacerbavit. The preterite of Pihel, from \^M3, »premt, contempsit. Accent, Merca-zarkatum. -T Verse 4. [499.] rrnas (kegho-bhah) secundum fastum, scil. nasi, i. e., su- I X.— 5.] PRAXIS. 123 perbiae suae, nab, a noun masuline without a plural, from n^, alius, - T sublimisjuit. [500.] 'b^l (bal) nequaquam. A negative particle, not used in prose ; root nbs, implying annihilation, related to 7^3, [32]. T T - T [501.] Wll"^ (yid-rosh) inquiret. The future of Kal, from tt?'TT, studiose qucesivit. Vid. No. 445. Poole, in his Synopsis Criticorum, here quotes Grotius, saying, " Nomen Deus hie supplendum est." The ancient Hebrew commentator Yarchi makes the same supply in the nominative, and so does in our times Gesenius assert (Lehrgebaude, p. 850), that *l2iv2l "H^M of the 11th verse, which begins a similar • : - T strain, is to be supplied here; thus, " he says in his heart God does not inquire." Verse 5. [502.] ^"^XV (ya-hhee-loo) dolor e-afficientur^ scil. viae ejus. The • T future of Hiph. from b^n, dolere, scil. in partu. It is formed by casting off the middle radical \ and is read in the 3rd person only, viz., b^n*^, dolore afficiet, Ps. xxi% 8, and in the plural as above. * T The root b'^H, bin, whose more hardened form is b^PT [No. 364] includes the ideas of turning, winding, writhing (hence also par- turition, and trembling), swinging, hurling, waiting, remaining, to be strong, lasting, and prosperity. The last meanings have been countenanced in this passage by various authorities, thus the Geneva French version " son train prospere en tout tems," the same idea of prosperity is supported by Yarchi and Gesenius. Luther and Men- delssohn give the sense of continuance, lasting. So Poole's Synopsis, *■'' Sedi TCi2i\\i[n. permanent si\Q perdurant, nempe pravae consuetudines (ut Ps. i. 6) nunquam emendantur. ro bin, permanere significaU Jer. xxiii. 19, et xxx. 23; sic et b*'n"'. Job. xx. 21." Observe, • T the form under consideration may be Kal as well as Hiphil; it is the latter in Ps. xxix. 8, " causes to tremble." 124 PRAXIS. [X.— G, 7, 8. [503.] IT'D*' (ya-plieealih) sufflabit in illos. The future of Hiph. which is found in the Psalms in 3rd person singular only. Formed from n^S, flare^ sufflare^ by casting away 1. [504.] 0(121 (ba-hem) in illos. The preposition D, in, with aftixes V T takes (t). Verse 6. [505.] loi^S'bs (bal-em-mot) non movebor. The 1st person sing, future of Niphal, which always adopts i, from ta^ltt, dimotus fuit. [506.] Ill "1*77 (ledhor va-dhor) in generationem et generationem. A noun masculine "lil, generation duratio humance vitce. From nn, hahitare. In plural Clil and niliT Verse 7. [507.] HT'S (u-la) execratione. A noun feminine from Plbw, juravity (ya-harogh) occidet. The future of Kal, from 2nn, occidit. [514.] "^p^ (na-kee) innocentem. An adjective, from r\p^, to be <^ • T TT clean, pure. In regimen it shortens (t) into ( •• ) ; thus D'^GID "^pD, pur us manibus, i. e. insons. [515.] r\^Tr7 (lehhe-lecha) contra pauperem. LXX. g/? tov JT : •• \: TTivriTtA, in pauperem; "Tjbn, pauper, affiictus, is formed from the unused "Tjbn, and with the prefix b, and the paragogic Jl, n^bnb. I IT : •• : In verse 14, the accent being drawn back to the penult, in a pause, it is n^bn. In verse 10, H being changed into N, the plural D**S3bn TAV •• • T : •' is found; which, however, some understand as two words, thus D"^W3 bn, cxrtus pauperum, viz., bn for b^l, and D^'WS, a plural masculine from nS3, attrivit, by which reading the verb bD3, T T - T singular, will agree in number with bn. [516.] 51D'Q^'» (yits-p6-noo) delitescent. The 3rd person plural future of Kal, from ^D!^, abscondit. Kegularly 5132!^'^, but in a pause - T : : • the original choleni remains. Verse 9. [517.] ^^S^ (ye-erobh) insidiabitur. The future of Kal from isnw, insidiatus est. Observe (■••:) under the guttural, which punc- 126 PRAXIS. [X.— 10. tuates the preceding -with the vowel with which it is compounded. ["inoaS, in latibuloy scil. 2, in ; nnOD, latibulum heemantiv, from nriD, latuit See Nos. 512 and 526.] - T [518.] riSDS (besuc-c6) in tugurio suo. From 7JDD, texit^ comes the noun masculine "TjiD, tegumentum^ latibulum. On account of tlie affix it assumes dagesh, and changes i into (•••), making iSD, and n being substituted for \ nSD, tugurium ejus, and in Ps. Ixxvi. 3, with -1 in place of (n) iS-^lD in the Keri, but in the Kethibh (or text) i3D. [519.] ^illJnb (la-hhatoph) ad-rapiendum. The infinitive of Kal, from ?)lDn, cito rapuit, with b the sign of the ger«nd ; wherein - T also the guttural n takes the compound (-:) in place of (:), which punctuates the preceding letter with (-). [520.] J^iron^ (yahh-toph) rapiet The future of Kal from the last, for ?)it2n*», (-:) returning into ( :). [521.] iDC?D2l (bemosh-cho) in trahendo ejus, i. e., cum trakeret. From 2, in TjitZ^D, trahere, the infinitive of T[tt??D, traxit, and the : : - T suffix i, which causes the change of (••) into (t) chatoof, as in No. 124. Verse 10. [522.] nST' (yidh-ke) conteret se. So read in the Keri, but in the text nSll. The 3rd person singular future of Kal, from nS"T, contrivit, inf regit, but in the future signifying he shall break or boio down himself. We may either read nSTI for rT3T>, with *) instead of ^, or reading the letters irrespective of the points (since they are always intended for the word in the margin), T^'D1^ will signify et contritus f actus est, and he boweth himself [523.] XW^ (ya-shoahh) humiliabitur. The future of Kal with patach furtive, from nnttJ, curvatus est, succubuit^ the middle radical being syncopated. See Gram. p. 45. X.— 11, 12.] PRAXIS, 127 [524.] bD21 (ve-na-phal) et cadet. Preterite of Kal, from bD3, ^- T : - T cecidit, of which see more in No. 267. It is here read with *! con- versive of the preterite. r [525.] Vtt'1!^572l (ba-hatsoo-mav) in robustis ejus. As the strength of the body consists much in the bones ^ this may mean also, in his hones, i. e., into the power of his strength ; the word D!^57, signifying a bone or substance. Derived from D!^V, robustus YQlfortisfuit. The - T participle Pahiil of Kal is 0^)!^^, of which the plural is D''?2!l!J37, as the general rule is, that " (t) penult, is shortened into ( :) in every increment and also in regimen.^' The Geneva French translation is here very appropriate, " entre ses grifFes" (gripe, claws), the word D'^D'^!^3?, being, according to Gesenius, an epitheton poeticum, (like n^2S, ninb, &c.) used for " strong members," " teeth," " claws." T T : Verse 11. [526.] n^non (his-teer) occidtavit vultus ejus, which the LXX. render a^rgo-rpg-^'g, avertit, inasmuch is the angry are wont to turn away the face. The preterite of Hiph. from ^T^, abscondit, which in Hiph. implies through aversion. [527.] nMTbs (bal-ra-a) nequaquam vidit; nS"), vidit, feminine JT T - T T nnWH, and in the second and first persons of both numbers, H T-:iT being changed into "^ quiescent, it gives iT^WH, vidisti, and with n T • T paragogic, nH'^S'^, and by suppressing '^j nriMT ; 1 st person ^rT^MI ; T • T T • T • • T but in the plural n is lost before J), which gives ^ISI, viderunt. See T [333]. Verse 12. [528.] n3t27rTbM (al-tish-cahh) ne obliviscaris. The 2nd person singular future of Kal, which is n3tt/*M, obliviscar, (with dagesh lene after (.-)), from riDtt?, oblitus est, for which see No. 451. 128 PRAXIS. [X.— 14, 15. [529.] ^'^33?, pauperum sive afflictorum^ or (taking 1 for "^), as in the margin D'^'IDV (hana-veem) mansneiorum. See No. 453. •T-: Verse 14. [530.] tD*»S;n (tab-beet) respicies. The future of Hiph. 2nd person singular from ta'^SH, aspexit, respexit, from the root (not used) in Kal tD22, of which the D is changed in Hiph. into dagesh. - T [531.] nnb (la-theth) ad dandum vel rependendum. The inlin. V T of Kal with b the gerundial sign prefixed, from ^n3, dedit, of which - T both the letters 3 are lost in the infinitive iTTI, dare. Observe, be- fore a monosyllable, b takes (t). [532.] ^Vr** (ya-haz6bh) relinquet se. The 3rd person singular future of Kal, from ^T3^, deseruit, dereliquit. Observe, the compound - T eheva under the guttural points the preceding letter with (-). [533.] Din** (ya-thom) pvpillo. From the unused DfT^, of same f -T meaning, comes Diil"^, and in the plural (t) being changed into (:), T D^»in% pupiUL [534.] "Itis^ (ho-zer) adjutor. The Ben. Kal. which supplies the place of a noun ; and in the plural D'^'nTiy ; from It^?, adjuvit. • : -T Verse 15. [535.] ibU? (shebhor) contere vel frange. The imperative of Kal from I^W^JJ-e^it, res duras comminuit. - T [536.] 3?ilt (ze-roang) brachium. A noun of common gender, but oftener feminine. — Buxtorf. Plural niyi^T, brachia; Ps. xxxvii. 17; from 3?"1T, seminavit, as it seems to grow from the body, or by me- tathesis, from "Ity, auxiliatus est^ quasi auxilium corporis. The root - T 37nT (as well as mt, mT, Q^T, pnt, "nt) contains the ideas of spreading and extending, and thus gives expression to sowing seed and the arm. The Latin sero dropping the r in scri, sotnm, is X.— 16, ]?.] PRAXIS. 129 more akin to the English to sow, German saen. It is remarkable, however, that these and other languages by inserting the letter p or t in the sound of "IT, which the above six triliterals have in common, represent like them, in a great variety of words, some modification or other of the same ideas of spreading and extension ; thus the Greek (rjrg/p, o-Topgft», &c., Latin spargo, spiro, sterno, &c. ; in English we need only glance over those columns in the Dictionary beginning with sjor, str^ sprout, sprite, spread, sprig, spring, sprinkle, (pnt) &c. &c., strew, straw, streak, strut, street, &c. &c. The Ger- man (changing the vowels) has nearly all the same words and even more, as strahl, a beam, (n*nT, to shine), the same word in Italian and Eussian signifies a dart; for stream the German has strom, strudel, strut ; the latter having become obsolete, is found in its vigour still in Irish ; although, like the Hebrew, that language not admitting spr, sir, at the beginning of a word, it is simply Sruth, a stream, (compare Wit). [537.] S^^^rrbs (bal-tim-tsa) non invenies. The 2nd person singular future of Kal, from S!^D, invenit. T T Verse 16. [538.] i^M^ (me-ar-ts6) de terra ejus. From tt, de^ (which takes (••) before S), and ^nw, terra. In the plural the former (v) being changed into (-:), and the latter into (t), we obtain ni!^~lS, terroe. Verse 17. [539.] n^^tt? (sha-mang-ta) audivisti. The 2nd person singular T :j- T preterite of Kal, from ^^tt?, audivit. - T M [p^^-'l r^^ (ta-cheen) stabilies. The 2nd person singular future * of Hiph., of which the 1st person is ]'^^M; from ^O, which in Hiph. is ]>:3n. Q 130 PRAXIS. [XI.~1. [541.] n'^tt^pn (tak-sheebh) attendere-facies. The 2nd person singular future of Hiph., from ^tt?p, properly aurem advertit, - T [542.] tJ^TW (oz-ne-cha) aurem-tuam ; 1T*W, auris, a noun of the I V : T feminine gender. In the dual (or plural) D'>3TW, utraque auris, and with the affix, D being excluded tJ'*3TN, aures tuce. Hence "|-TN, a V : T verb in Pihel, attendiU Verse 18. [543.] lsbtt?7 (lish-pot) ad judicanduniy i. e., ut judicet. The in- finitive of Kal preceded by the gerundial b, which takes {') on ac- count of the following (;). Root t^^Vy, judicavit. - T [544.] P)'^Di"^"bs (bal-yo-seeph) ne addaty i. e., ne pergat. The 3rd person singular future of Hiph., from f^D**, addidit. In Hiph. Fl'^Dln, in which "* is changed into i. [545.] li^ (h5dh) amplius^ vkra. Indeclinable. [546.] V'*"'^^ (la-harots) ad conterendum. The infinitive of Kal, from V*^3?, contritus fuity or transitively, contrivit animo vel corpore. LXX. fAiyuXecvjciiTf, mognificare se. PSALMUS XI. N\ Verse 1. [547.] "Jf^H (ech) qmmodo! or with n paragogic HD'^N, an in- terrogative particle expressive of wonder. [548.] -"ntth^n (to-meroo) dicetia. 2nd person plural future of J : I Kal, which in the 1st person is nttk, for Ittb^M, the second M being XI.— 2.] PRAXIS. 131 suppressed in order that two should not come together ; 2nd person "Itt^ri; 3rd person "1ttt^*«; in Ps. xlii. 10, the 1st person is found with n paragogic, thus m^iW. [549.] 1113 (noodhoo), or in the Keri ^i^i (noo-dhee) fu^e. The imperative of Kal of l^l^, mi^rare, p-ofugere^ and with a dative, condolere. It expresses the removal of the body from place to place, and in this differs from 3?-*)D, which signifies an unsteady position, shaking, nodding, hovering, reeling; some passages excepted where it agrees with 1*12 and 113, for example, Jer. xiv. 10. Verse 2. [550.] ]S1311> (yidh-rechoon) intendent The 3rd person plural future of Kal with '] paragogic, from "Tjll, tetendit, Vid. No. 357. - T [551.] in'^'bs? (gnal'ye-ther) super nervum. LXX. lU (pecfirfxv. Simonis settles the noun masculine "nn^, thus, 1. chorda, nervus, funis, restis, a tensione vel extensione, plural I^ID^. (D*^"in*^tt • T : • T •• in'^'D occur in the same sense and more frequently) ; 2. excellentia, eminentia; 3. abundantia; 4. reliquum, residuum: to these may be added, 5. another name for \in\ the father-in-law of Moses. Of the root nn\ the same author says in Kal inusit, proprie tendit, - T intendit, extendit. The words in^^b^? of Ps. xxxi. 24, are rendered abundantly, mfuU measure. [552.] nil^ib (lee-roth) ad jaculandum. LXX. lov KctruToliva-xi, scil. 'invcx. The gerundial form of the infinitive of Kal, which is nh"l% but with b prefixed, the (:) is removed because of the pre- ceding (•). [553.] bD'StH^Sl (bemo-6-phel), iiSS for 3, in. The syUable itt, says Gesenius, is a paragogic syllable attached to the prepositions, 2, 3, b, merely to make independent words of them (there being in Hebrew no word of one letter). These words are exclusively 132 PRAXIS. [XL— 3, 4. poetical except i^DS, (with grave suffixes, and *1D3 with light suffixes), which will be found also in the ordinary style. A com- parison with the Arabic, where the same triliteral compounds are of common use, would point out the origin of '"V^ to be the word H^, T what (used relatively). [554.] bSM (6-phel) caligine. A noun radical, denoting denser darkness than T[t27n, tenebrce^ and here means in ipsa caligine. Verse 3. [555.] nint^n (hash-sha-thoth) fundamenta ipsa. The plural of nti?, fundamentum, with the article n prefixed. From r\W, T ponere. The LXX. seem to have read norn, quce posuisti, as they have rendered it on u is changed into ^ , and (t) into (••), the former (:) also in (•), from whence '^riDtl?. In the plural feminine ilinDtJ?. [577.] msi^ ptt?b (la-shon medhab-bereth) linguam eloquentem. The participle feminine in Pihel, from "nm, locutus est, Vid. No. 76. - T [578.] nib*72l (gedho-loth) magna, superba. The feminine plural of the adjective bilS, magnus, feminine nbh"T2, plural masculine T T : D'^biin, feminine nib*TH. From b*T2, crevit, magnitsfuit. See [257.] Veese 5. [579.] n^2l!l3 (nagh-beer) prcevalebimus. The 1st* person plural future of Hiph. from "HiSl, prcevaluit, scilicet, rohore, virtutibus, &c. ; in Hiphel "l"^2ian, potentem reddidit. [580.] !13nW (it-ta-noo) nobiscum. From HN the preposition, AT • which with affixes changes (••) into (•), as TIS, mecum ; Sj^nS, no- T • biscum, &c. [581.] -IDb (la-noo) nobis. From b the sign of the dative, and -"D the affix. See Gram. pp. 18 and 21. Verse 6. [582.] I't^lD (mish-sh5dh) a va^tatione, i. e. propter vastitatem ; TtC*, vastatiOf is a noun masculine without a plural, from TTtt?, vas- - T tavit. [583.] np2WQ (may-en-kdth) a gemitu, L e., propter gemitum ; v: VI" np3N, gemitus, is a noun feminine, and therefore in regimen changes TT-: n into n , (t) being also changed into (••), and (-:) losing its (••), it T should be Hp^^, but in certain cases (specified in Gesenius' H. G. translated by Conant, § 27) (:-) is changed into (:•••), and it becomes np2tl> with the prefix tt. LXX. mKx rUf T«A«2K 81 ">D3S 81 p« 392 n3« 78, 116 P3S 302, 583 K73« . . . . 2, 143, 179, 395 -)D« 65 bD« 554 DD« 98 n-i« 510, 517 n-is 317 ms 415 n« • • . . 57, 98, 332, 538 t27« 98 Dtt7M 265 ntt7« 1, 3 n« . . . 64, 449, 571, 580 n«, nns 91, 433 ens . \' 91 nhi^ 136, 568 T T n -nn 213 bnn 80 nnn 409 «11 140 Dlt 13 121 Win 246 ]iaor^>n 219 nin 368 tcin 309 nin 247 inn 559 niDn 199, 214, 443 l^n, see 1>n. n>n, see ni2. in 272 nnn 309 bbn 437 nbn ... 32, 500, 505, 537 iian 553 nan 90, 114,556 ivn 140 n37n 117 2?^n 496, 509 "^pn 224 typn 183 bnn 101 n-in 124 Tin 168, 497 -inn 114 n nw:i 489 nn:i ...... 333, 499 7n2 579 b-ru 257,578 >i:i 52 bl^orVa Ill -ii:j . • 231 b^:j, see bu d:i 408 btt2 325 n?3a 345 P2 193 n3?:j 2 nya 423 nD3 563 nna, -)-ia 262 n\n2 377 1 "»m 76, 240, 577 mT(3n) 412 pi 208 IM 123 DM 409 nil n^i .506 pi, or pi 342 nni 522 im ^,441 pbl ..... . >;^l,490 ni J^ 241 DDl 196, 409 VT21 305 -pi 255, 357, 550 tt^ll 445, 501 n ^n 220 n:in 19, 220, 473 iin 400 «in 435, 483 iin 381 nin, n>n 16, 259 bn^n 249 nbn 5, 56, 596 bbn 233, 494 on, nun . . . 433, 483, 504 |n, nan 363 nnn nnn Din iin . 513 . 365 . 556 84, 147 n«T 321 nnT 197, 198 nnr 589 •IT 467 bit ....'.... 598 inT 298 bbT 598 ^Vbt 564 □K3T 492 IDT 122, 375 D37T 353 n5?T 564 PPT 592 niT 536 niT ib. niT ib. vnr 141 >n^ 57-)T 536 p-lT ib. nnt ib. n bnn 364 ntn 557 WtDn 9, 44, 192 r\t:^n 519, 520 n^n 333, 409 Vnorbin 502 -fbn 515 bbn 216 Vbn 296, 327 pbn 264, 574 DDn 373 pn 176, 309 ion 187, 245 non 120, 313 non 399 von 17, 229 -isn 370 V^n 360 n^n 511 ppn 88 mn 354, 428 nnn 79 nirn 493 ID 3?ntD 464 nniD 588 nilD 201 piD 468 pp^ 316 > bn> 437 Vn> 301 nT 300, 403 ^T 47, 470, 484 nv 20, 92, 312 in> 60,211 DH'' 286 n:3> 285 ib"^ 93 D> 413 "^i>»> ........ 312 P3^ 383 TD^ 59, 384 P1D"> 544 -iD> 65, 107, 287 1V> 45 yv^ 6, 268 nr> 55 ns'' 103 tt?p> 472 «n> 153, 482 l-l^ 374 n-T' 15, 552 m'' 392 Wn'^ 209, 466 W> 322 nB?> . . . . 13, 69, 215, 434 )W> 150, 212 VW> 135, 159, 166, 351, 463, 586 nW . . . . 254, 352, 438 nn'^ 533 nrv 551 D -TS3 141 n^lD 393 PD 36, 4 1, 257, 347, 358, 394, 540 DID 565 tt713 311 ntS 184, 240 nbs . . . .102, 349, 359 bbD 33, 119 nbD 181 1520 553 «D3 422 ^DD 589 DVD 308 f\^D 324 n-iD . 369 mD 575 bt273 420 b wb 4 DSb 53 rinb 194 lb 136 r'^'l 12 >nb 162 tr7tO«7 142 ?^ wr^\ 355 >b 175 nb>b 21 ib 226, 300 •3yb 469 74 581 73 309 381 ■TW3 nn tD*ia mo V"1D, see ni^JD. nnn 425 ntaia 360 *•» .50 ... 27 ... 508 ... 56 ... 67 .... ib. ... ib. ... ib. .... ib. . ... 565 ... 307 .... 118 .... 537 .... 38 .... 272 .... 62 .... 521 .... 402 .... 294 293 49 i 505 297 D'^n . . . sb^ . . . ib^ . . •pn . . n3i:2iQ . . 12!:d . . P ... n^a . . . HDD . . . lD37a . . . W!$D . . . nira or vi^ nn» or -na ntra . . rr^» . . bora . . •♦no 346 498 32, 500 530 234, 447 P3 170, 337 H3 b^D 133 113 ni3 549 270 39 113 549 D13 124 3?13 549 nn3 250 bn3 96, 216 ni33 304 n33 160 nD3 202 1D3 82 bD3 267, 370, 524 VQ3 104 tt?23 133 n'2^ 169, 429 b!i3 315, 319 n!^3 595 np3 514 np3 387 Wp2 472 N273 * . 202, 336 3D3 330 ptr3 113 ]n3 . . . . 29, 95, 205, 380 pn3 63 Wn^ 431 D nno 156, 340 no 309 IDD 276, 518 nbo 138 ^120 152 IDD 86 nno .... 512, 517, 526 V mv 109 nnv 337, 414 nnv 68 ni3? . . 30, 105, 180, 426 l^v 545 bir 323 V\^V 409, 558 n^V 338, 430 nT3? ..... . 444, 532 ny 385, 479 1T37 534 -itar 283, 401 )>V 235 n'TV 143 nw nbV .... 25, 31, 61, 131 bbv 382, 448, 591 ubv 274, 487 ybv 277 li:iV 10, 485 b»37 366 a2V 155, 167 Tl^V . . . 146, 252, 453, 456 nD37 334 yV 23 n!J3? 291, 525 T^V .225 V^37 .546 Wn^ 306 nWV .... 34, 320, 390 WWV 308 pns 309 na TO nba bbs DOS bra Tpo n-io p-jQ 3?tt7a nns -inp lip mp rnp bip nip VP tt7ip 411 590 .... 260 .... 372 .... 85 .... 477 .... 144 42, 130, 158, 584 151 .... 356 ... 256 ... 503 ... 561 ... 417 ... 26 ... 186 . 178, 223 115, 125, 204 ... 567 237, 362, 471 ... 398 ... 28 ... 318 ... 269 ... 261 «np 145, 171, 189 nnp 258 nwp 221, 541 nwp see W^p ?«S 407 rns 391 pi:^ .... 46, 173, 251 7in'2 or n^2 83 iTl^J 339 -17!^ or n"l2 . .128, 309, 442 nb2 35 nai^or^S!^ . . . : . 407 P^ 281 PV:^ 452 nas 227 ia!J 516 nsn . 455, 527 tt;s'-i ... 143 nn-i 127, 129, 244 T:>n . . ... 190 ban . . ... 406 371-1 . . ... 309 wyi ... 51 nil . . 314, 329 mn . ... 40 Din . 142 5, 341, 458, 598 m or vvn . . . 99, 232 pl-1 or pn . . . 54, 328 71in . . . . . . . 58 ]n . . . . . ib. pm. . ... 486 p^l, see pv ). nm . ... 242 DD-) ... 331 WT^n . ... 409 pn . . ... 275 ivn . . . . 112 nvn . ... 572 «a-i . . ... 289 vwn . . 7, 37, 230 nW) see t^n*^ b , s:Jtt? 309 Inltt? 440 n^w . , . . . ... 309 m^ 144 u?H}n niW or >-rt£? 410 nw .380 nnw 303 pnw 71 bDtt? 106 m2W 206, 273 «3tt7 236, 457 n^w 573, 576 w bwtt? 94, 299 TDntr? 100 vnw 593 inw 535 nnw 386 nUtt? 309 IIW .582 ^^w 570 ma? . . . 295, 309, 371, 418 nw 371 V^U) 222 nitt? 309 met? or n>W 157, 404, 481, 555, 585 nntt? 248 nnw 523 SDK? .... 149, 195, 212 n^tt?. . . 451,474,475,528 ptt? 335 nbw 138 "iba? 66 nbtD 210, .326 nw 279 n^aa? 70 n>J2W 70, 389 pa? 284 V72U; 177, 188,539 IT^W 594 ptt? 163 bsw 299 12727 459 IDDtt? 43, 108, 343, 436, 480, 543 nptt? 367 ynw 409 nntt? 253 bnw . 24 n bnn, see bn\ nnn 405 -yiDnoriin 509 DDn 344, 427 :ivn 243 w^n ....... 491 A GRAMMAR OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE, &c. &c. GRAMMAR HEBREW LANGUAGE, COMPILED FROM THE BEST AUTHORITIES, DESIGNED AS AN INTRODUCTION TO THAT SACRED TONGUE. REV. WILLIAM BAILLIE, LL.D., MASTEK OF KILKENNY COLLEGE. DUBLIN: MACHEN AND CO., D'OLIER-STREET. MDCCCXL. DUBLIN : PRINTED BV R. GRAISBERRV. CONTENTS. ■♦■ Chapter I. PAGE The Letters, with their numeral Value ; Vowel Points ; Map- pik ; Dagesh ; Maccaph ; Pauses ; Enumeration of Accents, 1 Chapter II. Of reading Hebrew; Peculiarities of Sheva, Kametz, and Dagesh, 9 Chapter III. Of Roots, and their Derivatives ; Prefixes and Suffixes ; Para- gogic Letters, 10 Chapter IV. Genders of Nouns and Adjectives ; Comparison ; Signs of Cases; Regimen, 12 Chapter V. Pronouns, separate and conjunct ; Tables of Pronominal Suffixes, 17 Chapter VI. Verbs, and their Conjugations ; Table of Moods and Tenses ; Modes of prefixing and suffixing Pronominal Particles to Verbs ; Complete Conjugations of the Voices, 25 Chapter VII. Quiescent, Defective, and doubly Defective Verbs, 40 VI CONTENTS. Chapter VIII. . PAGE Affixes to Verbs, with Tables of Affixes to the Praeter, Future, Infinitive, and Participle, .' • • ^^ Chapter IX. Of the Prefixes constituting the technical Words Mosche ve- caleb ; Rules and Opinions on Vau Conversive, 50 Chapter X. Changes of Vowel Points, and Causes of Change, 56 Chapter XL Irregularities of Syntax, •. . . . 60 Chapter XII. Mode of Discovering the Root ; Buxtorf s Rule, 62 Table I. — Forms of Hebrew Nouns, 67 II. — Cases of Nouns Masculine, 68 III. — Cases of Nouns Feminine, 70 IV. — Pronominal Cases with Prepositions prefixed ... 72 V. — Pronouns, Demonstrative, Interrogative, and Re- lative, 73 VI. — Examples of governing Particles, 74 VII Of the Hebrew Numbers, 75 „VIII. — Hebrew Numerals — (continued,) 76 IX. to XVI. — Paradigms of Verbs Substantive, Regular, Quiescent and Defective, 77 to 91 „ XVII Examples of Verbs with Affixes, 92 Appendix on the Accents ; Keri and Kethibh, 95 ERRATUM. Page 31, line 3, for •{ readi^. PREFACE In presenting the following elementary work to the Hebrew student, the compiler puts forward no claims to originality of thought or discovery, in a path that has already been trodden by so many learned Hebraists, both Jewish and Christian. It will suffice for his ob- ject if he has been able successfully to glean from the valuable labours of each such information as the youth- ful scholar may implicitly rely on, and to have presented it in so tangible a form that it may be readily appre- hended by the most inexperienced mind. To smooth the path towards the acquisition of that language in which the far greater portion of the sacred oracles was originally written, and to reduce it within such a com- pass as would render it compatible with the time and means of all, has been the Editor's earnest desire, as he conceives that he would thereby remove two serious obstacles to the acquisition of a knowledge of the sacred tongue. Vlll PREFACE. The authorities consulted in this compilation have been Buxtorf, Bythner, Parkhurst, Robertson, Stuart,* Jones, and others, especially Ashworth,** whose clear grammatical arrangement has been followed throughout, and whose useful Paradigms have been corrected and given at length ; arid as the Grammar will be followed immediately by the publication of the first twelve Psalms with Latin version and grammatical praxis, compiled from Bythner and equally high authorities, it is hoped that an elementary work will thus be 'presented to the public, which will be found to possess much prac- tical utility. Should this humble eflfort be attended with any portion of success in the attainment of the above men- tioned desirable objects, the Editor will feel amply rewarded for the time and labour that the work has re- quired; rejoicing that he has been in any measure the means of promoting an acquaintance with that language in which the "lively oracles of God'* were originally written, and in which the coming of a Redeemer was so minutely foretold. "* His clear view of the Hebrew accents will be found in an Ap- pendix. *» See Mr. Yeates' improved edition, to which the Editor is in- debted for some useful notes. HEBREW GRAMMAR. CHAPTER I. OF THE LETTERS AND POINTS. 1. The names, form, sound, and numeral value of Hebrew letters, are, Aleph* . N a . Beth . . n bh, or 2 b . Gimel . 2 gh, or 2 g . i^Daleth . 1 dh, or "^ d . He ... n h . Vau . . 1 V . Zain . . t ..... z . Cheth . n . . . . ch ;i^ Teth ta t Yod . . > y Caph . . D k, or 3 c 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 Lamed Mem . Nun . . ( Samech Hain" . ' Phe . . • Tzade . Koph . ) Resh . Shin . Thau . . D . 2 . D . V . a p n . m . n . s . h .phor . tz. . k. . r. .sh. 30 40 50 60 70 9, p80 90 100 200 300 thorn,t400 ^ See Psalm cxix., in which not only each division^ but ever^ verse in each division, begins with the letters of the alphabet in the order here given ; the letter of each verse commencing with the letter of its own division, viz., all of the first with W, those of the second with 2, &c. *» The sound of V is various ; some sound it in the beginning of HEBREW GRAMMAR, DILATED LETTERS. Long Alepha M , He n Lamed ^ Mem O - Thau n Beth zn Resh *-] FINAL LETTERS, ( CaWlW^jo/ifl/^.) Final Caphb . . . -f . . . 500 Mem . . . D . . . 600 Nun .... 7 . . . 700 Phe .... f) ... 800 Tzade . . . V • • • 900 ^ «... 1000 n . . . 2000 The other numbers are expressed by a combination a word like ng, as Vctiny gnain, as in gnomon ; h in the middle, as in iinV21, hehitto ; and ng at the end, as rua'^, ruang. But the translators of the English Bible never give it this harsh sound, as may be seen in the proper names n^V EbeVy b5?D Baaly n3?"l5 Pharoahf and many others. The letter Shin written with a point on the left W is called Sin, and pronounced s, as in nob saphah, being very similar in sound to T T D, though not quite so sibilant, as in Judg. xii. 6, " say now nblatt? Shibboleth, (a stream ;) and he said, nbinD Sibboleth." a These long letters are used towards the end of Hues merely to complete the space, and are found only at the end of words. 3 and 1 rarely occur. ^ This form of Caph, Mem, &c., is called^na^, because they only assume it at the end of words. « If in the ancient Hebrew copies of the Bible numeral letters were used, as it is said they were, the likeness of several letters may account for some mistakes where numbers are concerned, and the careless making or reading a tittle upon a letter might change units into thousands. HEBREW GRAMMAR. 3 of these letters ; those of highest value being placed on the right hand : thus, f^'' stands for 11 ; li** for 12 ; ex- cept in the number 15, in which the Hebrews use to? 9, and 1, 6, to avoid the use of n"* ; the same letters signi- fying the sacred name of God (Jah). Therefore NJO^l^ stands for 1841. The distinction between several letters, which re- semble each other, should be carefully remarked, v. g. With respect to the organs of pronunciation, the letters have been divided into^?;^ classes, which require to be particularly observed, as the letters of the same organ are frequently interchanged for each other, ex- cept n and y. I. Guttural, or those formed by the throat, j^nHJ^ technically ahachang. II. Lingual, by the tongue, pi^^t^^ datlanath, III. Palatine, by the palate, p^D^Ji gicak. IV. Dental, by the teeth, Xiyy^t)\ zastzerash. V. Labial, by the lips, p]^*)! 52^/wapA. ^, j-j, *], and \ (ehevi) are called quiescents, because they often are not sounded, ^. e. when they have no vowel under them. •» indeed sometimes forms a diph- thong with the preceding vowel, as s^j'^-^ti Adonai, the Lord ; O^i^? adonaiy my lords, and "^ at the end of a 4 HEBREW GRAMMAR. word is sounded like v, as V5 P^^i his mouth. Some- times also they form a diphthong together, as in '•i^i goi, a nation ; '♦i^il galui, revealed. T With respect to the consideration of the roots of words and their derivatives, the letters of the alphabet have been divided into eleven radicals and as many serviles. The radical letters are those which are never found except in the roots of words. The serviles are those which serve to the inflexion of words, or their formation from roots. They are also frequently used 'as radicals. The radicals are ^"^ tntO DVDI^P'Ij ^^^ ^^^ ^"' eluded in the words of the Jewish prayer i?t^ tO'^Q ^V] p^K chas peret ghezang tsedek, ** spare the twig of the righteous stem." The serviles are js^ij ni ''^^JOD M^D^ and are in- cluded in the three proper names ^'^^l nii^JQ ]D*^ti Ethan MosJieh ve- Caleb, Thus in p^'^ to be just, the - T letters are all radical, but in the derivative ^p"^^ justice, T T : the final n is servile, whereas in n'^V to ascend, the T T final n is used as a radical. — (Vide Chap. XII.) 2. The points and marks, about or within the letters, are, vowels, mappik, dagesh, maccaph, or accents. 3. There are fourteen vowels, five long, five short, and four very short. Their sound is here expressed by the correspondent vowels in some English words. HEBREW GRAMMAR. Kametz* . . S . . a . . master, T Tzere . . . M . . e . . there. Long chirek "'M . . i . . profile, Cholem ... 1 . . o . . mole, Shurek ... J) . .00. . rule. Patach M . . a . . man, Segol S . . e . . men. Short chirek . . N . . i . . win, Kametz-chateph^'M . . o . . not. T Kibbutz . . . . W . . u . . run. Chirek followed by "» is long (\) but without it generally short, (.). 4. Sheva (j^) is an exceeding short e, as in belongs and is sometimes quiescent. — (Vide Chap. II. Sect. 2.^ Sheva is understood as standing under all consonants (except ehevi) which have no other vowel.'' Three vowels joined with sheva make three new vowels, called compound shevas or semi- vowels. Chateph-patach . . S . . . a . . . very short ... as mutable, Chateph-segol . . . S . . . e . . . very short ... as believe. Chateph-kametz . . M . . . o . . . very short ... as apposite. t: * The N is here only used, as any other letter might have been, to shew the situation of the vowels in respect to the consonants ; but the shurek always has % and the cholem most commonly. A tittle over any other letter, and the point which distinguishes C? from ID may be cholem. The point of B? is cholem when the preceding consonant has no vowel, and of b when the b itself has none, ntt^t) Mdshehf Sitt? sane. • •• ^ Kametz and kametz-chateph are distinguished in Chap. II. s. 3. *^ As a letter which has dagesh forte is doubled, (vide infra, Sect. 7,) or is the same as if there were two such letters, sheva is understood under the former, as -lan ronnu, for J)33n ronenu. I O HEBREW GRAMMAR. 5. A patacli is put under a final n? PIj and y, after a kibbutz, or any of the four last long vowels, but is pronounced before them, as ni*1 ruach^ the wind; ^j*?{s? Eloahi God ; y^V yodeang^ knowing : this is C2\\edi patach furtivum^ or stealing in, and it is lost when the word increases at the end, as by declining, &c., as, sing, rt^i)^, plur. Crt^fs? ; sing, nl'^, plur. nin^T ruchoth, not nipfll ruacoth. 6. Mappik, from pg^ ^o ftrmg- out, is a tittle in a final ,^, and requires it to be pronounced harder than a common n» as n^^i>^ eloah. 7. A tittle in any other letter than n is called dagesh, from J2^;i^ 2^ pointed, . Of this there are two sorts, forte and lene. i^a^e^/iybr/^doubles the letter in which it is put, as in "^pBpakkeed, to visit frequently: dagesh lene is a tittle in any of the letters rig^ ^j^ technically hhegJiadh kephath ; it removes the aspirate sound, and requires them to be pronounced somewhat harder than they would naturally be, but not so hard as the forte ; little notice, however, is taken of dagesh lene in reading, unless it be found in ^, % g, or j^, which are then pronounced G, D, P, and T. N. B. — The gutturals and *i do not admit dagesh. 8. A small stroke like a hyphen (-) joining two words, is called maccaphy as D*:'"'?!} col-lahe, every heart. T It accelerates the reading, and sometimes changes a HEBREW GRAMMAR. 7 long vowel into a shorty as »?b into -«?:d cO/e into co/, T (not cdl before Maccaph ;) p a 50/z, into "n sounded hdne and ^^/z. 9. All the other characters are accents : six of these are also pauses. Rebbia, a superincumbent point, thus, (i, ft^om ^ri'^ - T ijicumhere, is equivalent to our comma (,). Athnac, a respiration, from ni^ quiescere^ thus, (vj, equal to a colon (:). Zakeph-katon, erector parvus, from p^,*?* erexit, and jtOp parvus, marked thus, js?, equals a semicolon (;) instead of which Segolta (inverted Segol) i^, and sometimes Tiphca j^ is used in long verses. Sylluk, a remission of the voice, from n^D remisit, - T equals a period, and Is written thus, jv^. It is always placed before Soph-pasuk. SoPH-PAsuK, (;) the end of the passage, r|'iQ the end, nD3 0/ the passage. This, with Athnac and Sylluk, is always a pause ; but Rebbia, Zakeph-katon, Segolta, and Tiphca are frequently only musical characters. (;) is placed at the end of every verse in the Hebrew Bible. The Tonic accent denotes that the syllable is to be elevated, and is placed either on the last or penult syllable. If placed on the last syllable it is termed acute, and by the Hebrews Milrang yi^a, "beneath'* or "below" the penult. But if placed on the penult, HEBREW GRAMMAR. it is then termed penacute, and is called Milheel ^^.^^j:^ "above." Thus ^{v^*nJ^'» Israelis acute, and *^^»»i:i{^ Abimelek is penacute. The other accents, which are about twenty, served to direct the modulation of the voice in chanting or singing. Their powers may be collected in some mea- sure from their names, but are now but little known. They are as follow, viz. Metheg, a bridle^ S Zakeph gadhol, the great ele- i: vator • . M Tebhir, or broken sound . . . M Geresh, expulsion of voice . . N Gereshayim, two expellers . . S Telishagedholah,^rea, and there is no dagesh in the intermediate letter, the chirek is short, and the sheva quiescent. N. B Dagesh is sometimes omitted in •» or tt with sheva ; the analogy of the word will shew when there ought to have been a dagesh, and in this case the sheva is pronounced, though it follow a short vowel, because of the dagesh understood. C •.. 10 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 3. Kametz without an accent before a simple sheva, or with an accent before a compound sheva, or before Dagesh forte, Maccaph, Compound kametz (t : ) or fol- lowing Vau conversive, is kametz-chateph, or very short (o) : as ^ja^n holmad, ^ot^j? kosomi^ ^i^^ ronnu, - : T • t: It t D'lJ^"*?^ col-adam, \^t\^ oholo, Df5.^i xiayydhom^ for T T T t:|T TlT- D^p3i1 vayyakom. T - Dagesh is lene in 2, ^^ % ^3, 3, and n» (nSS 1^!3 begad kephath) in the beginning of a word, or after a sheva : in all other cases it is forte. A practice in reading ; Psalm cxvii. ^'»p ^3 ;D^GNn-'?3 inin:^^'' D'^ir'js n^n^TiN '\b'?r\ !• s IT T : - A* T T :^ V J : - CHAPTER III. A BRIEF ACCOUNT OF HEBREW WORDS. 1. A Root commonly consists of three letters, and is most frequently the third person singular of the preterite active of a verb, as ^y^ he spake.*" - T * Some verbs have not this tense ; some roots have four letters,, some only two ; sometimes a noun or an indeclinable part of speech HEBREW GRAMMAR. 11 2. All the several persons, tenses, &c., of verbs, are formed by changing the vowels, or by adding certain letters to the beginning or end of the root. 3. Nouns are likewise formed from these roots : sometimes by only changing the vowels, as "^yr^ dabar, T T a word, from '^^^ he spake; or dropping a radical - T letter, as ^j^ mar, bitter, from '^^jo «^ ^cis bitter ; and - T sometimes by also adding a letter or letters to the beginning or end, as *i!}*i» midbar, a wilderness, from ^ll'ri he spake. - T The letters chiefly used for this purpose are n, (s?, 'Ci D> Dy \ ("'WJOJ^^n heemanti) and the nouns thus formed ^r^ called heemantic nouns.* 4. Other letters are occasionally prefixed to words, which have the signification of conjunctions and prepo- sitions. These, from their situation, are C2\hdL prefixes, is the root, and is to be sought in the lexicon ; but this chapter is only designed to give a general notion of the language, without de- scending to particular rules, exceptions, &c. * M, n, and n, are commonly prefixed, as mi/H a law, to like- wise is generally prefixed ; when it is joined at the end, it commonly makes an adverb, as OV « day^ dtoS> dailyf hy day. 3 is generally T placed at the end, as ^S'lp corhan ; > at the beginning, middle, or end ; T : T the last is frequent in forming numeral, national, or other adjectives ; as ^Dtt? second, ^y^y^ a Canaanitc, >W^nfree, 12 HEBREW GRAMMAR. and are », u;, n, 1, ^3, ^, n, (nj?^"] ni?/tt, Mosheh ve- Caleb.) Vide Chap. IX. 5. Other letters occasional^/ added to the end of words, are called affix es^ and stand for pronouns. (Vide Chap. V. Sect. 2.) 6. (s?, n, % N Dj and n, (ni^^'iriis? ehevimth) are called paragogic letters, as they are often annexed to words only to improve the sound or add emphasis, n indeed at the end of the name of a place signifies motion towards it, as n^'^n towards Hainan, CHAPTER IV. OF NOUNS. 1. Nouns are either masculine, feminine, or com- mon. The names of things which are evidently femi- nine, of places, cities, countries, &c., of things of which there are but two, (as eyes, ears, &c.) together with those which end in n or rij** are generally feminine.^ Most others are masculine, * Sometimes the feminine hath both n and n, which is thought to make the word more emphatical. There is no TMliV^tl^'^ help nt all. Psalm iii. 2. '' What is expressed in other languages hy the neuter is in HEBREW GRAMMAR. 13 2. Nouns have three numbers. Masculines form the dual^ by adding d> aim^ and the plural^ by adding D"*" m, as 'q\^ a day ; dual, D^'jOV two days ; plural^ q>)0'» days. Hebrew expressed by the feminine; thus " evil," malumjis expressed by n2?1 as well as a wicked woman, ry\y\ry bona, may signify " goods," as well as "good," when joined with any substantive. * The dual number is seldom used except where things are spoken of, double by nature or by use ; and it is used of these in place of the plural with the even numbers above " two," thus " four feet," " six wings," are expressed " two, three pair," Q^^Q^S XDXD XnniD :ibQ a river . . . n^T an olive . . . D>nn "ISD a book . . . . DnSD iT'ttJon Hberty . . . n'vaJon 2?^"^ a tear . . . . ,r\ysi:r\ ri-IDbD a kingdom . nv:DbD V^'lp a handful . . . D'^^Dp nttbtt? a garment . ri'iDbb bs^b a work . . * T ; nS"in reproach . na a kid . . . •: • T : nn^tt? joy . . . . T : • . rm±3 T : Some derivatives drop a letter of the radical word. When such defectives increase at the end (as by dcchning, &c.) a dagesh is put 14 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Feminines form the dual likewise, by adding ^> , but those which end in n> change it into n? as T\^Xl) shqnah, a year, D'»n5ii^ shenathaim^ two years. Feminines form their plural by adding ji"i, as ^{s^:i a well, plur. n^'^jsj^ ; while those which end in n, or n, omit these letters in the plural, as T^^ST) cl law, niliJT) ; others add nS as VID'I demah, a tear, JiivJd - V T : demahoth, tears.* Some nouns which have a masculine or feminine termination in one number, have the contrary, or both, in another, as ^{>^ ab, a father, pi. ri^!3l^ dboth ; n^js^n T T T '• : ^fig^ pi- D^'^li^i^ ; J^ni^ an army, pi. r\St^'2'£ and D''^^:l!5 •••: TT t: 't: hosts, armies. 3. A noun expressing quality, with the particle rp in the latter radical letter, and the preceding vowel, if a long one, is changed into the correspondent short. D27 a people, from Dttr pi. D^)!35? 1 [(.) is the common substi- \ , Sb the heart, from nib pi. D^ab I ^"^^ ^^' (") ^"^ W' ^'^ ' ' ^ ' ' I kametz-chateph for (-I) Din perfect, from Dttn pi. t3'^)2n ,.^, t ^ - T *^ . V J or (1).] Sometimes (-) is in this case changed into (.), though both are short vowels, as 2Dtt a circuit, from IJSD pi. D^aD)D. N.B — The change of (S) into (t) is an irregularity peculiar to the word DV. ■ Adjectives are formed as nouns, in genders and numbers j thus, '2^^^ goody fern. nnilS, plur. D'^n^rs and n'")3'"ll3. HEBREW GRAMMAR. 15 or JO, (vide Chap. IX. Sect. 1.) before^ or in compari- son of, prefixed to another noun, expresses the compa' rative degree, e. g. |^.^5a ^''n'l D''litO thy love is good in comparison with wine^ i. e. is better. The superla- five is made — 1. By the adverb ^j^ja very, exceeding, as i>j5Q iitDj very good, ^j^c 1is?'l*^-^1 and they feared greatly. 2. By the prefix 2j blessed D''ii^5^ among • T - women. 3. By the name of God, ^Ae ^r^^5, moun- tainsy S^c. of God. 4. By the repetition of a word, as good good. 5. By two synonymous words, as |V2}N1 '•Dy i^oor awfl? needy. — 6. By the genitive case plural of the same or a synonymous word, as D''!p*?tt ^il^'^' King of kings. 4. The cases^ of nouns are not so determinately distinguished as in Latin and Greek ; yet the following rules may be of some use in discovering them. n is prefixed most frequently to the genitive or t ;,^,^^tW vocative, or the accusative after a verb. ,^s€ ^ mf, especially in Rabbinical Hebrew, and before the affixes, is the sign of the genitive. L ^ is sometimes prefixed to the genitive, but more CtliA'^' frequently to the dative. ^f^-:^^ * Hebrew nouns have properly no cases, their place is supplied by prefixing to the noun certain particles, which are sometimes at- tached to its beginning, and sometimes remain distinct words. 16 HEBREW GRAMMAR. j^ti is a particle, which usually precedes the accu- -sative case, or the nominative of passive or neuter verbs. It signifies the, the vert/, and denotes nearness.'' J JO written as a distinct word, or the prefixes » or 2, denote the ablative. 5. When two words are so related, that in Latin the latter word would be put in the genitive or ablative case, the former is said to be in regimen. The change for regimen affects the points only, or both the letters and points. Nouns masc. sing, as '^:i'r]aword, and/em. plur, as T T niD!3 daughters, change the points only, as ^:n'^ word T - : of, r)'i:3:i daughters of; but nouns mas. plur. as D***!!^ : • T : words, and fern. sing, as pTlW « Iclw, change both T letters and points, as "^^^"1 words of, phSd lo>w of, &c. (See Chap. X. Sect. 1, for the changes of these points.) But nouns that have no^kametz in the ult. or penult, as ^Sp a voice, )n grace, '»'?^ a vessel, *1pp ^' hoolc, and several others, are the same in the absolute and con- structed state, as CD'^j^nr) ^SD sepher tehillim, the book of praises, i.e. the Psalms. If the former of two words in regimen is a feminine '(f ending in Hj that termination is changed into ri» as . T\y\T\ a law, H'in'' DI^D the law of Jehovah, a See Praxis on the Psalms. Num. 64. HEBREW GRAMMAR. 17 If the former of two words in regimen is a plural masculine, or a dual of either gender, the termination D** or D"* is changed into •> as p'^J^t^JQ plantationSf XTO "'i^lSJD plantations of vine. CHAPTER V. OF PRONOUNS. 1. Pronouns are either separate words, or con- junct: of the former kind these are the chief: SINGULAR. ••::b« or ••^W I, com. nn« Thott, «i. T - nW Thou, f. «.in ..... He, m. SN-f She, f. nt This, m. nAx This, f. PLURAL. !lDnD« We, com. DnW ....... Ye, you, m. triN ....... Ye, you, f. DH They, m. )n They, f. nVw • • These, c. V» ....... These, c. ^)1}^ who, which, that, relative, ''xp v<^ho? n» and HD what, inferrogatives ? i^ln is often put foi* j^>rf» rM:^^ for on ; r(^r\ for \r\ ; and sometimes IDnD is userf for '):3nDi^; % it, rit for r^t. or riJ^r- D 18 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Some of these pronouns are in a sort declined. Abl. Ace. Dal. Gen. Nom. T T T V >3« I, me. We, us. nab •••t r\hm : ... ... T ... T - Thou, thee, m. You, m. ••• : • T •.. T T ... pbtr? ... T ••• TIN Thou, thee, f. You, f. ^3^?3 T lb nnb ■•• T Dnbir ••• T •.• on He, him. They, them, m. nasD ... •• T T nb mb ... T T ... ... T '.• She, her. They, them, f. By some grammarians the genitive cases of the pronouns are wholly rejected, the particle ^U^ being considered as merely compounded of U^ from ^^ti who or which, and ^ to, and therefore meaning simply which (is) to any one ; thus "t^Jir '•JO'^^ my vineyard which is to me ; that is, my own vineyard. The conjunct pronouns, so called because they are always found conjoined with other words, arc merely parts of the separate pronouns prefixed or suffixed to the beginning of words . The prefixes are three, viz. — HEBREW GRAMMAR". 19 1. n derived from t^in or ^^''^) which may be con- sidered as an article ; as \lf^^T\ t^^^ man. ' T II. Uf, from '^liJti who ? This is sometimes used as a conjunction, sicut, as, viz. ti^\i) as he came^ meaning T V the time in which he came. III. n?Q sometimes drops the n and becomes a prefix, as n^a (for nr nio) what (is) this ? The affiles or suffices are more numerous ; they are derived from the personal pronouns, and after nouns signify possession, as mi/, thy, his, &c. ; after verbs or prepositions, they act as personal pronouns, as me, thee, &c. 2. The following examples shew the affixes, and the manner of affixing them to nouns.* * Affixes to verbs are treated of, Chap. VIII. Note 1. D!D, p, on, and ]n, are called grave affixes^ because they alter the punctuation of the word to which they are joined in the same manner as regimen does. 2. Nouns in the dual and plural num- bers have > before all the affixes except ^. ^iN a father, ns a brother, T T and Dn a father-in-law, insert the ^ though singulars, as tJ^Iss thy T • T father : and also these seven particles, inW cft€7\ bw to, ^^^ between, IV unto, hv upon, HTin under, and in'' together with. 3. 3 is sometimes inserted between the word and affix, especially the affixes % % and n to nouns, and ^3 me, and -in him, to verbs, wh^ch 3 is T sometimes lost in a dagesh. 4. nw tvith, changes tzere into short chirek with dagesh, as ^'i^M with me ; before 5^3 it has (t) as !13i^« $0 HEBREW GRAMMAR. tviih m ; so also D3? with, as ."131^3? with us, 5. )>W not, nan hehold, and 'i'SS hitherto, instead of T have JlS , and nouns that end in n take VI, which are the aflBxes of the third person singular masculine to verbs, as sma>M not he, J)nb3? his leaf, from rh^ a leaf, 6. n (the affix) has commonly, but not always, mappik, and is thereby distinguished from the local, and feminine termination. HEBREW GRAMMAR. 2\ S5 O i fa V a^ ^4^ a 3 2 s a i en -5 l_ • ar nt '' i3*' -^ #- ST- #r w ><1 ?»• fa 1 >• " H I" K , . t3 02 ^" in- E c' J? D* #»•' «> ^ Z 0) . > s ' (I) a g K -» >> t>. U5 ki »> 3 3 *S '53 < a •5 -5 § ^ CO » X 1 1^^ *- i *~ H •/- :• *- : ^ : «^ : #• : ^ : fa fa *■ rr *- n*^ ?? a n: B^ t = & CO CO ^ « . i %s .§ «-i 3 3 a < < s ■5 ^ JS 3 "5 ta fa c li U4 ^ i^ .i5 a <3 a 1- •5 .22 IB 3 3 ■5 CO X n;:n: g" H*^ : G- n: fa fa ^ a r— CO #- IT * in- •#- Rl 3 3 ?«-» >» S § 0) ^ (U bC*^ J= 42 0) -3 -C l-H H H K >- >^ H H SS X. • Z X' ,- r: X, Z« 25' n- K- ^ ^ n; ^ % P §' &^ a #— co£ o Oh t-i is *^ •♦J O 5*. C to o « .S 3 O en M 3 s ^ 3 M « a a o ii Ji I 22 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Obs. 2. — In the Suffixes of the second person we every where read 5 for jn ; viz. in TT, *^ , D^, p, &c., for iT), Ji , D)^, \iT)y &c. : the reason of this change is, T " V I V without doubt, to prevent the ambiguity, which might otherwise arise, between those Suffixes and the Verbal terminations ir), Ji, djt), m.* T : V ) V The Affixes (or suffixes) are but parts of the Pro- nouns Primitive from which they are derived, and are therefore called derivatives. The manner in which they are derived is as follows ; From the first Person of the Common Gender. as >nni debhari, " my word." ''aniDr zekartani, " remember me." ''3T2Nb leabhedeeni, 'Mo de- stroy me" ••IS'^ debharai, " my words.? •♦aw, come > "^a >3 And after nouns plural, •» From wmN i\^ na as ^'yiyi debhart nu, " our word." .. T : J)3'^^!3'7 debhareenu, *' our words." From the second Person Masculine. j" Tjnm debhorfctty " thy word." nns and its cases ^ n3 sing. I r]^^^1 dcbharekay «thy words." I nDHi^ othacay " unto thee." T T " Vide Jones' Heb. Gram. Sect. 88. HEBREW GRAMMAR. 23 DnS&c. tZ^'D plural QDID*^ debharkem, " your word." DIS^'I^'^ dibhreekem, " your words." From the second Person Feminine. nw and its cases come "JJ >^ sing. And after nouns plural, Tf 'i[^'DL^ debhareekf " thy word." ••:3DirQ bethoJceeki, "in the midst of thee." tjnn^ debharayiky « thy words." ]D1i"^ debharken, " your word." From int^ 8ic. )^ plural <| ^ ,77 , 'v- '•.• p"»"Q^ dtbhreeken, "your words." From the third Person Masculine. SJ^n come 1 ^T\ 13 sing. And after nouns plural^ 1 in^a'T debharo, " his word." T : 5iniJiW1 waohabeehu^ "and I loved him." J^ablDb^^ yokelennu, " shall de- vour him." Vl^"^ debharaiv, " his words." 24 HEBREW GRAMMAR. From Qn &c. cottie D on C3 la plu7\ Cnyi dthharam, " their word." C3n*»"in'^ dibhreehem, " their words." tOilp^phokdeem, " visit them." "iDbDt^'» yokeleemo, " shall con- sume them." From the third Person Feminine, wn &c. n n n3 sing. t T TlV ms^ debharah, ** her word." T T : n"'"l!2"7 debhareha, " her words." T V T : nab^rf"' yokelennah, " shall eat Tiv : it." ]n &c. 7 ^n j»kr. ]"in'=T debharan, " their T T : word." ^rr^nS"^ dibkreehen, " their words."* Affixes are joined in the same manner to nouns of the feminine gender as to those of the masculine ; ex. gr* ■ Vide Fitzgerald's Heb. Gram. Chap. VII. HEBREW GRAMMAR. 25 A FEMININE NOUN. A MASCULINE NOUN. m'ljTn torah, a law. T IIS'^T dabar, a word. T T Plural. Singular. Plural. Singular. My. Tii-Tin ^rn^F\ •»nn^ nn'^ V : It V T : :It : Thy, m. tl^ninin timir. ^^n^l "T : Thy, f. T imin T T T : T : His. T V T T T V T : T T ; Her. iy^rfn^r\ !^2nn'7 •lann*^ Our. DiDmin V "I * Your, m. ^D-^nWin V : - p^innn pnn-^T Your, f. T T T T • Their, m. in^'n'rhn T T innn"?r T T : Their, f. CHAPTER VI OF VERBS IN GENERAL. 1. Every perfect verb has seven conjugations^ kal, niphal, pihel, puhal, hiphil, hophal, hithpaheL^ (See * The first is called kal, (bp light) because the verb is there simplest and least encumbered, both in form and signification. In 26 HEBREW GRAMMAR. the paradigm ^p5 he visited, or *7»b he learned, for - T - T the illustration of this and each following remark.) Kal is active. The root is generally the third sin- gular of its preterite, as "ijo^ he learned. But of - T verbs whose second radical is i, or \ the infinitive in kal, and not the preterite, is commonly to be found in lexicons. Niphal is the passive of kal. The characteristic is 3, as a preformant; or, in those tenses where it has another preformant, a dagesh in the first radical, instead of ^^ as -ra^D, "i5?)'ri. the first grammars, b^S (Jf-e wrought) was the paradigm of perfect - T verbs, and the 3^ not being pronounced, or only as h, the preterite of each conjugation would be byssnn bs^sn Vv^7^ brss brs b^^sa hithpahel, hophal, hiphil, puhal, pihel, niphal. That paradigm was justly laid aside, as V being a guttural, will not admit the dagesh, which is the characteristic of some conjugations ; but they continued to be called by those names, which, as they con- tain the vowels of verbs in each conjugation, give a general notion of their form. "TpQ he visited^ has been commonly used since, as - T the paradigm ; but as the initial letter has sometimes a dagesh lene and sometimes not, and this merely because it is one of begad Jcephathj (the dagesh not being common to all verbs in those con- jugations, in which TpQ has it,) "ittb he learned, is sometimes sub- stituted in its place. a This use of dagesh resembles the change made when in and HEBREW GRAMMAR. 27 In Pihel and Puhal the signification of a verb is strengthened 5 thus, to seek, in P^Ae/ is, to seek dili- gently, Pihel is active, Puhal passive, and takes (^) kibbuts under the first radical. These conjugations have dagesh* in the second radical, as ^'tlhy lilh^i ll^b^ &c. Hiphil is active, Hophal passive : they denote an effect upon another, (v. g. to cause to seek, or to be sought)) and may be called the causative voices. Hiphil prefixes n to the Jirst radical and "» to the last, thus, ^''pgn he caused to visit ; and takes patach under the formative letter of the tense, as "Vp^"" he shall cause to visit, Hophal subscribes kamets-chatuph or kibbuts, as '^pBT\ hophkad, ^p^j^ muphkad, - : T T : \ Hithpahel answers to the middle voice in Greek, and has commonly a reflective or reciprocal significa- tion ; thus, from ^"^ji he was great ; in Pihel^ ^^^ he - T •• • jnagnijied, but in hithpahel ^"^jinn he magnified him- self. It has r\T^ prefixed in most tenses, and always ^wmmrt^e are made into one word, illuminate; the same is done in innumerable instances in all languages. 2 On account of the dagesh, pihel, puhal, and hithpahel, are called grave conjugations, the others light. ^ N.B. — When the first radical letter is a sibilant (i. e. one of 28 HEBREW GRAMMAR. has dagesh in the second radical, as ^)2)^nn he taught himself. Sometimes a word occurs which has, in part, the form of two conjugations. It is to be remembered, there is not an uniform change in the signification of all verbs in the several conjugations, many having in one a signification very different from, and almost contrary to, what they have in another ; of this the lexicons give instances enough. See V7n, :l^^j^, &c. - T - T 2. Verbs have several moods and two tenses in each conjugation. The moods have much the same signification as in other languages. One preterite ex- presses all the kinds of past action, and the future what is yet to be done. It also signifies the continuance of any thing, or that it is customary, possible, lawful, rea- sonable, or desirable to do it. Instead of a present the B?!5Dt) the performant letter H is put after the sibilant, as - :t Dsinon for nnionn. 1. The n thus transposed is changed into "T if the sibilant is T, as ])3'^tn for ^Z3Tnn he prepared himself; and into la if it is !J, as p'=Tli!?n for p"=T!Jnn he justified himself, 2. When the first radical is *7, Ifi, or n, the preformant n is omitted, and its place supplied by dagesh, as nntan for intann he cleansed himself HEBREW GRAMMAR. 29 tense, the participle of the present is used, hence called Benoni, between, i. e. the past and future.* The tenses are often used promiscuously, especially in the poetic and prophetic books. With regard to the conjugations in general, it may be remarked, that the characteristic, or formative letter of the tense, excludes that of the conjugation; thus, •^pg is, in the future of Hiphil, ^"^p^^ for Tpgriiv? — in the Participle, *i^'?3Ja for ^•'pSHtt — in the Participle of Hophal, *7p3)Q for IpgriJD- The same may be T : •% T : ••• : observed of the other conjugations ; and, in Hithpahel, it may happen that neither of its characteristic letters (jin) should appear, as in the following example ; — |?'^tO!^!D"nJQ1 uma nitztaddak, " or how shall we clear ourselves," Gen. xliv. 16, where n? the first formative of the conjugation is excluded by 5, the formative of the first person plural of the future j and j^, the second formative, is transposed and changed into ^. These observations will be more clearly perceived, and the several conjugations more easily distinguished from each other, by the following Table of Moods and Tenses : * The participle of the preterite is called pahul, which is a tech- nical word, this participle of the old paradigm b3?5 being b!)375 "T T jtahuL ao HEBREW GRAMMAR. Praterite. Put Imper. Infin. p. Ben. p. Pa. Kal. •7P9 lipsM TSPS lips -Tpl9 15lp5 Niph. TpSJ npB« .. T V -rpBH ipsn lpQ3 Pihel lp3 IpDN TpS IpB IpBKJ Puhal TpS lips IPB IpDID T \ : Hiph. Tpsn • : • TpD« • : - fpsn Tpsn Hoph. -Tpsn TpDS TpDn TpD?3 T : T Hithp. TpQnn ipQn« ipBnn "TpQnn ipsritt From this Table it appears at first view, that the passive verbs Puhal and Hophal want the imperative ; that Hophal wants also the participle present ; and that all the conjugations, except Kal, Puhal, and Hophal, want the participle past. HEBREW GRAMMAR. 31 CO =3 O o o &4 O) O a o be s o a X •P J3; . . •^ 1 z< F: !i= «+4 Z' g' S C: rr >i a 2 XV ^- o • #^ i-T X' r;- «44 i:." o X ' c;'- 3* i:.- O •5 n- c' oT X TS -S bo "» 2 13 2 ^t3 fe <1 m 03 O •5 o o a, bo G O CO I & c: •5 C: r s fJ 5? Xt t\ ««^ j:^: ,^ p^ X- n: ^= X 1 ■ o r\ 1 c. J? ^ IZ- q «\ r V X -^ n: r X o ^ x» e «4J I:. 1 X' c: s n i ■5 xr X '.^' T3 i-i t ^ • S S a> .S»-» B TS 1 cT 32 HEBREW GRAMMAR. We shall now give all the Conjugations, severally and complete, with observations on each, making use of the common example ^pG, according to which all regular verbs are conjugated. Obs. — *ipD signifies, not only, to visit, but also to - T review, muster, reckon, &c., and hence, in Hithpahel, to present oneself upon a review, to be reviewed or numbered: for the sake of uniformity, however, and to exemplify the general import of the conjugations, it is translated, in the paradigm of Hithpahel^ he visited himself. KAL CONJUGATION COMPLETE. INDICATIVE MOOD. Fem mpS3 t: It Fem mpQ Fem irnpB PAST TENSE. Mas TpQ He visited. - T Mas Jn*TpQ Thou visitedst. T : - T Com '»mpQ I visited. • :- T Com -llpB They visited. : It Mas D;mpQ Ye visited. Com -laipQ We visited. HEBREW GRAMMAR. 33 Fern ^-rpsn Fern. . -TpQin or lipDn F. mipsn or miipDip F. HDipDn or n^iipsn FUTURE TENSE. Com. ipDM or lipSM I shall Mas. -rpsn or lipsn Thou shalt Mas. TpD^ or lipD"^ He shall Com. Ipsa or lipsa We shall Mas np^D Ye shall Mas iJIpD^t They shall IMPERATIVE MOOD. Fern np3 Fern. nanpQ or mYips Mas. . . "TpQ or lipQ Visit thou. Mas J^TpQ Visit ye. INFINITIVE MOOD. "rp5 or lips, lipQ To visit. PARTICIPLE BENONI, OR PRESENT. Fem. rnpis or mpis T : Fem nilplQ Mas. . . . IpiS Sing. Mas. . . Q'^lplQ Plur. Visiting. PARTICIPLE PAHUL, OR PASSIVE. Fem m!)pQ T : Fem nil^lpQ Mas. . . . IJlpQ Sing. "] Mas. . . Dn-1pQ Plur. J Visited. 34 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Fem. KIPHAL CONJUGATIOISI COMPLETE. INDICATIVE MOOD. PAST TENSE. Mas. . . lpD3 He was visited. Mas. . mpD2 Thou wast visited. Com, '»mp33 I was visited. Com. . J^TpQD They were visited. Mas. Ompsa Ye were visited. Com. !lD1pD3 We were visited. Fem mp532 T : : • Fem mpD3 .imp2!3 Fem. >ip^r\ Fem TpBl^ ••T • Fem naipBn T :•• T • Fem naipsn FUTURE TENSE. Com. . Tpew I shall be visited. Mas. . IpBn Thou shalt be visited. " T ' Mas. . "TpQ> He shall be visited. Com. . Tp53 We shall be visited. Mas. ?npQn Ye shall be visited. : It • Mas. . 5)TpQ> They shall be visited. : It* IMPERATIVE MOOD. Fem. ^ipfun Fem naipsn Mas. . *TpQn Be thou visited. *• T • Mas. . 5)lpQn Be ye visited. INFINITIVE MOOD. ipBH To be visited. PARTICIPLE BENONI, OR PRESENT. Fem. mpB3 or n"7pS3 vv : • T T : • Fem niipD3 Mas. . .ip^:i Sing. T : • Mas. D>"rpQ3 Plur. Visited, or To be visited. HEBREW GRAMMAR. 35 Fem. Fein. PIHEL CONJUGATION COMPLETE. INDICATIVE MOOD. PAST TENSE. Mas. . . *Tj?Q He visited diligently. t; • Fem. . ^mpsi Fem. Fem. Fem mipJDn Fem TOIpsn Mas. . m|?Q Thou visitedst diligently. Com. "TllpQ I visited diligently. Com. . snpS They visited diligently. Mas. Dnip5 Ye visited diligently. Com. . !)D*Tp5 We visited diligently. FUTURE TENSE. Com. . *TpDW I shall visit diligently. Mas. . *fpDn Thou shalt visit diligently. Mas. . TpS'' He shall visit diligently. ^ j Com. • TpM We shall visit diligently. Mas. !^l|7Dn Ye shall visit diligently. Mas. . sn|?Q*» They shall visit diligently. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Fem. . . Fem. . . Mas. . . TpQ Visit thou diligently. Mas. . . J^lpQ Visit ye diligently. INFINITIVE MOOD. "T(?S TS visit diligently. PARTICIPLE BENONI, OR PRESENT. Fem. nnpDDor mpDt2 Fem niipDTD Mas. . lpD)2 Sing."] " ' • !► Visitino; diligently. Mas. D'^-rpQi:: Plur. I o o j 36 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Fem. Fem. Fem. PUHAL CONJUGATION COMPLETE. INDICATIVE MOOD. PAST TENSE. Mas. . . "T)?Q He was visited diligently. Mas. . n^p3 Thou wast visited diligently. Com. '^i^lpQ I was visited diligently. Com. . !i1j?Q They were visited diligently. Mas. D/nipQ Ye were visited diligently. Com. . -laipQ We were visited diligently. . nips .mp5 ]rnpQ Fem. , . . >lpDn Fem. . . . -ipBri Fem. T : - \ : Fem. * :- \ : FUTURE TENSE. Com. . "Tj?DN I shall be visited diligently. Mas. . IpSn Thou shalt be visited diligently. Mas. . . lj?D'' He shall be visited diligently. Com. . *Tj?S3 We shall be visited diligently. Mas. Jllj^Dn Ye shall be visited diligently. Mas. . Jni^D'' They shall be visited diligently. INFINITIVE MOOD. "lipQ To be visited diligently. PARTICIPLE BENONI, OR PRESENT. Fem mpQ r \ Mas. . D*»1j9S Fem nnpS) Mas. . . 1|?D Sing.1 ^ * , Y Visited diligently. 3 Plur. j ^ ^ PARTICIPLE PAHUL, OR PASSIVE. Fem. n"TpD» or mj^Qtt V V s : T T ••. : Fem ni-TpDtt Mas. . TpBlD Sing. Mas. D^ipStt Plur. Visited diligently. HEBREW GRAMMAR. 37 HIPHIL CONJUGATION COMPLETE. INDICATIVE MOOD. PAST TENSE. Fem HTpDH Fem nipZiil Fem impsn Mas TpQH He 1 Mas rnpDH Thou Com \'^"7£)pn I Com ^TpDn They Mas. . . . dnipDn Ye Com.. . . . Jl^lpOn We Fem •'TpSn Fem. . . . Ipsn or l^psn Fem mipDn Fem, n2*TpDn FUTURE TENSE. Com. -TpQS or TpQ« I Mas. Ipsn or T^pan Thou Mas. ipD'^ or TpQ"^ He Com. IpDD or TpS3 We Mas in'^pSn Ye Mas 5lTp5> They IMPERATIVE MOOD. Fem •'Tpen Fem n3"lpDn Mas. I'n^n or Tpf^n \ Ca"se thou to '•• : - • : - / visit. Cause ye to visit. Mas. ?^^} rj^Ziii INFINITIVE MOOD. "IpDH or TpOn To cause to visit. PARTICIPLE BENONI, OR PRESENT. Fem. nTpDD or HTpDZa Fem niTpSt) Mas. TpDD or TpDD Sing. Mas D^I'^pSD Plur :}» Causing visit. 38 HEBREW GRAMMAR. IIOPHAL CONJUGATION COMPLETE. INDICATIVE MOOD. PAST TENSE. Fem. . . . . nipsn t: : T Mas. . . Ip^Tl He was Fem. . . . . nipZlTl Mas. . mpDn Thou wast T : - : T Com. ^mpDn I was Com. . . ^ITpSn They were Fem. . . . . . impDH V : - : T Mas. Ompsn Ye were Com. . ^^ipf^^n We were caused to visit, or. caused to be visited. Fem ••IpSn • : : T Fem -rpsn Fem naipsri T :- : T Fem nanpsn FUTURE TENSE. Com. . . ipSM I shall - : T Mas. . . ipsn Thou shalt - : T Mas. . . . TpS'* He shall - : T Com. . . . Ipsa We shall - : T Mas. . . ^Ilpsn Ye shall : : T Mas. . . i\lpf:^ They shall be caused to visit, or, caused to be visited. INFINITIVE MOOD. IpDH To be caused to visit, or, to be caused to be visited. PARTICIPLE PAHUL, OR PASSIVE. Fem. mpStt or mpStt VV : T TT : T Fem nilpDD Mas. . . . Ipp^ Sing. T Caused to visit, T4T -..-Ll.1 rii r o*"» ^'aused to be Mas. . . D>7PSa Plur. / ,-,i,^j_ HEBREW GRAMMAR, 39 HITHPAHEL CONJUGATION COMPLETE. INDICATIVE MOOD. ' PAST TENSE. Fern. Fern. Fern. mpsnn impsnn Com. . IpSnn He visited himself. Mas. rnpsnn Thou visitedst thyself. T : — : • Com. "'inipQnn I visited myself. Com. . JnpSnn They visited themselves. Mas. anij^Qnn Ye visited yourselves. Com. •')31j?Snn We visited ourselves. FUTURE TENSE. Com. . IpQriM I shall visit myself. Fem *»"TJ?&nn Mas. . TpQnn Thou shalt visit thyself. Fern -T|?Qnn Mas. . . Tpsn^ He shall visit himself. Com. . . Ipsni We shall visit ourselves. Fem. . . . nSlpQnn Mas. . s^lpQnn Ye shall visit yourselves. Fem. . . .naipsnn Mas. . .^1|?Qn> They shall visit themselves. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Fem ^IpSnn Mas. . .TpSsrin Visit thou thyself. Fem. . . . n3"?pQnn Mas. . 5)TpQnn Visit ye yourselves. INFINITIVE MOOD. Tpsnn To visit one's self. PARTICIPLE BENONI, OR PRESENT. Fem. nipenrj or mpsnto Fem niipsn^ Mas. . -rpsn^ Sing. Visiting himself. Mas. D'^lpsri^ Plur. Visiting themselves. 40 HEBREW GRAMMAR. CHAPTER VII. OF THE VARIOUS KINDS OF VERBS, WITH SOME PARTI- CULAR OBSERVATIONS UPON EACH. Irregular or Imperfect Verbs are those which consist of three radicals, of which any one may happen to be quiescent, omitted, or changed in declension. ' vihosejirst radical is N, as "T2M He perished. - T or ... •», as intt?"' He sat. - T whose second radical is 1, as D^lp To arise. or •<, as I'^S To consider. whose third radical is S, as S^Xi He found. T T or n, as nbSl He revealed. o e3 w <; Obs. — These are quiescent only in the letters ''1^^^ ehevi, S (■ whose^r*^ radical is 3, as tt?!ia He drew near. or whose second and third are -5 g ^ the same letter, as 2DD He surrounded. - T o or whose third radical is 3, as ]n3 He gave. «2 - T Q L or /I, as mS He cut off. - T These kinds of verbs are reckoned irregular ; all the rest are regular. HEBREW GRAMMAR. 41 Section I Of regular Verbs, Regular Verbs are foniied like ^jo^ t but x^pb he - T - T took, is formed like i2/^D» (Sect. VII.) Section II. — Of Quiescents whose first Radical Letter is w. 1. In the first singular of the future of kaP the radical js^ is dropped, lest two alephs should come to- gether ; as ^!}f^ for ^Sis^is? / shall utterly perish. 2. These five, "^^jy^ he perished, X]^^ he was - T T T willing, ^"2^ he did eat, ^jqjs^ he said, nsi^? he baked, - T - T T T form the future of kal, thus : nsnafc^n ^jittt^^ ^n^to -id^: n):D^n -i)2^> >nttrfn np'wn (-) n^'s Sometimes in>? h^ loved, \ir\^ he possessed, and n^i^ - T - T - T he gathered, are formed thus : sometimes like ^JoS As the irregularity is small, there is no paradigm given. Section III. — Of Quiescents whose first Radical Letter is *>. The paradigm ^i^/'' he sat, exhibits the formation - T of these verbs,*" except in the following cases : * The points are not exactly the same in all verbs, the vowels, which in the abstracts are put before the word, are in some verbs the alternative for the first vowel of the paradigm ; those that stand after the words, for the latter. '' And also of Pihel, when preceded by Sheva. ^ The grave conjugations are regular. G 42 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 1. ^5"» he was able, requires 1 in the future of kal, as ^51N I shall he able, &c., and some in hiphil have '» instead of i. 2. If the last radical be i?, the infinitive of kal has two patachs, as rw"^ to know : if it be {^, the two segols are contracted into tzere, as rit^l^ to go out. 3. These four, n^'' he threw, y*T» he knew, xXy he TT -T -T argued, ^^'^ he bound or chastened, in hithpahel - T change "^ into 1, as rrqinn. These nine (of which six have 15 for* their next radical*) are formed like Xliy^^ (see Section VII.) nD** - T -T he left, ^^"^ he bound, np'' he compassed about, 'y^^ and - T '-T - T y^"^ he placed, y^> he spread, p^"^ he poured, y^'^ he -T -T - T - T formed, r\'i> he burned. - T Section IV. — Of Quiescents whose second Radical Letter is 1 or *». Of these D^);? to arise, is the paradigm ; but, 1. Some of these in the grave conjugations double the first and third radicals, as 'ji^ to take, contain, makes "^s^^. 2. J^Syito die, in the preterite and benoni of kal makes n?D- * They are all the verbs which begin with *» and have S for the radical, except M!5> he went out. HEBREW GRAMMjm^ 43 3. ii/i:} to he ashamed, in the future of kal has (••) under the preformants, like ^*:iv; as :i^i:3{^, &c. - T 4. Quiescents in •» often omit the preformant n in the imperative of hiphil, as )>^ consider, for J'»^n. 5. The 1 or > in some verbs is not quiescent, but they are formed like To^, as yii2/ he cried, - T - T Section V Of Quiescents whose third Radical Letter is N. The third sing. fem. sometimes ends in j-^ instead of H) as rsi^^l^ instead of nJ^^^^Dj and sometimes the (^ *" T T T : T is omitted ; in other respects, all these verbs are formed like {^^» he found, T T Section VI. — Of Quiescents whose third Radical Letter is n. In general they are formed like '^[b^ to reveal: T T but, 1. Some are formed like ^jq^, i. e. neither lose nor - T change n- 2. Some double the two first radicals in the grave conjugations ; as vii'^l^^j ^^o"^ Hi^^' he delighted, 3. nni2/ he bowed, and n^i2> he was quiet, in some T T T T tenses chang.e n into 1, as ^Pii7)l> I was quiet, iinni^/n they bowed themselves, 4. Verbs that end in n> generally lose it by apocope, when they are joined in the imperative of Pihel, Hi- 44 HEBREW GRAMMAR. phil, or Hithpahel, with ^js?, a particle of denying ; or in any future with ^, conversivum futurL (Vide Chap. IX. No. 4.) On this account, sometimes the preceding vowel is ex- cluded, as h^i?.^"] and he made, for ni^i?-^*l 5 sometimes it is transposed to the first radical, as p.^i he huilty for np!3^i; and sometimes the preformants have (••), as *^:}^*1 he wept^ for n^^-^V Some in Hiphil have two segols, as ^g.^i he made fruitful, for niD-^1 5 if the first radical be* a guttural, two patachs, as '^^.^i he made to ascend, for H^^'j*!; or if the second be a guttural, a segol and patach, as Xl'QPi b^ suffer not to he destroyed, for nn»J^- n\1 he was, and piTl he lived, with i conversive TT T T and sometimes without it, form the future of kal, thus : m^'^nn si^'n"' ^i^nn •'na ^rn n-i'* •''•nn •'nn '»n« Section VII. — Of Defectives whose first Radical is a. These are all formed like the paradigm 'O)^'^ he - T drew near, except, 1. Those which have i for the second radical, which are formed like Dip, (Sect. IV.) as 01^ he fled; 2. Those that have n or y for the third radical, which have two patachs instead of two segols, in the infinitive of kal ; as j-)n2 to blow, from nSO ; and nytO to plant, from i?t5^ HEBREW GRAMMAR. 45 N.B. — |nD he gave, makes the infinitive jnjri, with an affix T^pi, as '»):ijq to give me. Section VIII. — 0/ Defectives whose second and third Radical are the same Letter, Some of these in the grave conjugations double the two first radicals, as ^ii^ii from ^^ii he rolled ; all the rest are formed after the paradigm ^^2^ he surrounded. - T Section IX. — Of Defectives whose third Radical is 3 or n. These lose the last radical in a dagesh before the afFormants O or r)» as ^nni -^ gave, for "^n^n^ ; ''Ji'is • - T • : - T • - T / cut, for ''jTin*^;^. As they are in other respects regu- lar, no paradigm is wanted. Section X — Of Verbs which have two Defects or Irregu- larities. Some verbs are doubly defective, viz., first, such as begin with ^, and have the second and third radicals the same, as •^'^^ to wander. Secondly, such as begin with ^, and end with ^ or ri> as y>i^ to ylay upon a mu- sical instrument, riPl!) to descend, &c. - T Of this latter class the most remarkable is ^j-)^ he gave, B. verb of frequent occurrence and special irregu- larity, as it drops its final y, not only before the termi- nations 1^ and n^j but also before p), i?i, ^^, d^), and ^n 46 HEBREW GRAMMAR. compensating the defect by dagesh forte in these termi- nations. The preterite of kal, therefore, runs thus, in, n:in:}, nn:), p.n^, 'i^n:^, onD, Dr»n^ rrinD, i!3nD ; '-T t:it t-t :-t '-t :It v-: 'v-: -t the infinitive of kal makes jri^ (for npJ^) ; the impe- rative 1^) or |n, fem. '•5jt>, plur. i^jq, fem. n^!)^ ; and the future of kal, |r)^^, ^nj^, ".^jj^jp, ^jn% |m |r)^ OriJjl, ^I^r))^? 1Dr)> n5n)y) : the future, like the impera- tive, may also end in segol, as IPibi, ]D}r)j 11n\ &c., but the participles ^n^D and )^rO are regular : the preterite of niphal makes |):)D, UDDD, JWD, rinD, ^r^m On!), '-• t:* T-* :-• .-• :• Drim |J;nm 1 -IJ^^ ; the participle makes |Jti^ &c., but the rest of Niphal is regular, as infinitive and impera- tive ^ri-Jilj future ]n1}^, &c. This verb is not used in the other conjugations, except in a few instances in hophal, as m^ he shall be given. CHAPTER VIII. OF AFFIXES TO VERBS. Affixes to verbs signify the patient, i. e. the thing or person acted upon ; except to an infinitive mood, which may signify either the agent or patient. Besides HEBREW GRAMMAR. 47 the affixes to nouns, there are some peculiar to verbs, as appears by the following Table : SINGULAR. ''a Me,^ com. tJ Thee, m. ?T Thee, f. i or !in Him/ m. n Her,<= f. PLURAL. •ID Us, com. D3 You, m. p You, f. D or 1X2 Them,'' m. 1 Them, f. When these pronominal particles are affixed to verbs a change takes place in the vowel points, viz. First. — Kamets of the first radical is changed into sheva ; and pathach of the second radical into kamets, in the third person of the preterite and in the impera- tive and future; thus ^pB becomes "^pQ, as in the - T T : following Table : * The accusative sing, of the first pers. >a, drops the 3 in verbs infinitive^ and becomes '^. ^ The third masculine sing, admits of a paragogic H or 2 in many instances, and the i pronominal is changed into 13 -in, ^3 -lilD and n, but the latter rarely happens. ^ The feminine H admits 3 paragogic, and is formed with kametz, as n3. T '^ The pronoun D in poetical language is often changed into ID. 48 HEBREW GRAMMAR. * ~ T : vIt: ?Tip9 •• t: TT : •imps T T : iipQ me. thee, m. thee, f. her. him. him. T T f: D^ipD Dips TT : iDlpQ TT : npQ us. you, ra. you, f. them, m. them, m. them, f. Obs. — Before Dp and p (-) continues unchanged. Secondly. — Cholem of the future is changed into sheva, except before TT, Dp and ^p, where it is shortened into kamets-chateph ; as in the following ex- amples, from ipQ** he shall visit, viz. — .... . . r ^TpD'' : T : • riipti^ .ti ..... !2 iipD'' > :: • ► J^ . !impD> 'm ..... O tn mpD'' T : : • ^y^''. . me. thee, m. thee, f. him. him. him. her. her. naipD'' T V : : • n^ipD'' DDlpQ"' plpQ*" DipD^ "toipD*" her. us. you, m. you, f. them, m. them, m. them, f. Obs. — ipaw, ipDJ^j and ipp^ are suffixed in the same manner as the third person sing. ip3>, but when the final vowel is (-) as in ii/H^js^, it is lengthened into (t) as n5^2*?ts^ I will clothe her, &c. TV T : V Thirdly. — The infinitive *iipD pekod, shortens cholem into kamets-chateph, and then transposes the HEBREW GRAMMAR. 49 vowels, by which it becomes ^pB pokd, as in the fol- : T lowing examples, viz. • : T ' me. • ••: T me. : : T thee, m ••: T i-^pQ : T To visit thee, f. him. i^n'^pQ him. Jia'^pQ V : T him. rr'^pQ _ her. T V: T na'^ps T V : T J13"7PQ •• : T DD"^pQ V : : T Q'^PQ I impQ I FPS J her, her. us. you, m. you, f. them, m. them, m. them, f. Obs. — Though '»'ip5 pokdi, may signify either the • : T agent or the object of the action, as my visiting, or to visit me, yet the latter is more frequently expressed by ''i'r^pG; the same may be observed of yr]pB his visiting, or to visit him, but the latter is more fre- quently expressed by irTlPG or i^'ipG. The same may be observed of the feminine forms ; but all the other examples having no second forms, admit of both trans- lations. Fourthly. — The participles take the suffixes in the same manner as nouns, as from ^p\B visiting, comes '^IpSB one visiting me, or mi/ visitor, &c. Many other, though less frequent changes, are made in verbs on account of affixes, and they are joined to different tenses by different vowels, as may be seen in the example at the end of the paradigms. H 50 HEBREW GRAMMAR. CHAPTER IX. OF THE PREFIXES ^^'2^ nt^'jD* •• T : 1. Mem, JO) prefixed to nouns, signifies ^j^fromy out of, as n''23tt from a house, D'lpp from the east, D^'ptti^^JD out of the depths. It is prefixed by chirek with dagesh, except before jv?, n> H? V? and % when it has tzere, as >;5'i{^ the Lord, "^^^i^J^from the Lord, When 50 is prefixed to a noun following an adjec- tive, it has the comparative sense, li^njo p1Jn5Q sweeter - : • T than honey. 2. tif is the substitute for the relative ^iJi^^'j^ who, which, that, and is mostly prefixed by segol and dagesh, as Dilii^ which also, ^\2}^U> which they did. 3. n is the Hebrew article emphatic to nouns, as D'^JOli^n i^e heavens, *^ ^-Dn the king, and is prefixed by patach and dagesh. Before a participle it has the sense of ^^U)^ who, which, that, as ^)oi^>n ^^e that learneth, D^'^^HH ^^^ PI? V> ^"^ 1j ^^ is prefixed by kametz, as i2/^{^n the man, D^'VJi^'in the wicked ; unless kametz HEBREW GRAMMAR. 51 follows it, and then it is prefixed by segol, as D^Pin T T V the wise man. The interrogative ^ is prefixed by (-:), as "i^^^^ is it f If the first letter of the word is a guttural with kametz, n takes {"), as DDf^^H has he failed? If the guttural •• T V has any other vowel than (t), or if the first vowel is (••), the n takes (-), as Dnn they? If any of the letters 22^3 are inserted after it, the interrogative n is prefixed, like the emphatic by, (-) and dagesh : as p a son, p*? to a son, T:i^T\to a son? 4. *| may be translated and, hut, notwithstanding, or, even so, seeing that. *\ is regularly prefixed by (.), as "rt *^*i*i and a way ; if a labial (p])Qi^) or sheva follows, by shurek, as nJ2/i)C1 and a seat ; if a pause, by (j), as *^"n^'), especially when *l V I V T it joins two words of nearly the same signification, as )^y\ 05? afflicted and poor, T T • T 1 sometimes changes the preterite, as to its signifi- cation, into the future, and is called conversivum pre- teriti,^ 1 conv. pret. is prefixed as the conjunction, but 2 On the conversive power of vau the following Rules have been given. Rule I. — 1 prefixed to future tenses, converts them to perfect tenses ; and when prefixed to verbs in the perfect tense, it regularly converts them to the future tense. Rule II. — When 1 is prefixed to a verb, which immediately 52 HEBREW GRAMMAK. may often be distinguished from it by its throwing the accent to the last syllable, as J:)*150^ tliou hast learned, T : I- T lni»*?1 thou wilt learn, or, and thou wilt learn,'' •t : - t : 1 sometimes changes the future in signification, into a preterite ; it is thence called coniyersivum futuri, and is prefixed by patach and dagesh, as lijab"* he will learn, 'lS1Zib^^ he learned^ follows another verb of the same tense, without a prefixed 1, and in the same sentence, the \ in that case, is merely conjunctive. Rule III. — A prefixed *> does not affect or convert any verb in the imperative mood. 2. Nor any verb, or verbs, in the future tense, which follow an imperative mood in the same sentence. 3. But to perfect tenses the prefixed 1 is conversive without hin- drance from the preceding imperative mood. Rule IV. — After an interrogation either of the emphaticat" 71 or of the interrogatmy relative ^^'D or 7V2, the prefixed *) doth not influence any verb or verbs of the Jhiture tense, or ihepresent tense ; but in perfect tenses, the 1 is regularly conversive, and is not in- fluenced by a preceding interrogation. Rule V. — If a future tense, put for a preterperfect tense, with *i prefixed, precede a prefer tense, having also a prefixed 1, the 1 in the latter is merely copulative. — See three Tracts on the Syntax, &c., of the Hebrew Tongue, by G. Sharpe, Esq. a 1 he vau conversive is sometimes also a copulative, sometimes only conversive. b The particle TH then, before a future, has often a conversive T use, as "I21T TH then he spake. N.B.— 1 conversivum fut. often changes the long vowel of the HEBREW GRAMMAR. 53 The following canon on vau conversive is laid down by Philip Gell, A.M., in his Observations on the Idiom of the Hebrew Language : — " When two or more verbs are connected in He- brew, the governing or leading verb expresses the ab- solute and general time to be understood throughout the series; and the subordinate verbs are, in this respect, elliptical ; that is, they have the temporal power of the governing verb, by ideal communication implied in them, but relative time, or some other addi- tional meaning, is generally expressed by their own proper power; and sometimes the modal or personal power of a governing verb is also understood in them'' To illustrate what has been said by an example. In the beginning of the first chapter of Genesis, the first verb js^'ili he created^ is the governing verb of the T T major series, the time of which is to be understood to all the subordinates of the major series of the narration, throughout the chapter ; which, as the governing verb is in the past tense, must be all translated in the same tense : the verb nriTl? therefore, having no proper T :iT tense of its own, as being a subordinate preterite, re- ceives its tense from fsj^ls, and must be translated was ; T T last syllable into a short one, as DttJ''"! for Dtt?''"! he made to return, V T- •• T- up^'l for cip-1 he arose. TT- T - 54 HEBREW GRAMMAR. the dependence being pointed out by a van prefixed to V"li^nV The next subordinate verb, was^ is not ex- V T T : pressed, but understood after '^:i;'rn> and derives its past signification from nn\1> already mentioned. From T :iT this non-expressed verb the tense passes on to the next subordinate, viz. — nsniJa* which is a subordinate pre- sent, and must be translated, (was,) causing a motion : from this the next subordinate, viz. — 1JQ5^*.^1 and he said, which is a subordinate future, receives the past tense of the governing verb ; but indicates,* by its own future sign, that the saying, though past, was subsequent to the time expressed by npHIJD. Here the series suffers an interruption, from the speech "^^js^ '^ri'^ let there be light ; the verb of which has no connexion either with those preceding, or those following. The series is resumed with the next verb •'ni*], a subordinate future, indicating an event subsequent to that of the verb next preceding in the same series, viz. — to *i?ai<*-^1; from which also it receives the governing past tense, and, consequently, is to be translated, and there was. The narration then proceeds with the subordinate futures i«^^-^1j ^1^-^*l> &c., each indicating successive subse- quency, which might be expressed by the word then : thus, and then God saw, and then God divided, &c. This example, besides illustrating the principle, HEBREW GRAMMAR. 55 shows, that an intervening speech or sentence, though it may interrupt, does yet by no means destroy the con- nexion of a series of narration; and of consequence, that a verb, with vau prefixed, following in the narra- tion after the intervening speech or sentence, receives a communicated temporal power from a verb in the narration preceding the speech or sentence, as if it had never been interrupted.^ 5. 5 or i)05 signifies as^ like, according to, about, and IS prefixed by sheva ; ':>J2/'ijoS ^* ^ ruler, Tl^^j:^"^ like Moses, "^^J^^ according to my heart, 6. ^ is rendered to, unto, in, of, for, &c., and is prefixed by sheva, as !?is^'nii^''^ to Israel, "^^)±> to, of for, the king. If the word be a monosyllable, or if the two next syllables be of equal quantity, it is prefixed by kametz, as D^^ io « people, X\'^^b i^ hope, T T - V T 7. !2 prefixed to nouns signifies in, hy, with, on, upon, among, he, as "iji'';i^ in his house, X'^^^ ^^5 ^'^h upon the earth, 'q^)!}":^^ among women, ' T - 8. The letters ^^j^} exclude n emphatic, and take its points, as y\%^ chaff, V^q^J) ^^^ X^^^'^ ^^^^ chaff, ^'^t^'^y fov tif•'^^^^ ^^^^ t^cLi man. • T • T : 9. The letters :i^^*i before WfH^ God, have (•) ; " Jones' Heb. Gram. Sect. 149. 56 HEBREW GRAMMAR. before nin'' Jehovah, and O^J^ Lord, they have (-) ; T : T -: and the first letters of these words, for the most part, lose their proper vowels, as D^i^^^'^> ^^lt^\ Min*'1) &c. •• T - T - N.B. — The letters D'?!^^ are prefixed to verbs in- finitive, when they form the Hebrew gerunds, as nJO^^ when I have learned, Ps. cxix. 7? Vbtl^JQ (ab audiendo) Jrom hearing, &c. CHAPTER X. OF THE CHANGE OF VOWELS. I. The vowels are ojlen changed when a wcrrd in- creases at the end. In this case the vowels of the ultimate and penulti- mate syllables are commonly exchanged for shorter. The following are general rules ; the exceptions, though many, are too trifling to be mentioned. 1. (t) penultimate, in every increase and regimen, is changed into sheva, '^^i^, y^'y^, or into compound T T T : sheva under a guttural, which admits simple sheva only when quiescent ; antepenultimate in verbs is changed in the same manner, JniD*?, '•DD'IJa'?- (t) ultimate, in regimen and before the grave affixes, is changed into (-), as ri^:^'' 1^^ ; D!:n"iin from nn^n. HEBREW GRAMMAR. 57 2. (••) penultimate, in every Increase and regimen, is contracted into (:), as D''^p?0 from :i£55a « circuit, (•') ultimate^ in every increase, is changed into (:), as D'''15d^ from '^^'cSb learning ; in regimen into (-).* 3. i penultimate, followed by (-) or (••), is some- times changed to (:), but commonly into (j) chateph, as being of a similar sound, as "^yt^ thy ear, from |tK. S ultimate is always in verbs changed into (:), and in nouns before the grave affixes, unless a sheva follows, when it becomes kametz-chateph. 4. (-) penultimate, if another patach follows, is in every increase changed into sheva, as *^vi^ ^ gate, pi. • T : Patach ultimate, in declining a noun, is changed into kametz, as D'''1^^j and on account of the affixes, • T : into sheva, as )}jy^, '^\1>'2,1* In verbs that have n para- gogic, patach final is changed into sheva ; and in those that have an affix into kametz, as H'lJD^n from *1}dS*1 T : : T - : T ^^*1D^ from 'laS • T T : - T 5. Segol penultimate, in every increase, passes into sheva, as ;i^5 a river, D"'2l^5' Segol ultimate, in forming the dual or plural num- ber is changed into kametz, as D''Jl^5; on account of • T : a It is not changed in monosyllables, or after (t) or (:). I 5& HEBREW GRAMMAR. an affix or a local n? into sheva, as ^i^'^js? and ri!5'1N from y*|^J. (See the next rule.) II. Some alterations of the points are occasioned by simple or compound sheva, 1. Iftwoshevas should come together in the be- ginning, or after a complete syllable in the middle of a word, the former is changed into patach, segol, or chirek. (See "»!5'ni^ in the last rule.) N.B. — A consonant and long vowel, or a short vowel between two consonants, the latter df which has a dagesh or sheva, make a complete syllable, 2. In those cases in which other letters would have a simple sheva, the gutturals take a compound one. 3. A compound sheva generally causes the pre- ceding letter to have that vowel with which it is compounded: for instance, chateph-patach gives the preceding a patach ; chateph-segol, gives a segol ; and chateph-kametz, a kametz. 4. Sometimes a compound sheva, in this case, loses the vowel, and becomes a simple sheva. Thus, n^in he meditated^ in third sing. m. fut. kal, T T regularly makes HJin"'; but by rule second M^n% by rule third n:in% and by rule fourth n^H''- V v: V V : V 5. If a simple sheva follows a compound, the com- pound either drops the sheva, or the vowel with which L HEBREW GRAMMAR. 59 it is compounded, as ^^Ti^yvp ihy work, from nii^VJO? and I^GD!) for 1^311^ from ^^T]"^ he was turned, 6. The gutturals will not allow chateph-patach be- fore them, but change it into patach. III. The points are altered on account of the gut- turals. As the gutturals and *^ will not admit dagesh, they compensate the want of it by changing the preceding vowel into a long one : patach into kametz, chirek or segol into tzere, and kibbutz or kametz-chateph into i or i, as ^Sf^TM^fiom a multitude, for p)a,'1?9« This compensation is sometimes omitted. IV. The accents cause some alterations in the points, 1. ^^> TT^}, &c., become '^'jj *t:3, &c., on account of the pauses, silluk, athnac, &c. 2. The pauses change a short vowel into a long one, or one long vowel for another of a fuller sound, as b^Bntj^ for b\p_nbf, Ps. V. 3. 3. Sometimes the other accents do the same. V. Maccaph Commonly changes a long vowel of the former word into its correspondent short one : kametz into patach, tzere into chirek, i or i into kibbutz or kametz- chateph. 60 HEBREW GRAMMAR. VI. To improve the sounds A long vowel is sometimes changed into a short one, a short into a long one, and one long or short for another. CHAPTER XL OF IRREGULARITIES IN SYNTAX. 1. Nouns that signify dominion, and particularly the names of God, though plural, may be put in appo- sition with singular substantives, as V"^i^«^ ^^1^ W^^T\ V T T •• -: • T the man, the lords (lord) of the land ; or they may be joined to a singular adjective, as "nUfp D^'DlJ^ ^ cruel V T • ": lords (lord), 2. Numerals from one to ten of the singular num- ber, frequently take plural substantives, thus D*'i2/Di^? Ppt^ a thousand men ; other numerals, even when plural, take singular nouns, as T[^m D'^'^^^V twenty years J" T T • : V The cardinals, from three to ten, which have a * Most numeral adjectives may be placed before or after their substantives: but in all other cases the substantive stands before the adjective. If the adjective precedes the substantive, there is an ellipsis of the verb to be ; as nDSn nnllfi good (is) wisdom, i. e. T : T T wisdom is good ; nn^2D Htki this (is) rest. HEBREW GRAMMAR. 6 1 masculine termination, are used to feminine nouns, and the contrary, as riT^ U>b^ three i/ears, D^'jo'' n'^bilf TT T • T T : three days, 3. When two substantives are in regimen, the adjective or the verb which in sense belongs to one, sometimes agrees with the other in number and gender, as D**Dn D"*"^^^ ni^lP the how of the mighty men are broken; D^'?vi!5 '?T'»n{^ "'»'1 *?"!? the voice of thy brother's bloods do cry. 4. An adjective singular joined to a plural sub- stantive, a verb singular to a nominative plural, or a verb plural to a nominative singular, has a distributive signification, as TT^tCQii/a ^^l)"^ thy judgments are rights i. e. each of them is right, 5. Sometimes a nominative feminine has a mascu- line verb, which is thought to express excellency ; and a masculine noun, a feminine verb, to express the con- trary, as nnvin ]r)''m y^ {fofn, though spoken of men) have done abomination, Ezek. xxxiii. 26. 6. The pronouns are often redundant. Sometimes both the separable pronoun and the affix are used for the same person; thus, Numbers xiv. 32. x^p\^ tD^pn^D your carcasses you, ^c. Sometimes the relative and personal pronoun ; thus ryo'n V']^^^ l^"?? D'i?^*^'!?^ to the saints that are in the earth, they, ^c, in Psalm xvi. 3. 62 HEBREW GRAMMAR. CHAPTER XII. OFFINDINGTHEROOT. An accurate acquaintance with the formation of nouns and verbs, will generally discover the root. — The chief difficulty is in regard to nouns, which are not ranged in the Lexicon in their places, according to the alphabet, as Latin and Greek nouns commonly are, but under their several roots. The following remarks may be useful : — 1. If when the prefixes, affixes, heemantic, and paragogic letters, signs of the gender, number, &c., are rejected, three letters remain, they commonly contain the root. 2. If only two letters remain, the root is some kind of defective verb, and may be found by prefixing ^ or ^, inserting •) or >, doubling the last letter, or adding n to the end. In many cases it is not easy to see which of these methods is to be taken ; and till a person has some good acquaintance with the language, he may be forced to try several of them ; yet the following observations will in many cases assist him : — HEBREW GRAMMAR. 63 If a noun begins with a heemantlc letter, and the first radical has a dagesh, its root commonly begins with ^ as nt£>5C « hed, from 'r\^':^\ sometimes with \ (because T • T T ^ some of these are like the others. See Chap. VIL Sect. 3, No. 4.) as ni2^5!2 « statue, from :2!5''- T •• - -T The roots of most of the nouns which begin with itt or TO begin with S as rT^^l^ ^ ^^^j ^^om nT» and T TT IXliSl^ a seat, from '^'i^'^- T - T Many nouns which have a long vowel under the first radical letter, spring from verbs whose second radical is 1 or \ or whose third is n> especially if the long vowel continues, though some addition is made to the word, as Dp, iiJlSpj from Dip. But nouns which T T T have a short vowel under the first radical, or upon having any addition at the end, admit dagesh in the second radical, commonly have for their root a verb which doubles the second radical, as ^Ott « circuity from y2t>\ ^^')D « discourse, from *?^)o to articulate. - T T • - T But p]{^ anger, (^B^ &c.) comes from rjDf^?? not r|D{s?. Nouns which end in > or p are commonly derived from verbs that end in n> as ptn « vision, from ,l?n '» ^^B fruit, from rTlQ.* * N.B. — When words of this form admit affixes, they are com- monly changed ; thus, i>1Q his fruit* 64 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 3. Sometimes only one radical letter remains ; the root of such will commonly be found by putting ^ to the beginning, and n to the end, as TjtojQ thy rod, from T T 4. In the investigation of the roots, the chief diffi- culty arises from the manner in which the words are placed in our Hebrew Lexicons; for, these do not contain the nouns and other parts of speech in alphabetic order, but the Roots or primitive words only, which are printed in large characters ; and to each of the roots they subjoin its derivatives in small characters ; so that the student must first find the root before he can dis- cover the meaning of the word derived from it : to be enabled to do so, he should be well acquainted with the principles of his grammar — particularly the formation of the verbs, both regular and irregular. He should also be careful to distinguish the servile letters from the radical, and such serviles as are sometimes radical, from those that are not so : for this purpose Buxtorf has made the following observations : — The four servile letters ^^t^^ are always radical in T T the middle or end of words, but may, or may not, be so in the beginning. The four servile niD» are usually radical in the middle, but may, or may not be so in the beginning or end. HEBREW GRAMMAR. Q^ The remaining three '^^t^ may be radical or servile • T either in the beginning, middle, or end. These three technical words, Shabhal, Menocha, Tavi, comprehend the eleven servile letters, usually distinguished, for memory's sake, by the words Etharty Mosche, Ve-Chaleh. Explanation of the following Tables, Table I. exhibits the radical and heemantic forms of nouns, with the various application of the heemantic letters to the root, according to the analogy of the language. (See Chapters III. and XII. of the Gram- mar.) All nouns derived from perfect roots are re- ducible to one or more of the forms of ^^go ^x. gr. "^b'd r\2'7)2 r]'2i712 n:D^»»» where, by changing the radicals, "^^jo becomes ^r)0 > hence, n^£D HIIDD niDDJQj &c., as in the Table. The seven letters VnD?Ci^^n called heemantiv, produce these seven orders of nouns. Those of imperfect derivation, or such as drop an initial, medial, or final radical, are represented in the lower part of the Table. Tables II. and III. show the cases of nouns at large, with or without the pronominal affixes, and are K 66 HEBREW GRAMMAR. now first arranged in order and manner similar to the conjugations of the verbs. (See Chap. IX. of the Grammar.) Tables IV. V. VI. delineate the cases, &c. of the pronouns and some particles, after the same method as in Tables II. and IIL, and sufficiently explain them- selves. N.B. — 1. It may be a very profitable exercise for the learner, frequently to read over and translate into English or Latin the columns in the following Tables and Paradigms, and an exchange of the noun or verb will afford agreeable variety in the exercise. 2. In parsing a verb, first consider what conjuga- tion, tense, and person it is, and what kind of verb ; form the proper paradigm into that conjugation, tense, and person, as above ; then change the radicals of the paradigm into those of the verb in question. For in- I stance, *7^nriN is first sing, of fut. hithpahel, from '^'pH ■ he walked, like *1)d*?» which forms its future tenses - T thus : — ■nabriN n^bw T"^»bN labH T^b« Tnb« liDbw Then, changing the radicals, it becomes '^^jnjpjs^ the word sought for. HEBREW GRAMMAR. 67 D H .D O • O ..• D 1- D . D. D»- D D D- D- D»- ^ . £1 >- in : .£1 m h £) .•* m • .CI cr •^ 5i^ ;- CI- CI 'eS r r r r r r r CT tr s ^ -2 a o P^ a o ^ O:- O O" D Di- D. D- n»- D D D- D • a* « F=-5:.p cii- S ?■■ CI CIH n CI ►• CI ► CI •■ >! H J-, L. X ^ hH r r r •r n n n n E 01 s o 1 D- D D- Q D- Dm D- Q: D D D . D •• D H .2 s. e P- CI ' "o:. la: £l:. ?• ^ 3 t— ? E^E'E^ c c C C q (U ^' £••!=• LBS: t &' g^gi 2 t-H 1— ^ £= £=• k .r- c c; 1 i% > D- D- D- g:.g:.g: &^ CI :' CI : •g^'g^g;: cr- Cl *■ q U CI 3 .a X' %. %< Zi X« %' X- X« X. X. XXX ^ D •• D •• D • O •• D •• D •• O '• D- D- D- D: D.-5:. « mi- m *• o :• CI CI CI CI • ©:• Cl:- CI:- •s > '" £'£= F F--^:. r n n q j«. fill H f.1 :• •s 13 1 O- O- J3. n- fl. «. fl. n»- 53- 53. 53 fl 51 cu D .. D •• D D •• D .. D • D.. Dh Vi"^ D H D H D : t- d 1- jh : CI CI CI CI- cr CI :• CI: {JD > " F/£^ ^ E^£^ r n c I— V^ .s IT. jT. ^. c- c- n;- C' n;.- n:- n;' c; e: c; s s D .. D •• D • • D • D D • . D- D:- D" D• ■■@-^S^R^ Oh Cl V- m : CI CI CI ci. CT Cl H CI : > r r»- r: " F/£= r n q n c 3 25 68 HEBREW GRAMMAR. O o rn H solute, gimen. om. mas. fem. com. mas. fem. s emph. relat. i CJ ^ 2 " - - . \ ^ ^ -^" Si J 1 1 % z j-^-e^-^-^tt b b .a -a ^>^>»„*-»-3S *o *S © © >»^.C:2« 3 ^ - J3 -c .a <1 CQ I^HHWffiOjH^^ H H H H Vi' Vi' D- D- D- D- D- D. D- D- D. D- II.-&:. £1:. £1:. £1 " £1 .. £1 •• £1 .. £1 •• £1 •• £1 •• £1 • . £1. £1- p: fe: r r r rr-r^r r^-r^r-r- • r ^ r »■ 'eS - IT rr - n P n:. n: a r— W • « PI .. n .. n •• n .. rt •• pt .. n •• n .. n •• rt • . f\. n-- n .. •& :. <1 D: D: D- D- D. D- D- D- D- D D; D- n. n. t-1 m :• m :• £1 •• £1 •• £1 •• £1 •• £1 •' £1 •• •• £1 • £1 • ID : ^'- PQ r r 1- J I- #r Q ^ ^' r >- ff M w iz; HH 1-5 {D n- n- n •• n .. n •• n .. n •• n .. n •• n • n- n-- n .. '^ :. S' O' O- D- D D. D- D. D- D- D- n- n. Ifl CI ;• m :• £1 •• £1 .. £1 •• £1 .. £1 •• £1 .. £1 •• £1 • £1 •• £1 '* ID: ID: < r r rrpf E^ &'§:•■&;• P=P:- ^. ,JV.. ^..^..^..^..^. ,/N ..^ ..^. -C • ^.. ^ • •& : D: D: D- D. D- D. ODD- O- D- D- n.^. £1 :• £1 :• £1 •• £1 •• £1 •• £1 .. £1 •• £1 •• £1 •• £1 • £1- £1- 0: ID: 1 r r f-ri^-f^ E^s s;:a; &^ Jl^ £i: £l: r r J fl- n. J3. C- fl. p. O- 0. fl- C- C- : -fi : ID: fi: 0. fi. fi. ID. G- ID. ID. 0. 0. . £!:• £i:- W • £1 . £1 •• £1 .. £1 •• £1 .. £1 •• £1 •. £1.. £1 " (tJ • #rk . r r f Ftr-f E'^ §-fi; w ^' F ?' s HEBREW GEAMMAK. 69 Books, absolute. Books of, regimen. My books, com. Thy books, mas. Thy books, fem. His books. Her books. Our books, com. Your books, mas. Your books, fem. Their books, mas. Their books, fem. The books, emph. The books, relat. g;g:. D •• D •. D .. D • D • D •• D • D • D • D • at- £lH £1H O*- £1*. £1»- £!•• £1"£1"£1-. r ' r •• r : r - r • r = r ^ r • r * r ^ ir^ rr -- Hh ;? n: n- n- n- pro.. J- £1 H IZ' n • £1 >• £1 H D •• D •• D •• O •• D •• D •• D • D • D - D • £i»- £1*- £i»- at- a >- at- a •' a •• a - £!•• r. r: r; r*- r .• r: r- r- r • r: Eg D- D- £1 H £1 •• 13 •• O •• D •• D •• D • O • D • D . D • D . £i'-£ii-£iH a t- a^- a y- a- a - a- a- r ■ r •• r ' r »- r =• r : r : r • r •• r = £1 H £1 1- E E CXfCX- g:.g:.g:.g:g:.g:.§:§: g:g: £1»-£lH£l»-£l»-£lH £1»-£1"£1"£1"£1- r- r= r: tt r= r^ r* r r r i:r - CH P a a= g= E^ iil'. 70 HEBREW GRAMMAR. o I - ' A law, absolute. Law of, regimen. My law, com. Thy law^ mas. Thy law, fem. His law. Her law. Our law, com. Your law, mas. Your law, fem. Their law, mas. Their law, fem. The law, emph. The law, relat. 15 H- e .5 .5 5 g g e - rr in- •-- |T o n:. ^ o M c 5 .^ 5 f c c ' r P- •«- E {? n: i-f- i f-l- g..g.g..n..n..n..g. ' r 1=- •'- E P n: ■ £'£:e^ n:- D *— f-l- S 'n*''r ' i-f- l-f fl. fl. O- a- Q' Q' Q- .^ .^ .? f-l- HEBREW GRAMMAR. 71 6 c a> s '5b a> »-. o s o s s 1 S 8 1 S 1 s 1 1 i 1 J S c3 m en JS -3-^-2 &« ;-■ (m .— ^ ^ >> >* t„ ^1 t- :3 3 'S 'o) ^ ^ >> A j3 :3 ^ 3 o O ^ ^ ^ ^ J h3 S H H ffi ffl O >H >-• H H H H n; c; c; g; n: C c q n: C C Ja n. •&:. .*- .#= .*- ./- ,r- .*" .*- .F* .r^ .#- .7= .r= 5 n. i- r r r r r r r r r r ,/— .r- ,/- .#- .r- •rz .r- ,r- .Jr- 'r- .«^ .*- .P E p c C c- C' c^r;:- c- C: C: C- C: .r= r 7^ /- • 'L. r^ r r 7^ r c r IT in- '^ n:^ P n: a n: D £ n . rt.. n . n- Ft- Ft •• rt . n . • n. • Fl- rt- . rt- rt- .-&:. 5 ,5 C .5 5 5 .P 5 .? P 5 .? .5 r r r r r err r r r r .r- .#- .t- .#- ./— .«^ ./- .r- .*- ,#- .#— .<— P :p q q C' c C- C " C : C : C: q^ C: c = *- Vr ^ fc-& n: a r C C n . . n.. n. n- n . n •• n .. n . n. n. f\ . . n.. n. *&:• .? .? .? .? .? .? 5 .? .? .? .? C r r r r r r r r r r r *r ./- ,$- .r- ./- .<- ./- .*- .1^ .5- .*- ./- ./- :p :p C c C' C:- c. C •- C : C = c- C = c;: C: #^ F 7^ . in- - fc^& a^ n: fc: £:• ^ c ^. ^ • jr^. ^.. ^• r...^..^. ^- ^- ^• J^.. r/^. •&:• .? .? .5 .5 .f .? .? .? .s ^ .? .? i' 1' r r r r r V r r r r r r .#- .1- .r- ,r- .0— .r- .1- 'r- .*- jr- ./~ ./— P :p q C c i::^- C- Q^ C =• q : c = c = C: c = *- ^ - £^& a^ ft.. B^ fc= c c fl. c- o- o. «• fl- J3 53- o- a- 13. o- J3: •&:• ,r- .g .g ^ ^ .^ .^ .^ .^ ^ p .^ r r r r r r r r r r *r r ,#— ,*- .*- .*- .1- .r- .r- .#- _*- .*- ./- .*- q C P' f:- p: P^P= f • P = p- C: f ' p ;p r 6^ fr '■ Ch ^ fl^ n.. fc: fc: n; c; a n r— 72 HEBREW GRAMMAR. sr; o z o BS ill s i e ^ ^ 13 o X: X X X X X X X X-X X -^ r i:r •'- n ;? 2= Jl= n '^ g^ .X .X .X .X .X .X .X:.X:.X .X - ir rr - n ;? g = a= o "" g= X. X. X. X. X. X. X- X. X. X- - IT ):r - |T p n: n: D - 1 ' r i:r -^ n: ^ n: n: n: n: j 1- E J5 i ^•^•ii^:P -^^-s^-^r-a-g-t- s fl. C. fl. Q- a- Q- p. Q. Q- Q' Q- ? r |:r ;p gv^ ;3 n: n: a - c IS C/2 :r- o < a? o O HEBREW GRAMMAR, 73 8 This, mas. This, fem. That, fem. These, com. These, com. Those, mas. Those, fem. What? What. What. Who? whom? Which, that. E -g ||:.|:.g=E.= g^gg'?.i;: II' iz. n. Ch n^ iz- n*- pq II n c »^ r ^ d sr.g- Z : Z : H :• H i fl ►■ fl :• i3 :• i3 • Z . j_ ^_ U U I. I. p 3 -CS-C' i 8=-. S- i\ il: J3: fl: fl . 53- J3 • fl- 53: X : Z : n : H ' fl »- fl h fl : fl . Z T ii i^= g^E"'^ n c - ^: |- . p: r- : J> »-^ ^^ " ,J> •• 74 HEBREW GRAMMAR. mas. fem. mas. fem. 1, mas , fem cT qT ^ . ^..^,.5 5 • OJOS*^ .3300) ^.£2^-^^«' O O^^ §HHfflKD>^tHHH X % : X : % : X X : X : X . X I* X T X ,' rl^ ^,^:,J-v^.^:.^:^:^:^:^: 5 r rr - IZ. - n: n: g:. g.: xn ;d W h3 X: X- X- X- X. X- X- X, X" X- X- C ii;- i:;"n;»-n; u:,^ c^ fi,- n.- n:,^ n.^ - ir rr •- n p n: n: n - .^ i O ," ^; 1— ( pj n: n: Ft: F\- P\' F\' F\ Ft • f\' F{' Pf w ^ ^ r , r r r r r r r r s #*— n. n"n: o nt-n: n: o: r\: r\\ % % ' IT rr-^ r. & n:.ft..fc=.fc=. (i^ c CO ^' pi »- Pi f Pi 1- pit- pi 1- pi i- pi I' pi r Pi ;• pi ;• w jr^ ^'^:,j^.^i-^:.jx:^:^:^:^: 1^ PU r r r • r r r r r g- r o tr t:r ^ H^p 3=^ g &= ^ ^ 1 ^ Pi. Pi- pi. Pi. pi- pi- Pi. Pi- pi. Pi- »-H n fl.^.^hfl ^H^hflHflH^heh t> . -C ^ tr tr -r- n; rj, 0:0=0 *- ^ 1 PQ rt '^' X^"^ -^..J^..^..^ .^. ^. ^. ^. £ m.. £1*- in»- CIV- cif cii- cit- in- m- ci-m- n : rii n :• n I ri t- g-\ ;. r\ : n: ri: n: g-\ : Jr #- r r r . r r ' r r r r r rr T^ - i:.p a Jl= C: C: M g-;-?;g:g;-?:-?;-g;g:- ?;•?•:• . ■ « f~ J r ' r ••• r • r »» r :• r -• r ' r • r : r : ^ ' ^ F - fc-0 8= "' g' fc^ HEBREW GRAMMAR. 75 Q Pj a3 . a ^ . 6 g-l:.-^-g'Bi|:'^;.'r-i:..li.- Feminine. > 1 X. •&..•&.. X. c. •^: -a. •&•• n;- Pj" ORDINAL. J 1 1 1 « 1 1 i i 1 c •&: -9. C" nva- •&..*&.. n: • pjJ' .§ p jr:^' P- fl- •^. n- p -a- .^• •g. a. ^ •^. " ^ P PI r 6 .S *a .||:|:-^:B:|:|:|:|:|: 76 HEBREW GRAMMAR. pa I pa < T3 s t« v> * TS 3 •T-I a 5- o >> o 1 3 3 3 3 3 O o O s CO 3 O § U: .p. •fi- • ? c Tl •fl •f|. • n: X ■ z. acr s s 6 r E a }1. Pi. •a h & I- •a ^" ^■t a . o > 1 o t- 3 O a a) 3 >• a> 3 3 3 is 3 cu W H H fe PUi c« CZ2 w K H H z. •?^- •fJ X« cr •£J. •a- .a n;. ^ •a- •fl" E' "r^' ^ 'ri : jj- 'a *■ n. j:i •a c * • ^' ^ 6 a i- h Pl*- H pi- F/ pi- n r D a- 3 5S pt»- P»H pi»- Pi- pi- Pi- f^ - Pi»- Plv r: #- . f~ .. ^ & K- D t- .^H .& l- .a- .a >- .a - .a - .a- ^ ! V- *r r f- f- r r 1 ( 1 1 r • U u u X. •?^ '^^ ?• cr Tl: •f^- •a c- ?' •a *?J»- C • fv* ^ r •• pi 'a n« .o a. L' fv' jr^ a3 c ■^ & a •a pi n = pi 1^ h a ?.=• Pi:- .%■■■ Pi:. pi:. Pi:- p\'- Pi:- Pi:. #- •■ r- " #— " rf' .& •• .a .a •• .a •• .a-. .a- .& . .&•• r r b E = b = 1 : 1: f • t' t^ t^ f ij LI u HEBREW GKAMMAR. 77 3 3 ...>>!>> - • oo.(]3a;s3a)a> y. ^E5ES^|&:pS^f5E5 o X . % . X » n n • x r X » z ' n n : - g^^-S i £■§=&= a •- n - n - n - n: H n H n: ,. n .: n :: n K n >- r ' r ' * ' r y r •' r ' r . r . r s- o Ho n»- ^0 £.fc^fc n p^ fe.e,'^ -^ h^ n pq Pi ^4 H p^g:.E:.&;:E:.e;:g:.^.:t--^:. > 0) C3 W > p=* iz i: n :• n :• n :: iz ;• n : n :. n ;: n .-• n :V H oj >-*>^*- r r r r r r r ^ T- .r- ./- 'r- .r- '*- •*- .*- .r- •*- < w c c . c • c : q c »• c : c c c H q H - ir |:r .'- n ^ a = a a - « HH CO w /I- n. rt- rt. n- n- rt- n- rt- m- n- ffi n n • iz •• n •• iz • n c n: n • n n H ./- rrrrrrrrrr ^ •/— •r- 'r- '1- ./- '/- '^ 'C: .*" ."^ .*" O c q. q.. q: q q*. q- q q-- q>. q^ eq - r:- rr - n: -i n. n- a - S o —1 p n. r\. n. Fi. n. n- n- n- n. n- n- <1 n- q n q q •• n • q •• q q q •• q •• pj r r r r *■ r r r r r J .*— •r- 'P- •#- -r- -r:: 'r- 'r~ 'r^ -r- .r- > .'i- rr- .5- .;^ ^ rr- rr- P n s 03 £ q . q •• q : q q »■ c • q • q . q h c h ^ H o s < <{ PL, >< ^. H Abstract. Preterite. Imp^ 6 6 .^ 6 CL, h5 fi^ ^ PQ eu 3 3 >^, ^ ^ . O O O (P 3 3 QJ s a \ 3 3 O O ! X 3 ^ •*= "■ ^^ i 3 ^ 1-^ i:^ H^ b^ H^ i^ VT^ ..^ H a'a:«;.o:.a;.afl:.fl:.fl;. a. X C 3 3 _P !. f^ i.j^' i.j^ '-J^ i.j^ i. r^ !._p !._f\ i. IZ IZ- t 1 1 1 1 ^ •••J^ .-VT^ .Vr^ ••• J^ .-^ .•• J^ ..-^ yj^ .•• iz m^e n;. '^ g= 5.^^ 1 iz- iz' z. n. C' r ^ F r r iz IZ IZ. IZ- n IZ IZ IZ. IZ IZ • IZ ■ r: J^ vT^ 'vJ^ 13 o IZ ►^ IZ »■ IZ H IZ H IZ - n »■ IZ .. IZ - l; H j^ ..j^ "j^ "j^ "^ -^ "j^ "j^ "j^ •• IZ t-.q-f- g:q-s n- r- X- n- o- 3 3 3 3 n- IZ- IZ- IZ IZ- IZ IZ- n- iz- IZ- IZ n ^71 Paragogic Letters. t. IZ '^ HEBREW GRAMMAR. 79 Future, fenoni. PahuL .3 O 3 (U i 3 rt c 3 «3 rt ^ ^ i S S Ph 3 S a ^' c;. j;,:.n;._p-..c;.j;:.n;. - f~- r -n r r Jr •'i- •s ^ J^ J^ J^ X- 5.-5..a;-5:f5 n n c £ Q i\ Q F F.F r- r> h,j> t-'V, r,j> h-^ .►-^ H'n r !-• r '^ I- >r I- ^ vf^ vf^ vf^ . jr^ r I- • r V- r :• r- a C j^ .^ .-jn :^ "J^ .'^ *% ..^ • -s; JO : ^ •• fl " fl : fl • r I- • r ♦• r :• I- £, n c F ri-*^ ir '^ i- Vr r-'- I- J. ^.r , r ^ r ^;. p c c g r J3 • J3 . 33 • J3 ■ i3 a n «= F ■c;'-c^fvr.e'^Rr.5-i^r.e>- -Si- fl»-J3*-33»-J3*-J3H 4^ . J^ vT^ vT^ VJ^ •• r- r • r »- r :• r £, n c F c^.?^ jr^-^;;;^ P n r r 33- 33- 33- 33 33- & C C F 80 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Abstract, Preterite. Imperat Preterite. Imperative. Future. Infinitive. Benoni. Pahul. He. She. Thou, mas. Thou, fem. I. They. You, mas. You, fem. We. i s S c2 O O |!|:!'ir ^ f?^g;g::g:^ g;:g;:fl" ■%%■ 13 -C S|ri;-|;- 1- ^ g^g;g::g:^ g;.g;:«- [z IZ n •gr-g-g n nn 'a n n ^ : n ^ : n n ^ P/g.g::g:-^ g;:g;:g- •g : *g •••g n nn -13 3 n •§ . n •& H n n •6r-g:-6r-&:-gr-&^-gr-gr-g: n rihn.n n. n n- n- n.. r p % r o : ^' : : : n n r n n n n iz r •g -g . g . 'g . 'g ■ g -g . -g - g . f. ftHii-i"fi n.n n- IZ rz n ^g.-g.-g n n n 15 a- o •i, l.|. 1. n n n n 1 n n »■ n • n • n-n n •• n •'. n !. 'a; rr n X n n n n 1 n n n n »- n •• n •• n • n n . n •• n .. n nn HEBREW GRAMMAR. 81 Future, Benoni, Pa/iw/. Thou, mas. Thou, fem. He. She. We. You, mas. They, mas. You, they, fem. i Mas. singular. Mas. plural. ^ Fem. singular. Fem. plural. Mas. singular. Mas. plural. \ Fem. singular. Fem. plural. 11 =l:=§..-§-^a = =§ n fi • n •■ n :• n 6 c c £ £i n q g •; q • q . ;^ H q • p ; q • ^ H q ^%:n a-n an a. n" .p .'^ ." .'^ .'^ n n . n V- n :• n n 1^ C E n P;P;P;?;a;- a ! a -a -a : a ■• :'.:q-q-- vq-Pyq-.-J^ >q- 53 J3 fl • O fl .. £, n q E 1 ••a.a.|-a- ^-ag a- 1 h rt." ft 1 ft i? fj.. q 'a- ft o o o o n •a.=S.=a.-a:=§. o '- q i'l'l-"'!'"'! i I-- n' n n • n •- n :• n f, C C £ i;.g:,g:|:g:.e;g:|;g:. n n- J3- Q- Q Q' ?;f;f;f;F;- M 82 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 1 Abstract. Po'eteonte. Imperative. Preterite. Imperative. Future. Infinitive. Benoni. Pahul. He. She. Thou, mas. Thou, fem. I. They. You, mas. You, fem. We. i J 1 i § = .£3 -C O H H >H •r- r\y-r\t-0-\\-nt-nt-rM-r\"rfr-tf •§'-§;-§:.-§.'.§:.a"-S •'.•§:•§:. •a a- a • a* 2 a y a Jki & I. £i «• £i . d Sb tj Si S^ .. n- c- c- /a t- n 1- ni 1- •a a .g=a .g = ri. n. n- n. o- n. ri' n. ri. •§=•§;•§■•§:.•§:.•§•••§:.•§:.-§:. •a a -a a 1 a .g.a .g^ a -a ►a ..a -a -a a ••a--a" iz- C' x- n. fl' ^. ^. ^- ^. 5<- •a a a & a ^^ "-^ --^s /^N si. ^ ^ O. c- c- c- c- c- c- c- c- c- 1 1 :•§:.•§:.•§••••§••§:.•§ :.•§••• C' c c c •a = |:|| 1- IZ" Xi-lZ'- «»■ 9 -a & a •§••§•;■§:.•§:.•§:••§•••§:•§•••§:. Hill n- c- c- c- ir- c c- c- c- c • c • c • c • c • c c •• c • c •• oi ni ni Qi ni ni ni ni n« c c c c 1 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 83 Future, Benoni. Pahul. Thou, mas. Thou, fem. He. She. We. You, mas. They, mas. You, they, fem. I' Mas. singular. Mas. plural. i Fem. singular. Fem. plural. Mas. singular. Mas. plural. Fem. singular. Fem. plural. rfi;-i'|-.i^i:-rii. .ry .p p .p .p a i: '^ £ a § a^p ^ g. 5. a ^ • a -\^ § § -S"^ -g'-Q .§-a gh ^ g. •§=■ ^ 1 c'c 1 §'.§'.g;-a .§■•§ .g-a .§:. ^ g. •r •§^g-a^§' a n; £ a a a. a & a 1 a p;. f * It-It ri'|."-ri'-i'l--ri:. 1^ •g^-§r-g";g' n i: C l|'|:-i=|^§-|'f|:; •§' & 1^ C £ 84 HEBREW GRAMMAR. -^i^^rac^ Preterite. /?72p&ra£tiU Preterite. Imperative. Future. Infinitive, Benoni. Pahul. He. She. Thou, mas. Thou, fem. I. They. You, mas. You, fem. We. ill! 3 3 .V . O O 3 C H H >^ >" o 6 & S a 3 n. n. n. rr rr rr^ " p^g .^ .? 8 .P .? .8 c- n- n- a f g 13 .^ .R .g- .g^ .g- .1^ .p. .^ .p- n. n. r:. ■g=|:|- IZ 3 D go g. » ■ & & & & - - - - - a. r-: lI-X»■C^O: ^^. p.. ^ r^. r^ a a a h a n: c- n. iz; nrC: urn; nv IZ ►^ IZ H IZ •- IZ m: rL. HL. fl. '«3 i. i.|. 1- fl ' c »^ fr' §■' &• & &• &' &' i 11 i: iz n- r:- fz- iz- iz iz- W y=^ 'W P- -P- -J^ .W 'W .P- IZ IZ IZ r IZ HEBREW GRAMMAR. 85 1 Future. Benoni, Pahul Thou, mas. Thou, fem. He. She. We. You, mas. They, mas. You, they, fem. •i Mas. singular. Mas. plural. Fem. singular. Fem. plural. Mas. singular. Mas. plural. Fem. singular. Fem. plural. i fi s . s s s s g s - n. Q & •= c HL HL n. HL rr rr rr tT^ D C £ 3 -fi S-D D a S g g: f f o..p_..a..fl.. 6 n £ 1' &B.-& R" 6 n ^ fi a 5° □ a & g «; r FJ R: &: &. &&'S-.°'&'°'|- &■§■•• !■ • g g g g D n £ I: a D «= c 86 HEBREW GRAMMAR. -465«rrtc^ i^reie)'27e. Imperative, ft ^ pS 1 fS ^ s <2_ . _ i 1 i 1 1 1| 1 ;! ml 3 "^ c^c.g p- |=C=J HtI i g :. iz ^ X i; iz .^ g :. ^ C^i.g |.? |:|:J IZ IZ IZ- n X XhX X X X X X X Q' Q* Q, i IB c- c. 35. c. g. i i ^ ^ ^ ^ i|:|:ii;|i:|;| 52 i:| j E ^ c-ciHn-ii'-ni-izHiiv.iii-CK 1 IZ IZ- IZ- iz- C- IZ- IZ. IZ- IZ- ^Mtt^ lit X x"^ j( HEBREW GRAMMAR. 87 Future, Benoni, Pahul Thou, mas. Thou, fem. He. She. We. You, mas. They, mas. You, they, fem. 1 Mas. singular. Mas. plural. i Fem. singular. Fem. plural. Mas. singular. Mas. plural. Fem. singular. Fem. plural. : X X ^ X ^ X ^ x^ i^ ^ & g^g 1 ^ & n^£ ^ ?' ^ ^ '^ P h a *^ c: V^-%:^ g=x 1 1 p- X n c £ K S %.^ X ^ % ? i^ •X p}yp\yp\yp\y 1 o. a. fl. g. 3-§:§r.«-§r.s-;gr.&::§.': n- J3 .. 53 •• J3 •• J3 •• a »^ E E..ee;e;.q;e:.e-^:.e; X* i:|:i; I 88 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Abstract. PreteHte, Imperaliw 6 > 2: q 3 CL, KH fe 2i --s c ^ S ' i E§ E§ ^ H H OJ S 5 H >H >H ^ a> HH H >H >H ^. S O 3 ^ O i -H"^^'^::^ 4^=.-5r n ^=---i? n : iz • X :• n • n ^..^ iz ^ n *- c- n- iz- n t- r~ L. ^ r r rr r r r " ^ '^^'^ P- S & J? Oh iz- rz' X' iz ' J3 ' c- c. c- c- c IZ • IZ • C . IZ n f "ChC q- c CP IZ- IZ. IZ' IZ ex. o -£ IZ H IZ H 11 - IZ ►^ IZ H IZ H IZ »^ IZ H IZ »^ ^'^ChJZ q. C:C:P r . IZ . g :; IZ • g ; IZ- IZ- c IZ IZ- IZ- IZ- IZ- n- IZ C . IZ c •- IZ • IZ • c c •• c • t~ t^ w *" *■ *■ IT r r r IZ n- IZ. IZ q IZ • IZ c r\ \ r\ \ T-\ \ r\ IZ HEBREW GRAMMAR. 89 I^uture. Benoni. Pahul Thou, mas. Thou, fem. He. She. We. You, mas. They, mas. You, they, fem. } Mas. singular. Mas. plural. Fem. singular. Fem. plural. Mas. singular. Mas. plural. Fem. singular. Fem. plural. " t. I=|f| !^|^|K^^^§^^^|^ 1^ f^m^&^^ 1' E" 1 n a c •£ I'- 1^ n >= C 1-^ C fi c £ r'|;|'l^'|='fj'|''^'|-; n- fl. fl- Q 1 ^ 90 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Abstract. Preterite. Imperative. 6 's 1 s 1 'i -3 11 II II • o o o S 2 H > 13 ^ n n n ' -^ f 13 Oh 2 IZ- IZ- IZ- r G« fi« fi' f n n.n r r D p D D p D p D D a'a.:a:.a:.a;.a"a:.a:.a:. .P .P .^ -^ n : n . n . / n PI? j 13 3 D g i p g .. a' -fi.a' fi. p p p p p p p p p a"a.:a.'.a:.a:.a a-'-a-'a:. 'Jc ^■a=a=R=s= f— 'c •*" .*" 'S* *'~ .'" .'" *- q^q q- c; C:p n-izwiz-i 1 13 o 5 X n fl D'D'DiDiD'D'D.D.D' nrt»-rinnrtnrtn 1 .g .5 .g .^ g n c n- iz- n- iz n- iz- iz- alaa'fi-i'l'- iz c^^n: n; '^ C: c p IZ IZ- IZ I a^araj HEBREW 1 GRAMMAR. 91 1 Future. Benoni, PaAw/. Thou, mas. Thou, fem. He. She. We. You, mas. They, mas. You, they, fem. Mas. singular. Mas. plural. ^ Fem. singular. Fem. plural. Mas. singular. Mas. plural. Fem. singular. Fem. plural. nmmf •g •p .p .p .p .P & n q £ n n.g.n ^' 6 C£ % •s s s s -fi %■ n •- c ^'" n n. ft 1- n i. & n £ o-p:.g:.g"g:.B:.g:.D:.g:. g- a- g- g- g- £, r q £ 92 HEBREW GRAMMAR. >< X o > H H Ph He. She. Thou. I. They. Ye. i 1^ '^•* -ii" •^" •^- -^ • -^ • ^r ?r ?:. ?:. p^ p:. ^' ^- .s- ^: ?• I •pi: fe K -€:•' '^•' '^" '^- '^- -i^" pH ilt- i3« Q* Q^ Q* r »• J- • |- •• r- •• i- I' •• ■^ r r g: e^ i. ■fl" C rx.. ^.. rv.. r... r^ •• r^ .. 13»- i3*" i3' U' Q *" Q * ^ C" g^ g- 5 g » - ;? J? i p p HEBREW GRAMMAR. 93 4 oT , ^ «5 s . o^ arn, fe arn ye O -a ^ 5 .> 1 o V o •4iJ .^ O hJ hJ hJ t-H >H H ^*- ^. ^. X.- c;- •^"■-i^*- gr g:g- ■«;• ^• g:-gr p- ^•p- p* ' o. ?• X 2^ X: ^. n;. ^H^|.^l- C" CL JT" tT" tJr' ir^ ir •" ^ j^ ^..^H^ h4%. ^. X:- X:. X: n;. X;-^*^ Q>^ Q' Q . J3 • Ji • ^.. r.. -^••i^ • J3 •• 53 •• , r- |r: |r • t^- t^ fl •• J3- fl- jTl.. |r |r: > - c s- fc c , •P E' 5=^ W ^ s < #r ST Pi ir " j; >• J^..^|. ^. ^. X:- X- X: m. S ^H^f J^H g P^g;: g:g" 'n'.'.'B^ 's'-'n" l-H i3 .. i3 • i3 •• IZ g^ .r- irr n" E- ti n- g" ^»- ^. ^. X:- m. •«r ^r ^.-g- •S" "§•*• f? & § ^ ^ X- X:- c;- c;- -G*"'^"'^-- ^ -^ • j^'J^" g •• 13 1- fl H J3h flv Q'Q" jr.. 1-.. J-.. t- •• 1- •• r" r n :• n :• n :• n :• n :• #r Jr n n *• a *- n :• n :• a *- jn H^ »- ^- ^• X: X:- m- n;- •J^ •"'^ ^--^^ J3 • Q ;• 13 •• Q •• -^ -^ • ^..^.. a a " r-. r- Q" Q" Q" Q" D '"^ D fi r»- !-»- t" r- n *- a - -/—N "- N #- rr r— *>— >^^ ■^^ APPENDIX ON THE ACCENTS, FROM THE GRAMMAR OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE, BY MOSES STUART, PROFESSOR OF SACRED LITERATURE AT ANDOVER. Besides Metlieg, Mappik, &c., the other smaller marks of various forms accompanying the Hebrew text are accents. They are usually called tonic, to distinguish them from Metheg, the Euphonic accent. They are divided into two great classes, viz., {a) such as separate words, or parts of sentences, from each other, which are called Disjunctives ; (5) such as serve to show that words are to be closely connected, either in the reading or in the sense, which are called Conjunctives. The following Table exhibits the forms, names, and classification of the accents. Some are used both in poetry and prose ; and such have no mark prefixed. Others are peculiar to prose, and these have (f ) pre- fixed. Others are peculiar to poetry, and these have (*) prefixed. Poetry means (according to the accentu- 96 APPENDIX. ators) only the books of Job, Psalms, and Proverbs, called teclinically rijQN {truth)y these being the three initials of the Hebrew names of these books. (Observe, that the parallel blank line within the parentheses, which stands next after the numbers, is intended to represent the line of Hebrew letters, that the position of the accents in relation to the letters over and under which they stand, may be exhibited.) I. — Disjunctives. I. — Pause Accents or Disjunctives of the first Class, 1. (; — ) Silluq, pi ^£3, i. e. stop, pause. In con- nexion with the two large points that always follow it, it is named piD5 J^^DlS |?1^Dj pctuse at the end of a verse. Elsewhere the same mark stands for Methegh. S. ( — ) Athnahhy nDflJ^j i- e. a respiration. ♦3. ( — ) Merka Mahpakh^ *^5n5C NS^)C> a com- posite accent. See Nos. 23, 25^ II. Occasional Pause Accents, or Disjunctives of the second Class, t4. ( — ) Tiphkha, nn3^ (posterius,) i. e. palm of the hand, so called from the shape. It is also named NnitOj retardation^ and (when next before Silluq APPENDIX. 97 and Athnahh) is^b-^l^a, strong. In poetry it is merely a conjunctive. See No. 30. *5. ( — ) Tiphhha (anterius,) praepositive. t6. ( — ) Zaqeph Qaton^ f rop npT? elevator minor. t7. ( — ) Zaqeph Gadhol ^S'^^ jnptj elevator ma- T '•• T jor. t8. ( — ) Segholta^ i^r)*?:ip? i« e. cluster of grapes; postpositive. III. — Lesser Disjunctives^ or Disjunctives of the third Class. t9. ( — ) Tehhiry 'T':!):!, i. e. interruption. 10. ( •— ) Rehhiay '^'^y\, i. e. resting or lying over. *11. ( — ) Rehhia Geresh, a composite accent, with the Geresh praepositive, comp. Nos. 10, 15. f 12. ( — ) Pashta, ^tDU>% i. e. expansion (of the voice) ; postpositive. 13. ( — ) Zarqa, Np*!?, i. e. dispersion ; postposi- tive. In poetry (when not postpositive) it is a mere conjunctive. See No. 31. tl4. ( — ) Yethibh, l*»ris i. e. sitting ; praepositive. It is also called D^iPIJQ l^llf t'^^ anterior, and ^BXli'O T : V •• : - '^'^)^ tuba inferior. *15. ( — ) Geresh, ti^'^ii, i. e. expulsion. Also called O'ltD shield, and ^'i\^ retention. •j-16. ( — ) Garshdyim, D^'i^'lil* i« e. double Geresh. o 98 APPENDIX. Also called D''D1tD) TDItO, dual and plur. of D'ltO, • - T : ' • T : V V shield, tl7. ( — ) Telisha Gedhola, T\bSll T]'0)'^blr\^ i- e. T : T • : evulsio major ; also is^D*!)^ 5 praepositive. qp T : - f 18. ( — ) Qarne Phara, .^•^g i^*^p, i. e. the two T T ••: : - horns of a heifer, (from the shape.) 19. ( — ) Pazer, ^^5, i. e. disperser. Also "T T "T 20. ( I ) Pesiq, iP"»D5> i- e- cessation. Written in the line between words, and placed (as here) perpen- dicularly. Also called isjp05, separation. Always pre- ceded by a conjunctive on the word after which it is placed. II. — Conjunctives. 21. ( ) Munahh, i. e. joined. Also yjfi ^t^hf J T T V tuba recta, and *^^Y\ 1^^ iub(^ amhulans. In poetry, both superius and inferius. On an ultimate syllable, and followed by Athnahh, Zarqa, or Zaqeph Qaton, it is called '•i^y, Illiiy (Hillui), i. e. ascent. When placed at the beginning of a word, and followed by Zaqeph Qaton, it is named 'jli'i^jo Mekharhel, sieve, i. e. agitation (of the voice.) 22. ( — ) Qadhma, js^jo^p, i. e. before. APPENDIX. 99 23. ( — ) Merka, {s?:d^» (Apoc. form of jsj^'^js^jo) ^ T :«v T : -^ - i. e. prolonging. Also '^r'^'^js^jfi, *^'^*)p idem. f 24. ( — ) Merka Khephula^ M^IS^ {^23l?0) >• ^• Merka doubled. Also ^"''ntpin Vy^^ *wo rods. 25. ( ) Mahpakh^ ^IfDriJO) i- e. inversion. Also "^Gnja *1E)i!/ crooked trumpet, *^l9n "Ip^^ inverted trumpet. In poetry, superius or inferius ; in prose, inferius. 26. ( — ) Shalshelethy DY^b^^ i- e. chain. t27. ( — ) Darga, ti^y^, steps, gradation. f 28. ( — ) Telisha Qetanna, HlDtOp I^i2/''^J^ i. e. T - : T • : evulsio minor. Also i^Ji;''jJ):i (eradicator ?) postpositive. T : - 29. ( — ) Yerahh, r]^ (properly VTW Yareach), i. e. the moon. Also ijoV'p Tiy^ the moon of a day old; r\^y:;, round ; ^^^^^ wheel TV-: - : - *30. ( — ) Tiphhha (posterius) in poetry a con- junctive. Compare No. 4. *31. ( — ) Zarqa, in poetry a conjunctive, when it is not postpositive. See No. 13. The Accents are said to be subservient to three purposes; viz. 1. To mark the tone-syllable. 2. To serve as signs of interpunction. 3. To regulate the reading, or rather cantillating of the Scriptures. 1. To mark the tone-syllable (which is generally 100 APPENDIX. the lasty is their general use ; but the cases of ex- ception are very numerous. a. Eight of them are always confined to the same position^ let the tone be where it may ; e. g. Segholta, Pashta, Zarqa, (No. 13,) and Telisha Qetanna, must always be put over the last letter of a word, and are, therefore, called postpositive, while Tiphhha a/z^mz^*, Yethibh, Telisha Gedhola, and Geresh in the compo- site accent Rebhia Geresh (No. 11,) belong only to the first \eiiev of a word, and are, therefore, called pr.e- posiTivE. See the Table. Of course these accents sometimes fall in with the tone-syllable ; but often- times the reverse of this happens. h. Many words have two accents on them. In this case, if both accents are of the same form, the first marks the tone ; e. g. ^xSrSt with the tone on the penult. If the accents are of different forms, then the last (viz. that to the left) marks the tone syllable, i. e. if it be- long to those accents which always mark the tone ; as, D''Svitt^1> where D*»'i is acuted. Here is one conjunc- tive and one disjunctive upon the word, but sometimes V/ p there are two disjunctives, as i^'ip, Lev. x. 4 ; and sometimes two even on the same monosyllable, as nT> * For the several classes of words which have the tone on the PENULT vid. Stuart's Heb. Gr. sect. 100. APPENDIX. 101 Gen. V. 29. Often, two conjunctives are put upon the same word, as b^lh Ps. xcvi. 1. All this shows an < T utter improbability that the accents were originally in- vented to mark the tone. It is much more probable that they served only to the cantillation or chanting of the Scriptures. 2. Accents mark in part the inter punction. This is the use most commonly assigned to them as the principal one. In many cases, in fact, the accents accord well with the divisions of sense. In the poetical books the pause accents are useful in marking the end of (ttIxol; and they generally do this with accuracy. But in all parts of the Bible there is a multitude of cases, in which the accents make pauses in utter dis- agreement with the sense : e. g. in Gen. i. 1, we have D^'i'7^?> i- e. a pause-accent (Athnahh) of the largest kind (like our colon) placed between a verb with its subject and the Ace. case which the verb governs ; and so in many hundreds of instances. This shows that the use of accents by way of interpunction is only secondary. 3. Accents also mark the cantillation. The Jews do not read, but cantillate their Scrip- tures, as the Moslems do their Koran. The accents direct this. The Koran too has marks for this purpose. This appears to me to have plainly been the original 102 APPENDIX. design of the accents, viz., to guide the recitative. Now as this was regulated, more or less, by the tones of words and by the sense of passage, so the accentuation usually accords with these objects. Still in a multitude of cases it has no direct reference to them, but merely to reading or cantillation. N.B.— The proper place of an accent (neither prae- positive nor postpositive) is over or under the left side of the letter which begins a syllable. The imperfection of types, however, sometimes prevents printed books from following this rule. KERI AND KETHIBH. There are about 1000 marginal readings in our common Hebrew Bibles, most of which are quite an- cient. Some of them correct grammatical anomalies, some are euphemisms, and some propose a different word. They are probably the result of an ancient re- cension of Hebrew manuscripts. The marginal word is called '»*^jp Keri, which means read, i. e. this word is to be read instead of the word in the text to which it relates, and which is called ^"riS? Kethibh, i. e. written or text. The vowel-points under the Kethibh belong to the Keri which is printed without points. If a word is omitted in the text, the vowel points stand in the place With a small circle over them, while the letters APPENDIX. 103 belonging to them are printed in the margin, as in Judg. XX. 13. This is called ^Tlp ^f*?1 ''"]? 'f'ead hut not written. If a word is superfluous in the text, it is left unpointed, as in Ezek. xlviii. 16. This is called ''")? K^l ^Tli written hut not read, — Stuart's Gram- mar, § 103. THE END. WORKS rUBTilSHED BY MACHEN AND CO., 8, D'OLIER-STREET, DUBLIN, AT A MODERATE PRICE. FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS, THE FIRST SIX BOOKS OF VIRGIL'S ^NEID, (BEING THE PORTION HEAD FOR THE ENTRANCE COURSE OF TRINITY COLLEGE,) WITH COPIOUS ENGLISH NOTES. Selected by R. GAI.BRAITH, T. CD., And a Prologomena, &c. &c., written expressly for the Work, By Henry Owgan, Ex-Schol., &c., T.C.D. The Text is printed from WAGNER'S EDITION OF HEYNE, which is considered the standard; the readings and punctuation (wherever there is a variance between those commen- tators) of Heynk's original edition being also preserved ; THE NOTES, which are extremely COPIOUS, have been selected with the utmost care from Hkyne, Wagner, Delphin, Forbigbr, &c. &c. &c. The GEOGRAPHY, HISTORY, CHRONOLOGY, MYTHOLOGY, and AN- TIQUITIES are so fully explained, as to supersede to a great extent the necessity of reference to other books, translations, (not too literal,) or ordines verborum of the more difficult sentences given, and references uniformly made to those passages from Homer and the other Greek and early Latin writers which have been imitated by Virgil. Numerous Quotations from the English Poets are also inserted, and no pains have been spared to render this Work adapted to the present advanced state of education. KING'S (REV. L. W.) ELEMENTS OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. IN GREEK AND ENGLISH ; Comprehending also the Principles and Definitions of Universal Grammar, with a copious Syntax, &c. &c. 12mo. bound, 2*. Qd. LITERARY NOTICE FROM THE STANDARD. " A Greek Grammar, recently published by the Rev. Dr. King, of Ennis College, has been submitted for our consideration, and we are fully persuaded, not merely from our own private judgment, but also from the opinions of men more competent to form a correct view of such a publication, that it is a book likely to be extensively useful in our classical schools. There were two grammars generally employed hitherto, Valpy's, and a book which goes under the name of Wright's ; the former is certainly a valuable work, but is very deficient in some points, for instance the declension of nouns ; it has also much extraneous matter, and is enormously dear : the latter is only a vile translation of Wettenhall's by an incompetent hand — full of errors, and deficient in clearness, arrangement, and the elucidation of principles. Now we do think that Dr. King's Grammar contains almost every thing which is necessary for teaching the rudiments of Greek, without being burdened by a useless display of learning. The definitions are exceed- ingly clear and simple — the arrangement good — the illustrations of nouns and adjectives copious — the exact sense of tenses marked with much care, and the syntax full without being tedious, and correct without pedantry. In addition to its other qualities it has the imiwrtant one of being cheap, and this, not from the small quantity of matter, but from the rejection of what is useless." ETON LATIN GRAMMAR, NEW EDITION, By R. GALBRAITH, T.C.D. 12mo. boimd, Is. Qd. In this edition of the Eton Grammar several inaccuracies of former editions are removed, some of the definitions amended, notes, carefully selected, have been added to the declensions, Ac, and the text is so disposed as to present an entire declension, mood, tense, &c., on the samo page. For the Latin rules of the Eton the syntax of Rudiman has been substituted, the concise- ness and judicious arrangement of which have justly procured for it a decided preference. HARVEY'S CARPENTER'S PRONOUNCING SPELLING, Containing, in addition to the original text, which is throughout revised, much new and im- portont mattor; am i.nit.g »vaiv;ii i^ nvi^essai y lut i<.>.v>iiiii)$ !,■■«. •uuiii.viii» of Greek, without being burdened by a useless display of learning. The definitions are exceed- ingly clear and simple — the arrangement good — the illustrations of nouns and adjectives copious — the exact sense of tenses marked with much care, and the syntax full without being tedious, and correct without pedantry. In addition to its other qualities it has the important one of being cheap, and this, not from the small quantity of matter, but from the rejection of what is lueless." ETON LATIN GRAMMAR, new edition. By R. GALBRAITH, T. C. D. 12mo. bound. Is. 6d. In this edition of the Eton Grammar several inaccuracies of former editions are remored, someof the definitions amended, notes, carefully selected, have been added to the declensions, Jfec, and the text is so disixjsed as to present an entire declension, mood, tense, &c., on the same page. For the Latin rules of the Eton the synUx of Rudiman has been substituted, the concise- ness and Judicious arrangement of which have justly procured for it a decided preference. HARVEY'S CARPENTER'S PRONOUNCING SPELLING, Containing, in addition to the original text, which is throughout revised, much new and Im- porUnt matu-r ; ami)ng which will be found a List of English Derivations, a selection of Gbbbk and Latin Nocns, with their original plurals, and of Latin and French Phrases which arc most frequently used by English writers, together with an extensive collection of English Syno.nymes, explained in alphabetical order, with illustrations and cxamnlcs from the most a|>provcd Authors, revised and improved by W. S. Harvky. i3mo. bound, U. 14 DAY USE RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED LOAN DEPT. This book is due on the last date stamped below, or on the date to which renewed. Renewed books are subject to immediate recall. 1 nOec'63XS ■ 1 1 • ,7,^^^ 1 r f - 1 . LD 21A-40m-4.'63 (D6471sl0)476B General Library University of Californij Berkeley